韦兰若篇注释显示巴利原文
Verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā
我将阐明以‘tena’等起首的文句之种种含义,
以此显示,我将作律藏的义理解说。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tenātiādipāṭhassa, atthaṃ nānappakārato; Dassayanto karissāmi, vinayassatthavaṇṇana’’nti.
如前所述,我将解说‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’等词句的义理。即如下:‘tena’是一个无指定对象的指示词。它虽未明确说出具体所指,但在后文中,应以意义上已成立的‘yena’一词与之对应。因为后文中,作为请佛制律之因的具寿舍利弗的思虑已经成立。因此,应这样理解此处的关联:在具寿舍利弗生起思虑的那一时刻,世尊正住在韦兰若。这在整部律藏中都是成立的,即:凡说到‘tena’之处,都应以在前文或后文中意义上已成立的‘yena’一词与之呼应。显示巴利原文
Vuttattā tena samayena buddho bhagavātiādīnaṃ atthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāmi. Seyyathidaṃ – tenāti aniyamaniddesavacanaṃ. Tassa sarūpena avuttenapi aparabhāge atthato siddhena yenāti iminā vacanena paṭiniddeso kātabbo. Aparabhāge hi vinayapaññattiyācanahetubhūto āyasmato sāriputtassa parivitakko siddho. Tasmā yena samayena so parivitakko udapādi, tena samayena buddho bhagavā verañjāyaṃ viharatīti evamettha sambandho veditabbo. Ayañhi sabbasmimpi vinaye yutti, yadidaṃ yattha yattha ‘‘tenā’’ti vuccati tattha tattha pubbe vā pacchā vā atthato siddhena ‘‘yenā’’ti iminā vacanena paṭiniddeso kātabboti.
于此略示一例:“诸比丘,我将为诸比丘制定学处,因为苏定那行了淫法;正因为他行了,所以我将制定。”这便是所说之意。如此,先以义已成就的前文“yena”一词来指代,是合理的。又如“那时,世尊住在王舍城,当陶师之子檀尼耶偷取国王的木材时”,以义已成就的后文“yena”一词来指代,也是合理的。这就是“tena”一词的含义。至于“samayena”中的“samaya”一词,首先——显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ mukhamattanidassanaṃ – ‘‘tena hi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmi, yena sudinno methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevi; yasmā paṭisevi, tasmā paññapessāmī’’ti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ tāva pubbe atthato siddhena yenāti iminā vacanena paṭiniddeso yujjati. Tena samayena buddho bhagavā rājagahe viharati, yena samayena dhaniyo kumbhakāraputto rañño dārūni adinnaṃ ādiyīti evaṃ pacchā atthato siddhena yenāti iminā vacanena paṭiniddeso yujjatīti vutto tenāti vacanassa attho. Samayenāti ettha pana samayasaddo tāva –
于集会、刹那、时节、群集、原因、见解中,
亦见于获得、断除与通达之中。
显示巴利原文 Samavāye khaṇe kāle, samūhe hetu-diṭṭhisu; Paṭilābhe pahāne ca, paṭivedhe ca dissati.
确实如此。例如:“或许我们明天也能前往,等待适当的时机和时刻”(长部1.447)等,此处为‘集会’义。“诸比丘,确实只有一个刹那与时机是修习梵行的”(增支部8.29)等,此处为‘刹那’义。“暑热时节、酷热时节”(波逸提358)等,此处为‘时节’义。“在森林中的大集会”等,此处为‘群集’义。“跋陀利,你确实未能通达这个时机——世尊住在舍卫城,世尊也会知道我——名为跋陀利的比丘在导师的教法中于学处上未圆满奉行”(中部2.135)等,此处为‘原因’义。“那时,游方僧乌伽诃摩那,即沙门文迪迦之子,住在茉莉园中独一厅堂的丁杜卡树皮衣处,宣说时机论”(中部2.260)等,此处为‘见解’义。显示巴利原文
Tathā hissa – ‘‘appeva nāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.447) evamādīsu samavāyo attho. ‘‘Ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’ti (a. ni. 8.29) evamādīsu khaṇo. ‘‘Uṇhasamayo pariḷāhasamayo’’ti (pāci. 358) evamādīsu kālo. ‘‘Mahāsamayo pavanasmi’’nti evamādīsu samūho. ‘‘Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi – ‘bhagavā kho sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, bhagavāpi maṃ jānissati – bhaddāli nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī’ti ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.135) evamādīsu hetu. ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena uggahamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme paṭivasatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.260) evamādīsu diṭṭhi.
『于现法中,有何利益;于来世,有何利益,
由通达义理,贤者称为智者。』(相应部1.129)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo attho, yo cattho samparāyiko; Atthābhisamayā dhīro, paṇḍitoti pavuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.129);
像这些地方,是‘获得’的意思。‘以正慢的通达,作苦的边际’(中部1.28)等,此处是‘断除’的意思。‘苦的逼迫义、有为义、热恼义、变易义、通达义’(无碍解道2.8)等,此处是‘通达’的意思。然而,在此处它是‘时间’的意思。因此,应当如是了知此处的含义:当具寿舍利弗生起作为请求制定律藏之因的思虑的那个时候,即是此处所说的‘在那个时间’。显示巴利原文
Evamādīsu paṭilābho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.28) evamādīsu pahānaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho abhisamayaṭṭho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 2.8) evamādīsu paṭivedho attho. Idha panassa kālo attho. Tasmā yena kālena āyasmato sāriputtassa vinayapaññattiyācanahetubhūto parivitakko udapādi, tena kālenāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
此处有人问:‘那么,为何在经藏中以对格说“ekaṃ samayaṃ”(一时),在论藏中以依格说“yasmiṃ samaye”(于某时),而此处却不那样,以工具格说“tena samayena”(以彼时)呢?’答:因为彼处与此处所存之义不同。如何不同?在经藏中,有‘完全结合’的意义。因为世尊在开示《梵网》等经的那个时候,完全是以悲心住而安住于彼时的;因此,为了阐明那个意义,彼处用了对格。在论藏中,有‘依止’的意义,以及以‘状态’显示‘状态之相’的意义。因为作为依止的‘时间’义和‘集会’义的samaya,通过那个samaya的状态——即被称为刹那、集会、原因的samaya的状态——而显示出彼处所说的触等诸法的状态。因此,为了阐明那个意义,彼处用了依格。然而在此处,有‘原因’的意义和‘工具’的意义。因为那个制定学处的时机,即使是舍利弗等也难以了知,以那个时机作为原因和工具,世尊在制戒时,观待着制定学处的缘由而住于各处;因此,应当知道,为了阐明那个意义,此处用了工具格。关于此显示巴利原文
Etthāha – ‘‘atha kasmā yathā suttante ‘ekaṃ samaya’nti upayogavacanena niddeso kato, abhidhamme ca ‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacara’nti bhummavacanena, tathā akatvā idha ‘tena samayenā’ti karaṇavacanena niddeso kato’’ti? Tattha tathā, idha ca aññathā atthasambhavato. Kathaṃ? Suttante tāva accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati. Yañhi samayaṃ bhagavā brahmajālādīni suttantāni desesi, accantameva taṃ samayaṃ karuṇāvihārena vihāsi; tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha upayoganiddeso kato. Abhidhamme ca adhikaraṇattho bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇattho ca sambhavati. Adhikaraṇañhi kālattho samūhattho ca samayo, tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassa ca samayassa bhāvena tesaṃ bhāvo lakkhiyati. Tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha bhummavacanena niddeso kato. Idha pana hetuattho karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Yo hi so sikkhāpadapaññattisamayo sāriputtādīhipi dubbiññeyyo, tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtena ca sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno bhagavā tattha tattha vihāsi; tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ idha karaṇavacanena niddeso katoti veditabbo. Hoti cettha –
‘以对格、依格,观待种种意义;
他处说“时”时,会使用别的格;而此处只用工具格。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Upayogena bhummena, taṃ taṃ atthamapekkhiya; Aññatra samayo vutto, karaṇeneva so idhā’’ti.
然而,古代的注释者们解释:“‘ekaṃ samayaṃ’、‘yasmiṃ samaye’或‘tena samayena’,仅是措辞的差异,无论哪一种,意义的本质都是依格。因此,依他们的见解,即使说‘tena samayena’,也应理解为‘tasmiṃ samaye’(于彼时)的意思。”显示巴利原文
Porāṇā pana vaṇṇayanti – ‘ekaṃ samaya’nti vā ‘yasmiṃ samaye’ti vā ‘tena samayenā’ti vā abhilāpamattabhedo esa, sabbattha bhummameva attho’’ti. Tasmā tesaṃ laddhiyā ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti vuttepi ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye’’ti attho veditabbo.
下文将解释“佛陀、世尊”等词的含义。而在“住于韦兰阇”一句中,“韦兰阇”是某座城市的别名,即“在那韦兰阇城”;此处是表示邻近义的处格。“住”一词,通指任何一种安住状态——四威仪(行、住、坐、卧)或天住、梵住、圣住等。此处则指与其中某一威仪相结合的状态,因此应当理解为:世尊或站、或行、或坐、或卧,皆称为“住”。因为由一种威仪可止息另一种威仪的逼迫,令身体相续运转而不衰损,故名为“住。”显示巴利原文
Buddho bhagavāti imesaṃ padānaṃ parato atthaṃ vaṇṇayissāma. Verañjāyaṃ viharatīti ettha pana verañjāti aññatarassa nagarassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tassaṃ verañjāyaṃ; samīpatthe bhummavacanaṃ. Viharatīti avisesena iriyāpathadibbabrahmaariyavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgīparidīpanametaṃ, idha pana ṭhānagamananisajjāsayanappabhedesuairiyāpathesu aññatarairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ, tena ṭhitopi gacchantopi nisinnopi sayānopi bhagavā viharaticceva veditabbo. So hi ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavatteti, tasmā ‘‘viharatī’’ti vuccati.
在“那勒鲁夜叉的阎浮树根处”这句中,“那勒鲁”是一位夜叉的名字,“阎浮树”指阎浮树,“根”指附近。因为“根”这个词,在“应拔出根,乃至如须芒草茎般大小之物”等经文中,是就树根而言;在“贪是不善根”等经文中,是就不共因而言;在“直到正午时分,树荫覆盖,无风处树叶飘落,至此为树根范围”等经文中,则是就附近而言。而这里取“附近”义,因此应理解为:在那勒鲁夜叉所据有的阎浮树附近。据说那棵阎浮树优美庄严,犹如统领众树的君王,位于离该城不远、行人往来便利之处。当时,世尊到了韦兰阇,择一适宜处而住,便住在那棵阎浮树附近的树下。因此说:“在韦兰阇,住于那勒鲁夜叉的阎浮树根处”。显示巴利原文
Naḷerupucimandamūleti ettha naḷeru nāma yakkho, pucimandoti nimbarukkho, mūlanti samīpaṃ. Ayañhi mūlasaddo ‘‘mūlāni uddhareyya antamaso usīranāḷimattānipī’’ti (a. ni. 4.195) -ādīsu mūlamūle dissati. ‘‘Lobho akusalamūla’’nti (dī. ni. 3.305) -ādīsu asādhāraṇahetumhi. ‘‘Yāva majjhanhike kāle chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni patanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūla’’ntiādīsu samīpe. Idha pana samīpe adhippeto, tasmā naḷeruyakkhena adhiggahitassa pucimandassa samīpeti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. So kira pucimando ramaṇīyo pāsādiko anekesaṃ rukkhānaṃ ādhipaccaṃ viya kurumāno tassa nagarassa avidūre gamanāgamanasampanne ṭhāne ahosi. Atha bhagavā verañjaṃ gantvā patirūpe ṭhāne viharanto tassa rukkhassa samīpe heṭṭhābhāge vihāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘verañjāyaṃ viharati naḷerupucimandamūle’’ti.
在此,或许有人会问:如果世尊住在韦兰阇,就不应说“在那勒鲁夜叉的阎浮树根处”;如果世尊住在那里,就不应说“在韦兰阇”。因为世尊不可能同一时间、不分先后地住于两处。然而不应如此看待,我们不是已经说过“这是表示邻近义的处格”吗?因此,如同在恒河、阎牟那河附近游走的牛群,被称为“在恒河游走”、“在阎牟那河游走”;同样,在这句话中,那勒鲁夜叉的阎浮树根处位于韦兰阇附近,世尊住于其处,故说“在韦兰阇,住于那勒鲁夜叉的阎浮树根处”。说“韦兰阇”,是为了标明他托钵的村庄;说“那勒鲁夜叉的阎浮树根处”,则是为了标明适合出家人居住的处所。显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā yadi tāva bhagavā verañjāyaṃ viharati, ‘‘naḷerupucimandamūle’’ti na vattabbaṃ, atha tattha viharati, ‘‘verañjāya’’nti na vattabbaṃ, na hi sakkā ubhayattha teneva samayena apubbaṃ acarimaṃ viharitunti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, nanu avocumha ‘‘samīpatthe bhummavacana’’nti. Tasmā yathā gaṅgāyamunādīnaṃ samīpe goyūthāni carantāni ‘‘gaṅgāya caranti, yamunāya carantī’’ti vuccanti; evamidhāpi yadidaṃ verañjāya samīpe naḷerupucimandamūlaṃ tattha viharanto vuccati ‘‘verañjāyaṃ viharati naḷerupucimandamūle’’ti. Gocaragāmanidassanatthaṃ hissa verañjāvacanaṃ. Pabbajitānurūpanivāsanaṭṭhānanidassanatthaṃ naḷerupucimandamūlavacanaṃ.
在此,通过提及韦兰阇,具寿优波离长老显示了世尊对在家众的摄受;而通过提及那勒鲁夜叉的阎浮树根处,则显示了对出家众的摄受。同样地,前者由于接受资具,显示远离了自我折磨的苦行;后者由于舍弃事欲,则显示远离了沉溺欲乐的途径。前者显示精勤说法,后者显示乐住远离;前者显示以悲悯亲近众生,后者显示以智慧远离;前者显示致力于成就众生的利益安乐,后者显示于作利他安乐事时无所染着;前者显示以如法安乐、不执著为相而住于安稳,后者显示以修习上人法为相;前者显示对世间人类多所饶益,后者显示对诸天多所饶益;前者显示生于世间、在世间成长,后者显示不为世间所染;前者依“诸比丘,有一人出现于世,为利益多人、为安乐多人、为悲悯世间,为诸天与人的利益与安乐而出现。那一个人是谁?是如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者”之语,显示世尊出现于世所成就的目的;后者则显示与所生之处相应的住法。因为世尊初次在蓝毗尼园,第二次在菩提道场,都是以世间与出世间的生起,皆生于林中,所以这显示了他住于林中。应当以这些方式来理解此处义理的关联。显示巴利原文
Tattha verañjākittanena āyasmā upālitthero bhagavato gahaṭṭhānuggahakaraṇaṃ dasseti, naḷerupucimandamūlakittanena pabbajitānuggahakaraṇaṃ, tathā purimena paccayaggahaṇato attakilamathānuyogavivajjanaṃ, pacchimena vatthukāmappahānato kāmasukhallikānuyogavivajjanupāyadassanaṃ; purimena ca dhammadesanābhiyogaṃ, pacchimena vivekādhimuttiṃ; purimena karuṇāya upagamanaṃ , pacchimena paññāya apagamanaṃ; purimena sattānaṃ hitasukhanipphādanādhimuttataṃ, pacchimena parahitasukhakaraṇe nirupalepanaṃ; purimena dhammikasukhāpariccāganimittaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ, pacchimena uttarimanussadhammānuyoganimittaṃ; purimena manussānaṃ upakārabahulataṃ, pacchimena devatānaṃ; purimena loke jātassa loke saṃvaḍḍhabhāvaṃ, pacchimena lokena anupalittataṃ; purimena ‘‘ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṃ. Katamo ekapuggalo? Tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti (a. ni. 1.170) vacanato yadatthaṃ bhagavā uppanno tadatthaparinipphādanaṃ, pacchimena yattha uppanno tadanurūpavihāraṃ. Bhagavā hi paṭhamaṃ lumbinīvane, dutiyaṃ bodhimaṇḍeti lokiyalokuttarāya uppattiyā vaneyeva uppanno, tenassa vaneyeva vihāraṃ dassetīti evamādinā nayenettha atthayojanā veditabbā.
“与大比丘僧团一起”:其中,“大”既指功德之大,也指数目之大。因为那个比丘僧团在功德上也是大的——其中位次最末者也证得须陀洹;数目上也是大的,因其有五百之数。“比丘僧团”即比丘众之集合,指见和同解、戒和同修之沙门团体。“一起”即共同。“与大约五百位比丘”:此处“五百”是其数量,故称“五百许”。“量”即指标准。因此,如说“于食知量”,意为于食知限量、知准则;同样地,这里那些比丘百众的数量是五百,即以五百为标准,当如此理解其义。“比丘百众”即比丘之百数,与彼大约五百位比丘共同而行。由此,显示了前文“与大比丘僧团一起”中,彼大比丘僧团数目之宏大。而下文将通过“舍利弗,此比丘僧团实无过患、无灾祸、离垢秽、清净、安住于核心。舍利弗,因此五百比丘中,位次最末者亦是须陀洹”等语,显示其功德之大。显示巴利原文
Mahatābhikkhusaṅghena saddhinti ettha mahatāti guṇamahattenapi mahatā; saṅkhyāmahattenapi, so hi bhikkhusaṅgho guṇehipi mahā ahosi, yasmā yo tattha pacchimako so sotāpanno; saṅkhyāyapi mahā pañcasatasaṅkhyattā. Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅghena bhikkhusaṅghena; diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅkhātasaṅghātena samaṇagaṇenāti attho. Saddhinti ekato. Pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehīti pañca mattā etesanti pañcamattāni. Mattāti pamāṇaṃ vuccati. Tasmā yathā ‘‘bhojane mattaññū’’ti vutte bhojane mattaṃ jānāti, pamāṇaṃ jānātīti attho hoti; evamidhāpi tesaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ pañca mattā pañcappamāṇanti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhūnaṃ satāni bhikkhusatāni, tehi pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi. Etena yaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhi’’nti, ettha tassa mahato bhikkhusaṅghassa saṅkhyāmahattaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Parato panassa ‘‘nirabbudo hi, sāriputta bhikkhusaṅgho nirādīnavo apagatakāḷako suddho sāre patiṭṭhito. Imesañhi, sāriputta, pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ yo pacchimako so sotāpanno’’ti vacanena guṇamahattaṃ āvibhavissati.
“韦兰若婆罗门确已听闻”:其中,“听闻”(assosi)即听到、获得,随所闻之音声入耳门而了知。“确”(kho)为填充词,或用作表强调的不变词。若取强调义,即是“确已听闻无遗”,应知此义为:他没有任何听闻的障碍。若作填充词,则仅为令文句音韵流畅而已。因生于韦兰若,或住于韦兰若,或以韦兰若为住处,故称“韦兰若”。然而,依父母所取之名,他被称为“优陀夷”。“婆罗门”意为“令远离恶行”,即讽诵圣典之义。这便是对生来婆罗门(种姓婆罗门)一词的词源解释。而圣者则因已舍断诸恶,故被称为“婆罗门”。显示巴利原文
Assosi kho verañjo brāhmaṇoti assosīti suṇi upalabhi, sotadvārasampattavacananigghosānusārena aññāsi. Khoti padapūraṇamatte avadhāraṇatthe vā nipāto. Tattha avadhāraṇatthena assosi eva, nāssa koci savanantarāyo ahosīti ayamattho veditabbo. Padapūraṇena pana byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattameva. Verañjāyaṃ jāto, verañjāyaṃ bhavo, verañjā vā assa nivāsoti verañjo. Mātāpitūhi katanāmavasena panāyaṃ ‘‘udayo’’ti vuccati. Brahmaṃ aṇatīti brāhmaṇo, mante sajjhāyatīti attho. Idameva hi jātibrāhmaṇānaṃ niruttivacanaṃ. Ariyā pana bāhitapāpattā ‘‘brāhmaṇā’’ti vuccanti.
现在,为阐明韦兰若婆罗门所听闻之事,他说道:“朋友,据说有位沙门乔达摩……”等等。其中,应知“沙门”是因已止息诸恶。诚如所说:“已舍断诸恶者,为婆罗门;因已止息诸恶,故称为沙门。”而世尊已依无上圣道止息诸恶,故此“沙门”之称,是随其如实成就的功德而得的。“据说”(khalu)是表传闻义的不变词。“朋友”(bho)则是婆罗门种姓者依其出身惯用的称呼。显示巴利原文
Idāni yamatthaṃ verañjo brāhmaṇo assosi, taṃ pakāsento samaṇo khalu bho gotamotiādimāha. Tattha samitapāpattā samaṇoti veditabbo. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ – ‘‘bāhitapāpoti brāhmaṇo (dha. pa. 388), samitapāpattā samaṇoti vuccatī’’ti (dha. pa. 265). Bhagavā ca anuttarena ariyamaggena samitapāpo, tenassa yathābhuccaguṇādhigatametaṃ nāmaṃ yadidaṃ samaṇoti. Khalūti anussavanatthe nipāto. Bhoti brāhmaṇajātikānaṃ jātisamudāgataṃ ālapanamattaṃ. Vuttampi hetaṃ –
“若有所著,则名为‘朋友’者,徒有其名。”他以“乔达摩”之姓称扬世尊,故于“朋友,据说有位沙门乔达摩”中,应知义为:“朋友,据说有位沙门,姓乔达摩。”而“释迦子”则是彰显世尊出身高贵家族。“从释迦族出家”是彰显其依信心出家之状,即未被任何衰败所压倒,非因家财耗尽,而是舍弃彼家族,依信心而出家。此后所说,义如前释。而“那位”(taṃ kho pana)是表示如此这般状况的受格,意为“那位乔达摩尊者”。“善”(kalyāṇo)即具足善德,意为“最胜”。“称誉之声”(kittisaddo)即称誉本身,或赞叹之音声。显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhovādī nāmaso hoti, sace hoti sakiñcano’’ti. (Dha. pa. 396; su. ni. 625). Gotamoti bhagavantaṃ gottavasena parikitteti, tasmā ‘‘samaṇo khalu bho gotamo’’ti ettha samaṇo kira bho gotamagottoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Sakyaputtoti idaṃ pana bhagavato uccākulaparidīpanaṃ. Sakyakulā pabbajitoti saddhāpabbajitabhāvaparidīpanaṃ, kenaci pārijuññena anabhibhūto aparikkhīṇaṃyeva, taṃ kulaṃ pahāya saddhāya pabbajitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tato paraṃ vuttatthameva. Taṃ kho panāti itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tassa kho pana bhoto gotamassāti attho. Kalyāṇoti kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato; seṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kittisaddoti kitti eva, thutighoso vā.
在“彼世尊即是阿拉汉……”等句中,其关联方式如下:彼世尊即以此因、以此因故,乃是阿拉汉,乃是正自觉者……乃至……乃是世尊。显示巴利原文
Itipi so bhagavātiādīsu pana ayaṃ tāva yojanā – so bhagavā itipi arahaṃ, itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavāti iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,为令持律者通达经教义理,并于律藏注释之初,以与佛功德相应的如法语令心欢喜,我将对这些词句广作解释。因此,对于所言“彼世尊即是阿拉汉……”等,其中,首应了知,彼世尊依以下诸因而为阿拉汉:因远离故,因已摧破诸敌与诸辐故,因应受资具等故,因于恶行中无隐秘故。诚然,他以道摧毁了诸烦恼及其习气,安住于远离一切烦恼、极为遥远之处,故因“远离”而为阿拉汉;又以道摧破彼烦恼敌,故因“已摧破诸敌”而为阿拉汉。再者,那以无明为毂、以行为辐、以老死为辋、以漏集为轴,贯穿连结于三有之车的无始轮回之轮,他在菩提树下,以精进之足立于戒地,以信之手执持能尽业之智斧,摧毁其一切轮辐,故因“已摧破诸辐”而为阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Idāni vinayadharānaṃ suttantanayakosallatthaṃ vinayasaṃvaṇṇanārambhe buddhaguṇapaṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya cittasampahaṃsanatthañca etesaṃ padānaṃ vitthāranayena vaṇṇanaṃ karissāmi. Tasmā yaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘so bhagavā itipi araha’’ntiādi; tattha ārakattā, arīnaṃ arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvāti imehi tāva kāraṇehi so bhagavā arahanti veditabbo. Ārakā hi so sabbakilesehi suvidūravidūre ṭhito, maggena savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattāti ārakattā arahaṃ; te cānena kilesārayo maggena hatāti arīnaṃ hatattāpi arahaṃ. Yañcetaṃ avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhipuññādiabhisaṅkhārāraṃ jarāmaraṇanemi āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā tibhavarathe samāyojitaṃ anādikālappavattaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ, tassānena bodhimaṇḍe vīriyapādehi sīlapathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya saddhāhatthena kammakkhayakaraṃ ñāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā sabbe arā hatāti arānaṃ hatattāpi arahaṃ.
又或说“轮回之轮”,即指无始的轮回流转。其中,无明为毂,因为是根本;老死为辋,因为是终结;其余十法为辐,因为以无明为根本、以老死为边际。其中,于苦等法中的无知,即是无明。于欲有,无明是欲有诸行的缘;于色有,无明是色有诸行的缘;于无色有,无明是无色有诸行的缘。于欲有,诸行是欲有结生识的缘;余者类推。于欲有,结生识是欲有名色的缘;于色有亦然;于无色有,仅是名的缘。于欲有,名色是欲有六处的缘;于色有,名色是色有三处的缘;于无色有,名是无色有一处的缘。于欲有,六处是欲有六种触的缘;于色有,三处是色有三种触的缘;于无色有,一处是无色有一种触的缘。于欲有,六触是欲有六种受的缘;于色有,三触是色有三种受的缘;于无色有,一触是无色有一种受的缘。于欲有,六受是欲有六种渴爱聚的缘;于色有,三受是色有三种渴爱聚的缘;于无色有,一受是无色有一种渴爱聚的缘。于一切处,彼彼渴爱是彼彼取的缘;取等,是诸有等的缘。显示巴利原文
Atha vā saṃsāracakkanti anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭaṃ vuccati, tassa ca avijjā nābhi, mūlattā; jarāmaraṇaṃ nemi, pariyosānattā; sesā dasa dhammā arā, avijjāmūlakattā jarāmaraṇapariyantattā ca. Tattha dukkhādīsu aññāṇaṃ avijjā, kāmabhave ca avijjā kāmabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hoti. Rūpabhave avijjā rūpabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hoti. Arūpabhave avijjā arūpabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hoti. Kāmabhave saṅkhārā kāmabhave paṭisandhiviññāṇassa paccayā honti. Esa nayo itaresu. Kāmabhave paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ kāmabhave nāmarūpassa paccayo hoti, tathā rūpabhave. Arūpabhave nāmasseva paccayo hoti. Kāmabhave nāmarūpaṃ kāmabhave saḷāyatanassa paccayo hoti. Rūpabhave nāmarūpaṃ rūpabhave tiṇṇaṃ āyatanānaṃ paccayo hoti. Arūpabhave nāmaṃ arūpabhave ekassāyatanassa paccayo hoti. Kāmabhave saḷāyatanaṃ kāmabhave chabbidhassa phassassa paccayo hoti. Rūpabhave tīṇi āyatanāni rūpabhave tiṇṇaṃ phassānaṃ; arūpabhave ekamāyatanaṃ arūpabhave ekassa phassassa paccayo hoti. Kāmabhave cha phassā kāmabhave channaṃ vedanānaṃ paccayā honti. Rūpabhave tayo tattheva tissannaṃ; arūpabhave eko tattheva ekissā vedanāya paccayo hoti. Kāmabhave cha vedanā kāmabhave channaṃ taṇhākāyānaṃ paccayā honti. Rūpabhave tisso tattheva tiṇṇaṃ; arūpabhave ekā vedanā arūpabhave ekassa taṇhākāyassa paccayo hoti. Tattha tattha sā sā taṇhā tassa tassa upādānassa paccayo; upādānādayo bhavādīnaṃ.
这是怎样的呢?有这样一种人,心想“我将享受诸欲”,以欲取为缘,以身行恶行,以语行恶行,以意行恶行;由于恶行的成就,他堕生恶趣。在那里,作为他生起因的业,是业有;由业所生的诸蕴,是生有;诸蕴的生起是生,成熟是老,坏灭是死。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Idhekacco ‘‘kāme paribhuñjissāmī’’ti kāmupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ carati, vācāya manasā duccaritaṃ carati; duccaritapāripūriyā apāye upapajjati. Tatthassa upapattihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ kammabhavo, kammanibbattā khandhā upapattibhavo, khandhānaṃ nibbatti jāti, paripāko jarā, bhedo maraṇaṃ.
另有这样一种人,心想“我将受用天界的成就”,同样地行善行;由于善行的成就,他生于天界。在那里,作为他生起因的业,是业有。其义理趣向相同。显示巴利原文
Aparo ‘‘saggasampattiṃ anubhavissāmī’’ti tatheva sucaritaṃ carati; sucaritapāripūriyā sagge upapajjati. Tatthassa upapattihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ kammabhavoti so eva nayo.
又有一类人,心想“我要享受梵天界的成就”,即是以欲取为缘而修习慈,修习悲……修习喜……修习舍,由修习圆满而生于梵天界。于彼处,作为其出生之因的业即是业有,所说道理与此相同。显示巴利原文
Aparo pana ‘‘brahmalokasampattiṃ anubhavissāmī’’ti kāmupādānapaccayā eva mettaṃ bhāveti, karuṇaṃ… muditaṃ… upekkhaṃ bhāveti, bhāvanāpāripūriyā brahmaloke nibbattati. Tatthassa nibbattihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ kammabhavoti soyeva nayo.
又有一类人,心想“我要享受无色界的成就”,也同此修习空无边处等诸等至,由修习圆满而生于彼处。于彼处,作为其出生之因的业即是业有,由业所生的诸蕴即是生有;诸蕴的出生是生,成熟是老,坏灭是死。此理同样适用于其余以取为根本的联结。显示巴利原文
Aparo ‘‘arūpavabhasampattiṃ anubhavissāmī’’ti tatheva ākāsānañcāyatanādisamāpattiyo bhāveti, bhāvanāpāripūriyā tattha nibbattati. Tatthassa nibbattihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ kammabhavo, kammanibbattā khandhā upapattibhavo, khandhānaṃ nibbatti jāti, paripāko jarā, bhedo maraṇanti. Esa nayo sesupādānamūlikāsupi yojanāsu.
如此,“此中,无明为因,诸行由因而生,此二者皆由因而生”——像这样把握缘时之慧,即是法住智;于过去时、未来时,也是如此:“无明为因,诸行由因而生,此二者皆由因而生”——如此把握缘时之慧,即是法住智。应以此理类推,广说一切句。其中,无明与行为一摄,识、名色、六处、触、受为一摄,爱、取、有为一摄,生、老死为一摄。此中,第一摄是过去时,中间二摄是现在时,生、老死是未来时。又因在此处把握了无明与行,便已把握爱、取、有,所以这五法是过去的业轮转;识等五法是现在的果轮转。因把握了爱、取、有,便已把握无明与行,所以这五法是现在的业轮转;由于以生、老死之名指示了识等,所以这五法是未来的果轮转。它们依行相而有二十种。在此,行与识之间有一连结,受与爱之间有一连结,有与生之间有一连结。如此,世尊以一切行相这般了知、照见、遍知、通达有四摄、三世、二十行相、三连结的缘起。那以已知之义为智,以了知之义为慧,因此说:“把握缘时之慧,即是法住智。”以此法住智,世尊如实了知彼诸法后,于彼诸法生厌、离染、解脱,击破、显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā, ubhopete hetusamuppannāti paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ; atītampi addhānaṃ, anāgatampi addhānaṃ; avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā, ubhopete hetusamuppannāti paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti etena nayena sabbapadāni vitthāretabbāni. Tattha avijjā saṅkhārā eko saṅkhepo, viññāṇa-nāmarūpa-saḷāyatana-phassa-vedanā eko, taṇhupādānabhavā eko, jāti-jarā-maraṇaṃ eko. Purimasaṅkhepo cettha atīto addhā, dve majjhimā paccuppanno, jātijarāmaraṇaṃ anāgato. Avijjāsaṅkhāraggahaṇena cettha taṇhupādānabhavā gahitāva hontīti ime pañca dhammā atīte kammavaṭṭaṃ; viññāṇādayo pañca dhammā etarahi vipākavaṭṭaṃ. Taṇhupādānabhavaggahaṇena avijjāsaṅkhārā gahitāva hontīti ime pañca dhammā etarahi kammavaṭṭaṃ; jātijarāmaraṇāpadesena viññāṇādīnaṃ niddiṭṭhattā ime pañca dhammā āyatiṃ vipākavaṭṭaṃ. Te ākārato vīsatividhā honti. Saṅkhāraviññāṇānañcettha antarā eko sandhi, vedanātaṇhānamantarā eko, bhavajātīnamantarā eko. Iti bhagavā evaṃ catusaṅkhepaṃ, tiyaddhaṃ, vīsatākāraṃ, tisandhiṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ sabbākārato jānāti passati aññāti paṭivijjhati. Taṃ ñātaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ, pajānanaṭṭhena paññā. Tena vuccati – ‘‘paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti. Iminā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇena bhagavā te dhamme yathābhūtaṃ ñatvā tesu nibbindanto virajjanto vimuccanto vuttappakārassa imassa saṃsāracakkassa are hani vihani viddhaṃsesi. Evampi arānaṃ hatattā arahaṃ.
又因是最上应供,他堪受衣服等资具及殊胜供养;也正因此,当如来出现于世时,任何具大威力的天与人,都不再于他处行供养。正如梵天娑婆世界主以须弥山量的宝鬘供养如来,其他天与人如频毗娑罗王、拘萨罗王等,也尽其所能而行供养。而且,大阿育王为纪念已入般涅槃的世尊,舍出九十六俱胝的财富,在整个赡部洲洲建立了八万四千所寺院,更不必说其他种种殊胜供养了!如此,亦因应当受用资具等的缘故,称为阿拉汉。再者,如同世间那些自以为聪明的愚人,因害怕恶名而暗中行恶;而此人无论何时都不如此行,因此亦因毫无隐秘恶行之故,称为阿拉汉。于此有偈颂:显示巴利原文
Aggadakkhiṇeyyattā ca cīvarādipaccaye arahati pūjāvisesañca; teneva ca uppanne tathāgate ye keci mahesakkhā devamanussā na te aññattha pūjaṃ karonti. Tathā hi brahmā sahampati sinerumattena ratanadāmena tathāgataṃ pūjesi, yathābalañca aññepi devā manussā ca bimbisārakosalarājādayo. Parinibbutampi ca bhagavantaṃ uddissa channavutikoṭidhanaṃ visajjetvā asokamahārājā sakalajambudīpe caturāsītivihārasahassāni patiṭṭhāpesi. Ko pana vādo aññesaṃ pūjāvisesānanti! Evaṃ paccayādīnaṃ arahattāpi arahaṃ. Yathā ca loke keci paṇḍitamānino bālā asilokabhayena raho pāpaṃ karonti; evamesa na kadāci karotīti pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvatopi arahaṃ. Hoti cettha –
“因已远离、已杀灭诸烦恼敌,此牟尼;
已摧破轮回之轮,且堪受资具等供养;
不于隐秘处行恶,故名为阿拉汉。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ārakattā hatattā ca, kilesārīna so muni; Hatasaṃsāracakkāro, paccayādīna cāraho; Na raho karoti pāpāni, arahaṃ tena vuccatī’’ti.
因自己正确地觉悟了一切法,故为正自觉者。也就是说,他确实自己正确地觉悟了一切法:觉悟应证知法为应证知,觉悟应遍知法为应遍知,觉悟应断法为应断,觉悟应作证法为应作证,觉悟应修习法为应修习。正因如此,他说:显示巴利原文
Sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā pana sammāsambuddho. Tathā hesa sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho, abhiññeyye dhamme abhiññeyyato buddho, pariññeyye dhamme pariññeyyato, pahātabbe dhamme pahātabbato, sacchikātabbe dhamme sacchikātabbato, bhāvetabbe dhamme bhāvetabbato. Teneva cāha –
应证知者已证知,应修习者已修习;
应断者我已断,因此,婆罗门,我是觉者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhiññātaṃ, bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṃ; Pahātabbaṃ pahīnaṃ me, tasmā buddhosmi brāhmaṇā’’ti. (ma. ni. 2.399; su. ni. 563);
再者,眼是苦谛;其根本因、能令其生起的过去爱是集谛;二者的不转起是灭谛;了知灭的行道是道谛。如此,即便以逐一推演的方式,他也自己正确地觉悟了一切法。此法亦适用于耳、鼻、舌、身、意。依此理,于色等六处、眼识等六识身、眼触等六触、眼触所生受等六受、色想等六想、色思等六思、色爱等六爱身、色寻等六寻、色伺等六伺、色蕴等五蕴、十遍、十随念、膨胀相等十不净想、发等三十二身分、十二处、十八界、欲有等九有、初禅等四禅、慈修习等四无量、四无色等至,以及逆观老死等、顺观无明等缘起支,皆应如此配列。显示巴利原文
Apica cakkhu dukkhasaccaṃ, tassa mūlakāraṇabhāvena taṃsamuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnamappavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhappajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccanti evaṃ ekekapaduddhārenāpi sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho. Esa nayo sota-ghāna-jivhā-kāyamanesupi. Eteneva nayena rūpādīni cha āyatanāni, cakkhuviññāṇādayo cha viññāṇakāyā, cakkhusamphassādayo cha phassā, cakkhusamphassajādayo cha vedanā, rūpasaññādayo cha saññā, rūpasañcetanādayo cha cetanā, rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā, rūpavitakkādayo cha vitakkā, rūpavicārādayo cha vicārā , rūpakkhandhādayo pañcakkhandhā, dasa kasiṇāni, dasa anussatiyo, uddhumātakasaññādivasena dasa saññā, kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā, dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, kāmabhavādayo nava bhavā, paṭhamādīni cattāri jhānāni, mettābhāvanādayo catasso appamaññā, catasso arūpasamāpattiyo, paṭilomato jarāmaraṇādīni, anulomato avijjādīni paṭiccasamuppādaṅgāni ca yojetabbāni.
于此,有一则逐一配列的例子:‘老死是苦谛,生是集谛,二者之出离是灭谛,了知灭的行道是道谛。’如此,以逐一推演的方式,他于一切法自己正确地觉悟、随觉、通达。因此说:因自己正确地觉悟了一切法故,为正自觉者。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ ekapadayojanā – ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, jāti samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnampi nissaraṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhappajānanā paṭipadā maggasacca’’nti. Evaṃ ekekapaduddhārena sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho anubuddho paṭividdho. Tena vuttaṃ – sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā pana sammāsambuddhoti.
所谓明与行具足者,即称明行具足。其中,明是指三明、八明。三明应依《怖畏经》(中部1.34等)所述之理而了知,八明则依《阿摩昼经》(长部1.278等)了知。在彼经中,以观智与意所成神通,连同六种神通,总括为八明。行是指:防护戒律、守护根门、于食知量、警寤精勤、七种正法、四种色界禅那——当知这十五法即是行。正因圣弟子以此十五法而行,趋向不死之境,故称之为行。如经中所说:‘于此处,摩诃男,圣弟子具戒……’(中部2.24)等广说。世尊具足这些明与行,故称明行具足。其中,明具足成就世尊的一切知智,行具足成就其大悲性。他以一切知智了知一切众生的利益与非利益,以大悲心遮止非利益而导之入于利益,正如明行具足者所应为。因此,其弟子是善行,而非恶行;那些明行缺失者的弟子则不然,譬如自苦行者等。显示巴利原文
Vijjāhi pana caraṇena ca sampannattā vijjācaraṇasampanno; tattha vijjāti tissopi vijjā, aṭṭhapi vijjā. Tisso vijjā bhayabheravasutte (ma. ni. 1.34 ādayo) vuttanayeneva veditabbā, aṭṭha vijjā ambaṭṭhasutte (dī. ni. 1.278 ādayo). Tatra hi vipassanāñāṇena manomayiddhiyā ca saha cha abhiññā pariggahetvā aṭṭha vijjā vuttā. Caraṇanti sīlasaṃvaro, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, jāgariyānuyogo, satta saddhammā, cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānānīti ime pannarasa dhammā veditabbā. Imeyeva hi pannarasa dhammā, yasmā etehi carati ariyasāvako gacchati amataṃ disaṃ tasmā, caraṇanti vuttā. Yathāha – ‘‘idha, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sīlavā hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.24) vitthāro. Bhagavā imāhi vijjāhi iminā ca caraṇena samannāgato, tena vuccati vijjācaraṇasampannoti . Tattha vijjāsampadā bhagavato sabbaññutaṃ pūretvā ṭhitā, caraṇasampadā mahākāruṇikataṃ. So sabbaññutāya sabbasattānaṃ atthānatthaṃ ñatvā mahākāruṇikatāya anatthaṃ parivajjetvā atthe niyojeti, yathā taṃ vijjācaraṇasampanno. Tenassa sāvakā suppaṭipannā honti no duppaṭipannā, vijjācaraṇavipannānañhi sāvakā attantapādayo viya.
由善行故、由到达美妙处故、由正行故、由正语故,所以称为善逝。‘行’亦可称为‘逝’,而世尊之行是善妙、清净、无过失的。那是什么呢?即是圣道。依此行,他安稳地、毫无滞碍地到达安稳之境,故由善行故为善逝。又因他到达了美妙之处——不死之涅槃,故由到达美妙处故亦为善逝。又,由正行故,以各道所断除的烦恼,不再回转。这也曾说过:‘以入流道所断除的烦恼,它们不再还、不再回、不再转,故为善逝……乃至……以阿罗汉道所断除的烦恼,它们不再还、不再回、不再转,故为善逝。’(大义释38)又如正来故,从燃灯佛足下以来,直至菩提座,圆满三十波罗蜜,以正行道,唯作一切世间之利乐,不落于常见、断见、纵欲、自苦这些边见而来,故由正来故亦为善逝。又,他正语故,于适当的场合说适当的语,故由正语故亦为善逝。显示巴利原文
Sobhanagamanattā, sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā, sammāgatattā, sammā ca gadattā sugato. Gamanampi hi gatanti vuccati, tañca bhagavato sobhanaṃ parisuddhamanavajjaṃ . Kiṃ pana tanti? Ariyamaggo. Tena hesa gamanena khemaṃ disaṃ asajjamāno gatoti sobhanagamanattā sugato. Sundaraṃ cesa ṭhānaṃ gato amataṃ nibbānanti sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattāpi sugato. Sammā ca gato tena tena maggena pahīne kilese puna apaccāgacchanto. Vuttañcetaṃ – ‘‘sotāpattimaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchatīti sugato…pe… arahattamaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchatīti sugato’’ti (mahāni. 38). Sammā vā āgato dīpaṅkarapādamūlato pabhuti yāva bodhimaṇḍo tāva samatiṃsapāramipūritāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sabbalokassa hitasukhameva karonto sassataṃ ucchedaṃ kāmasukhaṃ attakilamathanti ime ca ante anupagacchanto āgatoti sammāgatattāpi sugato. Sammā cesa gadati, yuttaṭṭhāne yuttameva vācaṃ bhāsatīti sammā gadattāpi sugato.
对此,有一部经典可作为证明:‘如来对于那不真实、不正确且无利益的话,知道他人也不喜爱、不悦纳,如来便不说这样的话。如来对于那真实、正确却无利益的话,虽他人不喜爱、不悦纳,如来也不说这样的话。若如来知道那是真实、正确且有益的话,虽他人不喜爱、不悦纳,如来也会审时度势,在恰当的时机说出这样的话。如来对于那不真实、不正确且无利益的话,虽他人喜爱、悦纳,如来不说这样的话。如来对于那真实、正确却无利益的话,虽他人喜爱、悦纳,如来也不说这样的话。若如来知道那是真实、正确且有益的话,且他人也喜爱、悦纳,如来也会审时度势,在恰当的时机说出这样的话。’(中部2.86)如此,因正语之故,当知为善逝。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ sādhakasuttaṃ – ‘‘yaṃ tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, na taṃ tathāgato vācaṃ bhāsati. Yampi tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, tampi tathāgato vācaṃ na bhāsati. Yañca kho tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, tatra kālaññū tathāgato hoti tassā vācāya veyyākaraṇāya. Yaṃ tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ piyā manāpā, na taṃ tathāgato vācaṃ bhāsati. Yampi tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ piyā manāpā, tampi tathāgato vācaṃ na bhāsati. Yañca kho tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ piyā manāpā, tatra kālaññū tathāgato hoti tassā vācāya veyyākaraṇāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.86). Evaṃ sammā gadattāpi sugatoti veditabbo.
由于以一切方式了知世间,故称“世间解”。世尊从自性、集、灭、灭道,以一切方式了知、通达、彻证了世间。正如所说:“贤友,我不说依旅行能知、能见、能到达那无生、无老、无死、无逝、不再生的世间边际;贤友,我也不说不达世间边际便能从苦中解脱。然而,贤友,我就在这一寻长、有想有识的身体中,施设世间、世间集、世间灭、趣向世间灭之道。”显示巴利原文
Sabbathā viditalokattā pana lokavidū. So hi bhagavā sabhāvato samudayato nirodhato nirodhūpāyatoti sabbathā lokaṃ avedi aññāsi paṭivijjhi. Yathāha – ‘‘yattha kho, āvuso, na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati na cavati na upapajjati, nāhaṃ taṃ gamanena lokassa antaṃ ñāteyyaṃ daṭṭheyyaṃ patteyyanti vadāmi; na cāhaṃ, āvuso, appatvāva lokassa antaṃ dukkhassa antakiriyaṃ vadāmi. Api cāhaṃ, āvuso, imasmiṃyeva byāmamatte kaḷevare sasaññimhi samanake lokañca paññapemi lokasamudayañca lokanirodhañca lokanirodhagāminiñca paṭipadaṃ.
因此,他确实是世间解、具智慧者,
已到达世间边际,梵行已立;
了知世间边际后,是寂静者。
他既不贪求此世间,亦不贪求他世间。(增支部4.45;相应部1.107)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Gamanena na pattabbo, lokassanto kudācanaṃ; Na ca appatvā lokantaṃ, dukkhā atthi pamocanaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā have lokavidū sumedho; Lokantagū vusitabrahmacariyo; Lokassa antaṃ samitāvi ñatvā; Nāsīsatī lokamimaṃ parañcā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.45; saṃ. ni. 1.107);
复次,有三种世间:行世间、有情世间、器世间。其中,在提及“一世间——一切众生依食而住”(无碍解道1.112)之处,应知为行世间。在提及“世间是常,或世间是非常”(长部1.421)之处,为有情世间。显示巴利原文
Apica tayo lokā – saṅkhāraloko, sattaloko, okāsalokoti; tattha ‘‘eko loko – sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.112) āgataṭṭhāne saṅkhāraloko veditabbo. ‘‘Sassato lokoti vā asassato lokoti vā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.421) āgataṭṭhāne sattaloko.
“日月所照、所运行、所放光之处,”
你那威德,遍行于此千世界之中。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yāvatā candimasūriyā, pariharanti disā bhanti virocanā; Tāva sahassadhā loko, ettha te vattatī vaso’’ti. (ma. ni. 1.503) –
对于所到之处即器世间,世尊也以一切方式完全了知。如是,即:‘一世间:一切众生依食而住。二世间:名与色。三世间:三受。四世间:四食。五世间:五取蕴。六世间:六内处。七世间:七识住。八世间:八世间法。九世间:九众生居。十世间:十处。十二世间:十二处。十八世间:十八界。’此一有情世间,也以一切方式被完全了知。显示巴利原文
Āgataṭṭhāne okāsaloko, tampi bhagavā sabbathā avedi. Tathā hissa – ‘‘eko loko – sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā. Dve lokā – nāmañca rūpañca. Tayo lokā – tisso vedanā. Cattāro lokā – cattāro āhārā. Pañca lokā – pañcupādānakkhandhā. Cha lokā – cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni. Satta lokā satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo. Aṭṭha lokā – aṭṭha lokadhammā. Nava lokā – nava sattāvāsā. Dasa lokā – dasāyatanāni. Dvādasa lokā – dvādasāyatanāni . Aṭṭhārasa lokā – aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.112). Ayaṃ saṅkhāralokopi sabbathā vidito.
然而,正因为他了知一切众生的习性、随眠、行为、意乐,了知那些少尘垢者与多尘垢者、利根者与钝根者、善行相者与恶行相者、易教化者与难教化者,以及堪能者与不堪能者,所以他对有情世界也完全了知。如同对有情世界一样,他对器世界也是如此。即:一个轮围世界,其长宽为一百二十万三千四百五十由旬。其周长为——显示巴利原文
Yasmā panesa sabbesampi sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānāti, anusayaṃ jānāti, caritaṃ jānāti, adhimuttiṃ jānāti, apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe tikkhindriye mudindriye svākāre dvākāre suviññāpaye duviññāpaye bhabbe abhabbe satte jānāti, tasmāssa sattalokopi sabbathā vidito. Yathā ca sattaloko evaṃ okāsalokopi. Tathā hesa ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ āyāmato ca vitthārato ca yojanānaṃ dvādasa satasahassāni tīṇi sahassāni cattāri satāni paññāsañca yojanāni. Parikkhepato –
其形圆满,周匝三十六万由旬;
又有一万零三百五十由旬。
显示巴利原文 Sabbaṃ satasahassāni, chattiṃsa parimaṇḍalaṃ; Dasañceva sahassāni, aḍḍhuḍḍhāni satāni ca.
二十万由旬,及四那由他由旬,
大地之厚度,以此为量。
显示巴利原文 Duve satasahassāni, cattāri nahutāni ca; Ettakaṃ bahalattena, saṅkhātāyaṃ vasundharā.
计四十万又八那由他由旬;
水之厚度,以此为量,安立于风上。
显示巴利原文 Cattāri satasahassāni, aṭṭheva nahutāni ca; Ettakaṃ bahalattena, jalaṃ vāte patiṭṭhitaṃ.
风升至虚空,高达九十万由旬;
又有六万由旬,此为世界的安立。
显示巴利原文 Navasatasahassāni, māluto nabhamuggato; Saṭṭhi ceva sahassāni, esā lokassa saṇṭhiti.
沉入大海,深八万四千由旬,
同样地,须弥山王高出水面,巍然耸立。
从那里,依次以一半一半的量度,
沉入与升起的诸天界,各以种种宝石严饰。
持双山、持轴山、郭公山、善见山、
持边山、曲山、马耳山——这些巍峨的大山。
这七座大山,周匝环绕着须弥山的四方,
是四大天王的居所,为天人与夜叉所亲近。
雪山高五百由旬,五座山峰并立;
纵广三千由旬;
有八万四千座山峰为其庄严。
名为那伽的树,树干周长十五由旬,
枝条向四面伸展,各长五十由旬。
其广百由旬,巍然耸立,高度亦复如是;
藉由此阎浮树之威德,令阎浮洲光明普照。
沉入大海洋中,深达八万二千由旬;
同样,轮围石山高出水面八万二千由旬;
它包绕这一切,安立为世界之界。
显示巴利原文 Caturāsīti sahassāni, ajjhogāḷho mahaṇṇave; Accuggato tāvadeva, sinerupabbatuttamo. Tato upaḍḍhupaḍḍhena, pamāṇena yathākkamaṃ; Ajjhogāḷhuggatā dibbā, nānāratanacittitā. Yugandharo īsadharo, karavīko sudassano; Nemindharo vinatako, assakaṇṇo girī brahā. Ete satta mahāselā, sinerussa samantato; Mahārājānamāvāsā, devayakkhanisevitā. Yojanānaṃ satānucco, himavā pañca pabbato; Yojanānaṃ sahassāni, tīṇi āyatavitthato; Caturāsītisahassehi, kūṭehi paṭimaṇḍito. Tipañcayojanakkhandha, parikkhepā nagavhayā; Paññāsa yojanakkhandha, sākhāyāmā samantato. Satayojanavitthiṇṇā, tāvadeva ca uggatā; Jambū yassānubhāvena, jambudīpo pakāsito. Dve asīti sahassāni, ajjhogāḷho mahaṇṇave; Accuggato tāvadeva, cakkavāḷasiluccayo; Parikkhipitvā taṃ sabbaṃ, lokadhātumayaṃ ṭhito.
其中,月轮四十九由旬,日轮五十由旬,三十三天界一万由旬;阿修罗界、无间大地狱、阎浮洲同样如此。西牛货洲七千由旬,东胜身洲也一样。北俱卢洲八千由旬,每一大洲都有五百小洲围绕。这一切即是一个轮围世界、一个世界界,在其间隙中有世界中间地狱。如此,世尊以无量的佛智,了知、遍知、通达了无量的轮围世界、无量的世界界,从而对器世界也完全了知。如此,由于完全了知世间,故为‘世间解’。显示巴利原文
Tattha candamaṇḍalaṃ ekūnapaññāsayojanaṃ, sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāsayojanaṃ, tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ dasasahassayojanaṃ; tathā asurabhavanaṃ, avīcimahānirayo, jambudīpo ca. Aparagoyānaṃ sattasahassayojanaṃ; tathā pubbavideho. Uttarakuru aṭṭhasahassayojano, ekameko cettha mahādīpo pañcasatapañcasataparittadīpaparivāro; taṃ sabbampi ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ , ekā lokadhātu, tadantaresu lokantarikanirayā. Evaṃ anantāni cakkavāḷāni anantā lokadhātuyo bhagavā anantena buddhañāṇena avedi, aññāsi, paṭivijjhi. Evamassa okāsalokopi sabbathā vidito. Evampi sabbathā viditalokattā lokavidū.
由于没有任何众生在功德上比他更殊胜,无人能居其上,故称“无上士”。的确,他以戒德胜伏一切世间,以定德……慧德……解脱德……解脱智见德胜伏一切世间;于戒德无等、无等等、无譬、无比、无匹……于解脱智见德亦复如是。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,我确实不见在天界、魔界……乃至天人众生中,有比我戒德更胜者。”此应广说。显示巴利原文
Attano pana guṇehi visiṭṭhatarassa kassaci abhāvā natthi etassa uttaroti anuttaro. Tathā hesa sīlaguṇenāpi sabbaṃ lokamabhibhavati, samādhi…pe… paññā… vimutti… vimuttiñāṇadassanaguṇenāpi, sīlaguṇenāpi asamo asamasamo appaṭimo appaṭibhāgo appaṭipuggalo…pe… vimuttiñāṇadassanaguṇenāpi. Yathāha – ‘‘na kho panāhaṃ, bhikkhave, samanupassāmi sadevake loke samārake…pe… sadevamanussāya attanā sīlasampannatara’’nti vitthāro.
同样地,应广说《增上信经》等(增支部4.34;如是语90)以及“我无师长”等偈颂(中部1.285;大品11)。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ aggappasādasuttādīni (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) ‘‘na me ācariyo atthī’’tiādikā gāthāyo (ma. ni. 1.285; mahāva. 11) ca vitthāretabbā.
“Purisadamme sāreti”(他引导应调御之人)故称“调御丈夫”,意为调伏与教导。其中,“应调御之人”是指未调伏而应调伏者,包括畜生之人、人趣之人及非人之类。即:世尊调伏了畜生之人,如龙王阿波逻罗、小腹、大腹、火顶、烟顶、护财象等,令其舍离毒害,安住皈依与戒行;调伏了人趣之人,如萨遮迦尼乾子、青年庵婆咤、婆罗门沸伽罗娑帝、种德、究罗檀头等;调伏了非人,如夜叉阿罗婆迦、针毛、粗毛、帝释天王等,以种种调伏方便加以调御教导。此处应广引此经:“凯西,我以柔和方式调御应调御者,以严厉方式调御,以柔和兼严厉方式调御。”(增支部4.111)或者,教导具足净戒者等证入初禅等,以及为入流者等开示上道,亦是对已调伏者的持续调御。显示巴利原文
Purisadamme sāretīti purisadammasārathi, dameti vinetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha purisadammāti adantā dametuṃ yuttā tiracchānapurisāpi manussapurisāpi amanussapurisāpi. Tathā hi bhagavatā tiracchānapurisāpi apalāḷo nāgarājā, cūḷodaro, mahodaro, aggisikho, dhūmasikho, dhanapālako hatthīti evamādayo damitā, nibbisā katā, saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpitā. Manussapurisāpi saccakanigaṇṭhaputta-ambaṭṭhamāṇava-pokkharasāti-soṇadaṇḍakūṭadantādayo. Amanussapurisāpi āḷavaka-sūciloma-kharaloma-yakkha-sakkadevarājādayo damitā vinītā vicitrehi vinayanūpāyehi. ‘‘Ahaṃ kho, kesi, purisadammaṃ saṇhenapi vinemi, pharusenapi vinemi, saṇhapharusenapi vinemī’’ti (a. ni. 4.111) idañcettha suttaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Atha vā visuddhasīlādīnaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīni sotāpannādīnañca uttarimaggapaṭipadaṃ ācikkhanto dantepi dametiyeva.
或者,‘无上调御丈夫’这一句意义单成一体。因为世尊引导那些应受调御之人,如同仅以跏趺安坐,便能令他们无碍地奔向八方。因此称为‘无上调御丈夫’。于此,应详说此经:‘诸比丘,象师所调御之象,只朝一个方向奔驰。’(中部3.312)显示巴利原文
Atha vā anuttaro purisadammasārathīti ekamevidaṃ atthapadaṃ . Bhagavā hi tathā purisadamme sāreti, yathā ekapallaṅkeneva nisinnā aṭṭha disā asajjamānā dhāvanti. Tasmā ‘‘anuttaro purisadammasārathī’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Hatthidamakena, bhikkhave, hatthidammo sārito ekaṃyeva disaṃ dhāvatī’’ti idañcettha suttaṃ (ma. ni. 3.312) vitthāretabbaṃ.
他如理教导现世、来世乃至胜义的利益,故为‘导师’。又因如同商队向导,故为‘导师’,世尊即是商队之主。正如商队向导引导商队穿过旷野,穿越盗贼出没的旷野,穿越猛兽横行的旷野,穿越饥馑的旷野,穿越无水的旷野,令其度脱、得度、济度,抵达安稳之地;同样地,导师世尊作为商队之主,引导众生穿越旷野,穿越生之旷野……(大义释190)当依此义释所示之理,了知此处之义。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ anusāsatīti satthā. Apica satthā viyāti satthā, bhagavā satthavāho. ‘‘Yathā satthavāho satthe kantāraṃ tāreti, corakantāraṃ tāreti, vāḷakantāraṃ tāreti, dubbhikkhakantāraṃ tāreti, nirudakakantāraṃ tāreti, uttāreti nittāreti patāreti khemantabhūmiṃ sampāpeti; evameva bhagavā satthā satthavāho satte kantāraṃ tāreti jātikantāraṃ tāretī’’tiādinā (mahāni. 190) niddesanayenapettha attho veditabbo.
‘天人’指天与人,这是依最高类别而说,也是依堪能成就之人而说。然而,世尊即使对于畜生,也通过给予教诫而成为其导师。因为它们通过听闻世尊的法,获得亲依止缘的成就,凭借此亲依止缘的成就,在未来第二生或第三生中便能成为道果的享有者。蟾蜍天子等便是此处的例证。据说,当世尊在伽伽罗莲池畔为瞻波城的民众说法时,一只蟾蜍对世尊的音声生了取相。当时,一个牧童拄着棍子站立,将棍子抵在了它的头上。它当即命终,随即投生在三十三天一座广达十二由旬的金色天宫中。如同从睡梦中醒来一般,它在那里见自己被天女众所围绕,心中思惟:‘啊,我竟然也生在此处了!我究竟做了什么业呢?’在思惟时,除了对世尊音声的取相之外,它未见其他任何善业。它随即与天宫一同前来,以头礼拜世尊的双足。世尊虽然心知,却问道——显示巴利原文
Devamanussānanti daevānañca manussānañca ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ, bhabbapuggalaparicchedavasena ca. Bhagavā pana tiracchānagatānampi anusāsanippadānena satthāyeva. Tepi hi bhagavato dhammasavanena upanissayasampattiṃ patvā tāya eva upanissayasampattiyā dutiye tatiye vā attabhāve maggaphalabhāgino honti. Maṇḍūkadevaputtādayo cettha nidassanaṃ. Bhagavati kira gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīre campānagaravāsīnaṃ dhammaṃ desayamāne eko maṇḍūko bhagavato sare nimittaṃ aggahesi. Taṃ eko vacchapālako daṇḍamolubbha tiṭṭhanto tassa sīse sannirumbhitvā aṭṭhāsi. So tāvadeva kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane dvādasayojanike kanakavimāne nibbatti. Suttappabuddho viya ca tattha accharāsaṅghaparivutaṃ attānaṃ disvā ‘‘are, ahampi nāma idha nibbattosmi! Kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ akāsi’’nti āvajjento nāññaṃ kiñci addasa, aññatra bhagavato sare nimittaggāhā. So taāvadeva saha vimānena āgantvā bhagavato pāde sirasā vandi. Bhagavā jānantova pucchi –
我过去曾是一只蛙,以水为栖,游弋水中;
当我正听您说法时,牧童杀害了我。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’ti. ‘‘Maṇḍūkohaṃ pure āsiṃ, udake vārigocaro; Tava dhammaṃ suṇantassa, avadhi vacchapālako’’ti. (vi. va. 857-858);
世尊为他宣说法。说法结束时,八万四千有情证得法现观。天子也安立须陀洹果,面露微笑而去。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā tassa dhammaṃ desesi. Desanāvasāne caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Devaputtopi sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya sitaṃ katvā pakkāmīti.
凡是任何所谓的应知之法,佛陀已觉了其一切,故依解脱究竟智而称为佛陀。又因他自悟四圣谛,亦令其他有情觉悟,由这些理由而称为佛陀。为阐明此义,当如‘觉悟诸谛故为佛陀,令众生觉悟故为佛陀’等,广开一切解说,或依无碍解道所说。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana kiñci atthi ñeyyaṃ nāma, tassa sabbassa buddhattā vimokkhantikañāṇavasena buddho. Yasmā vā cattāri saccāni attanāpi bujjhi, aññepi satte bodhesi; tasmā evamādīhipi kāraṇehi buddho. Imassa catthassa viññāpanatthaṃ ‘‘bujjhitā saccānīti buddho, bodhetā pajāyāti buddho’’ti evaṃ pavatto sabbopi niddesanayo (mahāni. 192) paṭisambhidānayo (paṭi. ma. 1.162) vā vitthāretabbo.
‘世尊’一词,乃是对具足殊胜功德、为众生中最上者的尊称。因此,古德们说——显示巴利原文
Bhagavāti idaṃ panassa guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagarugāravādhivacanaṃ. Tenāhu porāṇā –
‘世尊’之名最胜,‘世尊’之名无上;
他既尊贵又应受尊崇,故而得称世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavāti vacanamuttamaṃ; Garu gāravayutto so, bhagavā tena vuccatī’’ti.
名称有四种:依状态而立的、依特征而立的、依标志而立的、随意而起的。随意而起的名称,在世俗语言中便被称为“随意所愿”。其中,“牛犊、应调御者、公牛”等,是依状态而立的名称。“持杖者、持伞者、戴冠者、有象者”等,是依特征而立的名称。“三明者、六通者”等,是依标志而立的名称。至于“吉祥增长者、财富增长者”等,则是不考虑词义而施设的随意而起名称。而“世尊”这个名称是依标志而立的,非由摩诃摩耶夫人所起,非由净饭大王所起,非由八万亲族所起,亦非由帝释、善现等殊胜天人所起。法将确实如此说过:“世尊——这个名称不是母亲所起的……这是诸佛世尊在菩提树下获得一切知智的同时所证得的、以解脱究竟为标志的施设,亦即所谓世尊。”显示巴利原文
Catubbidhañhi nāmaṃ – āvatthikaṃ, liṅgikaṃ, nemittikaṃ, adhiccasamuppannanti. Adhiccasamuppannaṃ nāma lokiyavohārena ‘‘yadicchaka’’nti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ‘‘vaccho dammo balibaddo’’ti evamādi āvatthikaṃ. ‘‘Daṇḍī chattī sikhī karī’’ti evamādi liṅgikaṃ. ‘‘Tevijjo chaḷabhiñño’’ti evamādi nemittikaṃ. ‘‘Sirivaḍḍhako dhanavaḍḍhako’’ti evamādi vacanatthamanapekkhitvā pavattaṃ adhiccasamuppannaṃ. Idaṃ pana bhagavāti nāmaṃ nemittikaṃ, na mahāmāyāya na suddhodanamahārājena na asītiyā ñātisahassehi kataṃ, na sakkasantusitādīhi devatāvisesehi. Vuttañhetaṃ dhammasenāpatinā – ‘‘bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kataṃ…pe… vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikāpaññatti, yadidaṃ bhagavā’’ti (mahāni. 84).
这名称,正是以功德为标志而立的,为阐明那些功德,他们说此偈颂:显示巴利原文
Yaṃguṇanemittikañcetaṃ nāmaṃ, tesaṃ guṇānaṃ pakāsanatthaṃ imaṃ gāthaṃ vadanti –
“具分、具份、具遍,分别具足,如是;
已作摧破,故为尊,具足福德。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhagī bhajī bhāgī vibhattavā iti; Akāsi bhagganti garūti bhāgyavā; Bahūhi ñāyehi subhāvitattano; Bhavantago so bhagavāti vuccatī’’ti.
在此,各个词句的含义应依解说中所说的方法来了知。显示巴利原文
Niddese vuttanayeneva cettha tesaṃ tesaṃ padānamattho daṭṭhabbo.
然而,此处另有一种解释:显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana aparo nayo –
具福德者、已破者、相应者,亦依诸分而分别者;
受用已毕者,已离诸行迹,故于诸有中,称为世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto, bhagehi ca vibhattavā; Bhattavā vantagamano, bhavesu bhagavā tato’’ti.
于此,或依语法规则,把握‘音素增加’与‘音素转换’这一词源特征;或依‘毕苏达罗’等开许省略的规则,应知:由于他具有能生世间与出世间乐、达布施与戒等彼岸的福德,故本应说‘bhāgyavā’却称为‘bhagavā’。又因为他已摧破贪、嗔、痴、颠倒作意、无惭、无愧、忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、谄、诳、顽、诤、慢、过慢、骄、放逸、渴爱、无明、三种不善根、恶行、杂染、垢秽、不平等想、寻思、戏论、四种颠倒、漏、结、暴流、轭、趣、渴爱之生起、取、五心芜、缚、盖、喜、六诤根、爱身、七随眠、八邪道、九爱本、十不善业道、见处、百八爱行等一切苦恼、热恼、十万烦恼,或简而言之,摧破五蕴、烦恼、行、魔、天子魔——由于这些危难已被摧破,故本应说‘bhaggavā’却称为‘bhagavā’。于此有言:显示巴利原文
Tattha vaṇṇāgamo vaṇṇavipariyayoti etaṃ niruttilakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā saddanayena vā pisodarādipakkhepalakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā yasmā lokiyalokuttarasukhābhinibbattakaṃ dānasīlādipārappattaṃ bhāgyamassa atthi, tasmā ‘‘bhāgyavā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vuccatīti ñātabbaṃ. Yasmā pana lobha-dosa-moha-viparītamanasikāra-ahirikānottappa-kodhūpanāha-makkha-paḷāsaissā-macchariya-māyāsāṭheyya-thambha-sārambha-mānātimāna-mada-pamāda-taṇhāvijjā tividhākusalamūla-duccarita-saṃkilesa-mala-visamasaññā-vitakka-papañca-catubbidhavipariyesaāsava-gantha-ogha-yogāgati-taṇhuppādupādāna-pañcacetokhīla-vinibandha-nīvaraṇābhinandanachavivādamūla-taṇhākāya-sattānusaya-aṭṭhamicchatta-navataṇhāmūlaka-dasākusalakama diṭṭhigata-aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritappabheda-sabbadaratha-pariḷāha-kilesasatasahassāni, saṅkhepato vā pañca kilesa-abhisaṅkhārakhandhamaccu-devaputta-māre abhañji, tasmā bhaggattā etesaṃ parissayānaṃ bhaggavāti vattabbe bhagavāti vuccati. Āha cettha –
已破贪,已破嗔,已破痴,无漏;
他已破除诸恶法,故称世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhaggarāgo bhaggadoso, bhaggamoho anāsavo; Bhaggāssa pāpakā dhammā, bhagavā tena vuccatī’’ti.
由具福德,显示其具足百福庄严相好与色身成就;由破烦恼,显示其法身成就。同样,显示为世间审察者所推重,为在家与出家者所应亲近,于前来亲近者,能除遣其身心之苦,以财物施与法施作饶益,并令其具足世间与出世间之乐。显示巴利原文
Bhāgyavantatāya cassa satapuññajalakkhaṇadharassa rūpakāyasampattidīpitā hoti, bhaggadosatāya dhammakāyasampatti. Tathā lokiyaparikkhakānaṃ bahumatabhāvo, gahaṭṭhapabbajitehi abhigamanīyatā, abhigatānañca nesaṃ kāyacittadukkhāpanayane paṭibalabhāvo, āmisadānadhammadānehi upakāritā, lokiyalokuttarasukhehi ca sampayojanasamatthatā dīpitā hoti.
又因在世间,‘bhaga’一词用于权势、法、名声、吉祥、欲、精勤这六种法。而世尊拥有最殊胜、于自心中自在的权势;拥有如微细、轻快等世间共许的、一切行相圆满的神通;同样拥有出世间法;拥有遍及三界、由如实功德所证得的、极为清净的名声;拥有能令见其色身者心生净信、一切行相圆满、诸肢端庄的吉祥;凡是他对自己或他人所希求、所愿求之事,皆能如其意愿而成就,这便是‘所求皆成’之义的欲;以正精勤为一切世间敬重之因。因此,由具足这些‘bhaga’,他拥有这些‘bhaga’,以此义而称为‘Bhagavā’(世尊)。显示巴利原文
Yasmā ca loke issariya-dhamma-yasa-sirī-kāma-payattesu chasu dhammesu bhagasaddo vattati, paramañcassa sakacitte issariyaṃ, aṇimā laghimādikaṃ vā lokiyasammataṃ sabbākāraparipūraṃ atthi tathā lokuttaro dhammo lokattayabyāpako yathābhuccaguṇādhigato ativiya parisuddho yaso, rūpakāyadassanabyāvaṭajananayanappasādajananasamatthā sabbākāraparipūrā sabbaṅgapaccaṅgasirī, yaṃ yaṃ etena icchitaṃ patthitaṃ attahitaṃ parahitaṃ vā, tassa tassa tatheva abhinipphannattā icchiticchi, tattha nipphattisaññito kāmo, sabbalokagarubhāvappattihetubhūto sammāvāyāmasaṅkhāto payatto ca atthi; tasmā imehi bhagehi yuttattāpi bhagā assa santīti iminā atthena bhagavāti vuccati.
又因世尊以善、不善等分类而分别了一切法,或以蕴、处、界、谛、根、缘起等分别了善等诸法,或以逼迫、有为、热恼、变易之义分别了苦圣谛,以集起、因缘、结合、障碍之义分别了集谛,以出离、远离、无为、不死之义分别了灭谛,以出离、因、见、增上之义分别了道谛——这即是已分别、已分析、已开显、已宣说之义。因此,于应说为‘分别者’之处,而称为 Bhagavā(世尊)。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana kusalādīhi bhedehi sabbadhamme, khandhāyatana-dhātusacca-indriyapaṭiccasamuppādādīhi vā kusalādidhamme, pīḷana-saṅkhata-santāpavipariṇāmaṭṭhena vā dukkhamariyasaccaṃ, āyūhana-nidāna-saṃyoga-palibodhaṭṭhena samudayaṃ, nissaraṇavivekāsaṅkhata-amataṭṭhena nirodhaṃ, niyyāna-hetu-dassanādhipateyyaṭṭhena maggaṃ vibhattavā, vibhajitvā vivaritvā desitavāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā vibhattavāti vattabbe bhagavāti vuccati .
又因世尊亲近、修习、多行天住、梵住、圣住,身远离、心远离、依远离,空、无相、无愿解脱,以及其他世间与出世间的超人法,因此,于应说为‘亲近者’之处,而称为 Bhagavā(世尊)。显示巴利原文
Yasmā ca esa dibbabrahmaariyavihāre kāyacittaupadhiviveke suññatappaṇihitānimittavimokkhe aññe ca lokiyalokuttare uttarimanussadhamme bhaji sevi bahulamakāsi, tasmā bhattavāti vattabbe bhagavāti vuccati.
又因世尊已弃除三有中称为渴爱的‘去’,因此,于应说为‘于有中弃去者’之处,从‘有’一词取 bha 音,从‘去’一词取 ga 音,从‘弃’一词取 va 音,并延长其音,而合称为 Bhagavā(世尊)。正如世间中,于应说为‘mehanassa khassa mālā’之处,而说为‘mekhalā’(腰带)。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana tīsu bhavesu taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ gamanamanena vantaṃ, tasmā bhavesu vantagamanoti vattabbe bhavasaddato bhakāraṃ, gamanasaddato gakāraṃ, vantasaddato vakārañca dīghaṃ katvā ādāya bhagavāti vuccati. Yathā loke ‘‘mehanassa khassa mālā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘mekhalā’’ti vuccati.
“彼于此世间”者,即彼世尊于此世间。今明所当说之义。“与天一起”者,即共诸天而谓“俱天”;如是共魔而谓“俱魔”;共梵天而谓“俱梵天”;共沙门、婆罗门而谓“俱沙门婆罗门”;因所生故名为“生类”,即彼生类;“与天及人一起”者,即共天与人。其中,当知以“俱天”一语,收摄五欲天;以“俱魔”一语,收摄第六欲天;以“俱梵天”一语,收摄梵身天等梵天众;以“俱沙门婆罗门”一语,收摄开遮教法之敌者、怨家沙门婆罗门,以及已止息恶行、已除遣恶行之沙门婆罗门;以“生类”一语,收摄有情世间;以“俱天及人”一语,收摄假名天及众人。如是,当知此处以三语摄器世间,以二语就生类摄有情世间。显示巴利原文
So imaṃ lokanti so bhagavā imaṃ lokaṃ. Idāni vattabbaṃ nidasseti. Sadevakanti saha devehi sadevakaṃ; evaṃ saha mārena samārakaṃ; saha brahmunā sabrahmakaṃ; saha samaṇabrāhmaṇehi sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ; pajātattā pajā, taṃ pajaṃ; saha devamanussehi sadevamanussaṃ. Tattha sadevakavacanena pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, samārakavacanena chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ, sabrahmakavacanena brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇaṃ, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīvacanena sāsanassa paccatthikapaccāmittasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇaṃ, samitapāpa-bāhitapāpa-samaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇañca, pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇaṃ, sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevaavasesamanussaggahaṇaṃ. Evamettha tīhi padehi okāsaloko, dvīhi pajāvasena sattaloko gahitoti veditabbo.
复有别释:以“俱天”一语,涵盖无色界诸天;以“俱魔”一语,涵盖六欲诸天;以“俱梵天”一语,涵盖色界梵天;以“俱沙门婆罗门”等语,依四众而涵盖假名天及人界,或涵盖其余一切有情世间。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaradevaloko gahito, samārakaggahaṇena chakāmāvacaradevalokā, sabrahmakaggahaṇena rūpībrahmaloko, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇādiggahaṇena catuparisavasena sammutidevehi vā saha manussaloko, avasesasabbasattaloko vā.
复次,此处先以“俱天”一语,由最胜定则而成立世尊已亲证一切世间,由此世尊之名声远播。以此,若有人疑曰:“摩罗有大神通,乃六欲天之主宰、自在者,莫非亦为彼世尊所亲证耶?”为令这些之人离于疑惑,故称“俱魔”。若复有人疑曰:“梵天有大神通,能以一指端放光,照彻千轮围世间,以二指……乃至以十指端放光,照彻十千轮围世间,并独享无上禅定之乐,莫非亦为世尊所亲证耶?”为令这些之人离于疑惑,故称“俱梵天”。以此,若更有人疑曰:“诸多沙门婆罗门乃教法之怨敌,莫非亦为世尊所亲证耶?”为令这些之人离于疑惑,故称“俱沙门婆罗门及生类”。如是,开示最胜者之亲证已,复依假名天及众人,由最胜定则而开示其余有情世间之亲证,故称“俱天及人”。此即此处之次第联系。显示巴利原文
Apicettha sadevakavacanena ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato sabbassāpi lokassa sacchikatabhāvaṃ sādhento tassa bhagavato kittisaddo abbhuggato. Tato yesaṃ siyā – ‘‘māro mahānubhāvo chakāmāvacarissaro vasavattī; kiṃ sopi etena sacchikato’’ti? Tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto samārakanti abbhuggato. Yesaṃ pana siyā – ‘‘brahmā mahānubhāvo ekaṅguliyā ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷasahasse ālokaṃ pharati, dvīhi…pe… dasahi aṅgulīhi dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu ālokaṃ pharati, anuttarañca jhānasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, kiṃ sopi sacchikato’’ti? Tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto sabrahmakanti abbhuggato. Tato yesaṃ siyā – ‘‘puthūsamaṇabrāhmaṇā sāsanapaccatthikā, kiṃ tepi sacchikatā’’ti? Tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajanti abbhuggato. Evaṃ ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhānaṃ sacchikatabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā atha sammutideve avasesamanusse ca upādāya ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sesasattalokassa sacchikatabhāvaṃ pakāsento sadevamanussanti abbhuggato. Ayametthānusandhikkamo.
“自以通智亲证而宣说”——此处,“自”(sayaṃ)即自身,不依他人而证得;“以通智”(abhiññā)即以胜智,用殊胜之智了知;“亲证”(sacchikatvā)即现前作证,由此遮止了比量等;“宣说”(pavedeti)即令觉悟、令了知、开示。“彼说法初善……乃至……后善”——彼世尊因悲悯众生,舍弃无上远离之乐而说法。而且,无论说少说多,皆以初善等行相而宣说。显示巴利原文
Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedetīti ettha pana sayanti sāmaṃ, aparaneyyo hutvā; abhiññāti abhiññāya, adhikena ñāṇena ñatvāti attho. Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā, etena anumānādipaṭikkhepo kato hoti. Pavedetīti bodheti ñāpeti pakāseti. So dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇanti so bhagavā sattesu kāruññataṃ paṭicca hitvāpi anuttaraṃ vivekasukhaṃ dhammaṃ deseti. Tañca kho appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva deseti.
如何呢?即使是一首偈颂,由于法具有全然吉祥之性,第一句为初善,第二、三句为中善,最后一句为后善。单一连贯的经典,序分为初善,结分为后善,其余部分为中善。有多重连贯的经典,第一连贯为初善,最后连贯为后善,其余连贯为中善。就整个教法而言,以作为自利之体的戒为初善,以止、观、道、果为中善,以涅槃为后善。或以戒与定为初善,以观与道为中善,以果与涅槃为后善。或以佛陀之善成正觉为初善,以法之善法性为中善,以僧之善行道为后善。若就听闻之后由如实行道者所应证得的正觉而言,则以无上正等正觉为初善,以独觉菩提为中善,以声闻菩提为后善。而且,此法于听闻时,仅由听闻便能镇伏盖障、带来利益,故为初善;于修习时,由带来止观之乐,仅由修习便能带来利益,故为中善;如此修习之后,于修习之果圆满时,由带来如实之状态,仅由修习之果便能带来利益,故为后善。又由于以导师为起源,起源清净故为初善,义利清净故为中善,作用清净故为后善。因此,应知彼世尊无论说少说多,皆在宣说具有初善等行相的法。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Ekagāthāpi hi samantabhadrakattā dhammassa paṭhamapādena ādikalyāṇā, dutiyatatiyapādehi majjhekalyāṇā, pacchimapādena pariyosānakalyāṇā. Ekānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ nidānena ādikalyāṇaṃ, nigamanena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, sesena majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Nānānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ paṭhamānusandhinā ādikalyāṇaṃ, pacchimena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, sesehi majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Sakalopi sāsanadhammo attano atthabhūtena sīlena ādikalyāṇo, samathavipassanāmaggaphalehi majjhekalyāṇo, nibbānena pariyosānakalyāṇo. Sīlasamādhīhi vā ādikalyāṇo, vipassanāmaggehi majjhekalyāṇo, phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo . Buddhasubodhitāya vā ādikalyāṇo, dhammasudhammatāya majjhekalyāṇo, saṅghasuppaṭipattiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Taṃ sutvā tathattāya paṭipannena adhigantabbāya abhisambodhiyā vā ādikalyāṇo, paccekabodhiyā majjhekalyāṇo, sāvakabodhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Suyyamāno cesa nīvaraṇavikkhambhanato savanenapi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti ādikalyāṇo, paṭipajjiyamāno samathavipassanāsukhāvahanato paṭipattiyāpi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti majjhekalyāṇo, tathā paṭipanno ca paṭipattiphale niṭṭhite tādibhāvāvahanato paṭipattiphalenapi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti pariyosānakalyāṇo. Nāthappabhavattā ca pabhavasuddhiyā ādikalyāṇo, atthasuddhiyā majjhekalyāṇo , kiccasuddhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Tasmā eso bhagavā appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva desetīti veditabbo.
于‘有义、有文’等句中,因为宣说此法时,既开示教法梵行与道梵行,又以种种理趣阐明;而此法由于随宜具足义利,故为‘有义’,由于具足文句,故为‘有文’。由于具备宣说、开示、揭示、分别、显了、施设以及义理文句的连结,故为‘有义’;由于具足字母、文句、形态、语法、解说的成就,故为‘有文’。由于义理深奥与通达深奥,故为‘有义’;由于法深奥与说法深奥,故为‘有文’。由于属于义无碍解与辩无碍解的范畴,故为‘有义’;由于属于法无碍解与词无碍解的范畴,故为‘有文’。由于为智者所觉知、令审察者生信,故为‘有义’;由于令世间人信受、令世俗人生信,故为‘有文’。由于意趣甚深,故为‘有义’;由于文句显了,故为‘有文’。由于无有应添加者,以全然圆满之相而为‘完全圆满’;由于无有应去除者,以无过失之相而为‘完全清净’;由于摄持三学,乃梵行已立者、最胜者所应行,且为他们所行之故,而为‘梵行’。因此,被称为‘开示有义、有文……梵行’。显示巴利原文
Sātthaṃ sabyañjananti evamādīsu pana yasmā imaṃ dhammaṃ desento sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca pakāseti, nānānayehi dīpeti; tañca yathānurūpaṃ atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Saṅkāsanapakāsana-vivaraṇa-vibhajana-uttānīkaraṇa-paññatti-atthapadasamāyogato sātthaṃ, akkharapada-byañjanākāraniruttiniddesasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Atthagambhīratā-paṭivedhagambhīratāhi sātthaṃ, dhammagambhīratādesanāgambhīratāhi sabyañjanaṃ. Atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāvisayato sātthaṃ, dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāvisayato sabyañjanaṃ. Paṇḍitavedanīyato parikkhakajanappasādakanti sātthaṃ, saddheyyato lokiyajanappasādakanti sabyañjanaṃ. Gambhīrādhippāyato sātthaṃ, uttānapadato sabyañjanaṃ. Upanetabbassa abhāvato sakalaparipuṇṇabhāvena kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ; apanetabbassa abhāvato niddosabhāvena parisuddhaṃ; sikkhattayapariggahitattā brahmabhūtehi seṭṭhehi caritabbato tesañca cariyabhāvato brahmacariyaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ…pe… brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetī’’ti vuccati.
再者,当宣说具有因缘、具有生起之相的法时,便是初善;因随顺所化之机、义理无颠倒,且具足因由与譬喻,即是中善;因令听者生起信心,并以结语作结,即为后善。如此宣说,便是开示梵行。又,此梵行由修证方面的成就而“有义”,由教理方面的传承成就而“有文”;由于具足戒等五法蕴而“完全圆满”;由于远离随眠烦恼、为度脱而转起、不希求世间利养而“完全清净”。以最胜之义而言,由梵行已立者——佛、独觉佛、佛弟子——所行,故称为“梵行”。因此,也被说为“彼世尊宣说初善、中善、后善之法……开示梵行”。显示巴利原文
Apica yasmā sanidānaṃ sauppattikañca desento ādikalyāṇaṃ deseti, veneyyānaṃ anurūpato atthassa aviparītatāya ca hetudāharaṇayuttato ca majjhekalyāṇaṃ, sotūnaṃ saddhāpaṭilābhena nigamanena ca pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ deseti. Evaṃ desento ca brahmacariyaṃ pakāseti. Tañca paṭipattiyā adhigamabyattito sātthaṃ, pariyattiyā āgamabyattito sabyañjanaṃ, sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhayuttato kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ, nirupakkilesato nittharaṇatthāya pavattito lokāmisanirapekkhato ca parisuddhaṃ, seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtānaṃ buddha-paccekabuddha-buddhasāvakānaṃ cariyato ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuccati. Tasmāpi ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetī’’ti vuccati.
“善哉,确实”是说:确实美好,能带来利益、带来安乐。“像那样的阿罗汉”:意指如同那位乔达摩尊者那样,由于证得如实功德而在世间获得“阿罗汉”之名的阿罗汉们。“得以相见”:即生起净信,睁开柔和的眼睛,内心这样想:“哪怕仅仅得见,也是善的。”于是,韦然阇婆罗门便前往世尊所在之处。显示巴利原文
Sādhu kho panāti sundaraṃ kho pana atthāvahaṃ sukhāvahanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathārūpānaṃ arahatanti yathārūpo so bhava gotamo, evarūpānaṃ yathābhuccaguṇādhigamena loke arahantoti laddhasaddānaṃ arahataṃ. Dassanaṃ hotīti pasādasommāni akkhīni ummīlitvā ‘‘dassanamattampi sādhu hotī’’ti evaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ katvā atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti.
2 “Yena”一词是处格意义上的具格。因此,这里应理解为:“世尊在何处,他便去往何处。”或者也可以理解为:“以什么样的原因,天与人应去亲近世尊,他便以那样的原因去亲近。”那么,世尊应被亲近的原因是什么呢?是为了希求获得种种功德殊胜,为了希求享受善妙果报,正如鸟类恒常飞往果实累累的大树一般。“去亲近”是指已经前往。“亲近已”表示亲近动作的完成。另一种理解是:这样去了之后,又去到更靠近世尊的附近处。显示巴利原文
2.Yenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Tasmā yattha bhagavā tattha upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo . Yena vā kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kena ca kāraṇena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo? Nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamādhippāyena, sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyena dijagaṇehi niccaphalitamahārukkho viya. Upasaṅkamīti ca gatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasaṅkamitvāti upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā evaṃ gato tato āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ bhagavato samīpasaṅkhātaṃ gantvātipi vuttaṃ hoti.
“与世尊共欢喜”的意思是:正如世尊以“是否堪忍”等语问候他,他也同样与世尊一同生起相称的欢喜,犹如凉水与温水交融,合为一体。而那种以“乔达摩尊者,堪忍否?过活得宜否?乔达摩尊者与其弟子们是否少病、少恼、轻安、有力、安乐而住?”等话语而生起的言谈,由于能生起名为喜悦与欢悦的欢喜,也由于它是作欢喜的方便,故称“可欢喜的”。由于义理与文辞的甘美,能长久忆持、相续运转,因其值得忆念,故称“可忆持的”;或者说,听闻时令人愉悦,故称“可欢喜的”,忆念时令人喜悦,故称“可忆持的”。同样地,由于文辞清净而称“可欢喜的”,由于义理清净而称“可忆持的”。就这样,以种种方式进行可欢喜、可忆持的交谈之后,他结束、完成、终止了交谈,为了询问来意而退坐一面。显示巴利原文
Bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodīti yathā khamanīyādīni pucchanto bhagavā tena, evaṃ sopi bhagavatā saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosi, sītodakaṃ viya uṇhodakena sammoditaṃ ekībhāvaṃ agamāsi. Yāya ca ‘‘kacci, bho, gotama, khamanīyaṃ; kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci bhoto gotamassa, ca sāvakānañca appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāro’’tiādikāya kathāya sammodi, taṃ pītipāmojjasaṅkhātaṃ sammodaṃ jananato sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato ca sammodanīyaṃ. Atthabyañjanamadhuratāya sucirampi kālaṃ sāretuṃ nirantaraṃ pavattetuṃ araharūpato saritabbabhāvato ca sāraṇīyaṃ, suyyamānasukhato vā sammodanīyaṃ, anussariyamānasukhato sāraṇīyaṃ. Tathā byañjanaparisuddhatāya sammodanīyaṃ, atthaparisuddhatāya sāraṇīyanti. Evaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi sammodanīyaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ kathaṃ vītisāretvā pariyosāpetvā niṭṭhāpetvā yenatthena āgato taṃ pucchitukāmo ekamantaṃ nisīdi.
“一面”是抽象中性词的表述,如同“日月不均匀地运行”等句中的用法。因此,应这样理解此处的意义:他那样坐着,就成为退坐一面地坐着。或者说,此处的“一面”是处格意义的业格用法。“坐下”即走近坐下。因为具智慧的人前往应受尊敬者之处后,善于了知坐法,便会退坐一面。而他正是这其中的一位,所以他退坐一面。显示巴利原文
Ekamantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya. Tasmā yathā nisinno ekamantaṃ nisinno hoti tathā nisīdīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Nisīdīti upāvisi. Paṇḍitā hi purisā garuṭṭhāniyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āsanakusalatāya ekamantaṃ nisīdanti. Ayañca tesaṃ aññataro, tasmā ekamantaṃ nisīdi.
那么,怎样坐着才算是“退坐一面”呢?即避开六种坐的过失,这就是:太远、太近、在上风处、在高处、在正前方、在正后方。坐得太远的人,若想说话,就必须大声说话。坐得太近的人,会造成身体碰触。坐在上风处的人,会以身体的气味恼触他人。坐在高处的人,会表现出不恭敬。坐在正前方的人,若想看对方,便不得不眼对眼地看。坐在正后方的人,若想看对方,便不得不伸长脖子看。正因为这位也避开了这六种坐的过失而坐,所以这样说:“他退坐一面。”显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ nisinno pana ekamantaṃ nisinno hotīti? Cha nisajjadose vajjetvā. Seyyathidaṃ – atidūraṃ, accāsannaṃ, uparivātaṃ, unnatappadesaṃ, atisammukhaṃ, atipacchāti. Atidūre nisinno hi sace kathetukāmo hoti uccāsaddena kathetabbaṃ hoti. Accāsanne nisinno saṅghaṭṭanaṃ karoti. Uparivāte nisinno sarīragandhena bādhati. Unnatappadese nisinno agāravaṃ pakāseti. Atisammukhā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, cakkhunā cakkhuṃ āhacca daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Atipacchā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti gīvaṃ pasāretvā daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā ayampi ete cha nisajjadose vajjetvā nisīdi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisīdī’’ti.
“退坐一面后,韦然阇婆罗门对世尊这样说”:“此”(etaṃ)字表示接下来要说的内容。“d”是连音字。“说”(avoca)意即言说。“我闻”(sutaṃ me)即“我听闻了此事,此事是我所听闻的”,也指明接下来要说的内容。“乔达摩尊者”(bho gotama)是以姓氏称呼世尊。显示巴利原文
Ekamantaṃ nisinno kho verañjo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti etanti idāni vattabbamatthaṃ dasseti. Dakāro padasandhikaro. Avocāti abhāsi. Sutaṃ metanti sutaṃ me etaṃ, etaṃ mayā sutanti idāni vattabbamatthaṃ dasseti. Bho gotamāti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati.
现在,为了显示他所听闻的内容,他开始说“沙门乔达摩不……”等语。此处对隐晦词句的注释如下:“婆罗门”指生而为婆罗门者。“老”指衰老、朽坏,因年老而达到牙齿脱落等状态。“年长”指身肢已达生长的极限。“高龄”指因出身而年高,即已经历了漫长的时间。“经久”指已经历长久时间,意即已过了两三个王治时期。“达至老年”指已达最末的年龄,最末的年龄即百岁中的最后三分之一。显示巴利原文
Idāni yaṃ tena sutaṃ – taṃ dassento na samaṇo gotamoti evamādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – brāhmaṇeti jātibrāhmaṇe. Jiṇṇeti jajjarībhūte jarāya khaṇḍiccādibhāvaṃ āpādite. Vuḍḍheti aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ vuḍḍhimariyādappatte. Mahallaketi jātimahallakatāya samannāgate, cirakālappasuteti vuttaṃ hoti. Addhagateti addhānaṃ gate , dve tayo rājaparivaṭṭe atīteti adhippāyo. Vayo anuppatteti pacchimavayaṃ sampatte, pacchimavayo nāma vassasatassa pacchimo tatiyabhāgo.
再者,“老”亦可指古老,意即具有长久延续的家族传承。“年长”指具备戒行等功德的增长。“高龄”指拥有大财富、大受用,即财富巨大。“经久”指已踏上道路,即在不违越婆罗门誓愿行持等轨范的情况下而行持。“达至老年”指已达到出身年长的状态,亦即已达最末的年龄。应知此处如此连接。显示巴利原文
Apica – jiṇṇeti porāṇe, cirakālappavattakulanvayeti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuḍḍheti sīlācārādiguṇavuḍḍhiyutte. Mahallaketi vibhavamahattatāya samannāgate mahaddhane mahābhoge. Addhagateti maggappaṭipanne, brāhmaṇānaṃ vatacariyādimariyādaṃ avītikkamma caramāne. Vayoanuppatteti jātivuḍḍhabhāvaṃ antimavayaṃ anuppatteti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
于是,“致敬”等词应如前文“沙门乔达摩不……”中所说之理加以连接,从意义上可以这样理解:“他不问讯,也不从座起身,也不以‘请诸位尊者在此就座’这样的方式以座位邀请。”此处,“或”字用于显明义,如同“色是常或无常”等句中的用法。如此说完,见世尊未对自己作致敬等行为,便说:“乔达摩尊者,这确实如此。”我先前所闻的那件事确实如此,我的听闻与所见相符一致,在意义上合而为一。他以“乔达摩尊者不……以座位邀请”的方式,将所闻归结于所见之后,带着责备的语气说:“乔达摩尊者,这并不圆满。”那种不作致敬等的行为,实在不妥。显示巴利原文
Idāni abhivādetīti evamādīni ‘‘na samaṇo gotamo’’ti ettha vuttanakārena yojetvā evamatthato veditabbāni – ‘‘na vandati vā, nāsanā vuṭṭhahati vā, nāpi ‘idha bhonto nisīdantū’ti evaṃ āsanena vā upanimantetī’’ti. Ettha hi vā saddo vibhāvane nāma atthe, ‘‘rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’tiādīsu viya. Evaṃ vatvā atha attano abhivādanādīni akarontaṃ bhagavantaṃ disvā āha – ‘‘tayidaṃ bho gotama tathevā’’ti. Yaṃ taṃ mayā sutaṃ – taṃ tatheva, taṃ savanañca me dassanañca saṃsandati sameti, atthato ekībhāvaṃ gacchati. ‘‘Na hi bhavaṃ gotamo…pe… āsanena vā nimantetī’’ti evaṃ attanā sutaṃ diṭṭhena nigametvā nindanto āha – ‘‘tayidaṃ bho gotama na sampannamevā’’ti taṃ abhivādanādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ na yuttameva.
于是,世尊不落入自赞毁他的过失,怀着悲悯清凉之心,欲破除他的无知而显明何为合理,便说道:“婆罗门,我……乃至……他的头也会破裂。”此处略义为:“婆罗门,我以无碍的一切知智之眼观察,于此包括天等在内的世间中,也见不到哪怕一位值得我对他问讯、起迎或以座邀请之人。这并非如今才如此,我既已证得一切知,却见不到如此值得恭敬对待的人。再者,当我刚出生时,朝北行走七步,观视整个一万世界,那时于此包括天等在内的世间中,我也见不到任何一位值得我对他问讯、起迎或以座邀请之人。当时,那位寿命达一万六千劫的漏尽大梵天,合掌对我生起信心而称赞道:‘你是世间的大丈夫,你是包括天等在内的世间的最上者、最胜者、最尊者,无人胜过于你。’那时,我因不见有比自己更上者,而作狮子吼道:‘我是世间的最上者,我是世间的最胜者,我是世间的最尊者。’如此,即便在我初生之时,也无值得我问讯等之人,如今我已证得一切知,又应问讯……或以座邀请谁呢?因此,婆罗门,你不应对如来有如此的恭敬期待。婆罗门,如来若对谁问讯……或以座邀请,那个人的头就会破裂。显示巴利原文
Athassa bhagavā attukkaṃsanaparavambhanadosaṃ anupagamma karuṇāsītalahadayena taṃ aññāṇaṃ vidhamitvā yuttabhāvaṃ dassetukāmo āha – ‘‘nāhaṃ taṃ brāhmaṇa…pe… muddhāpi tassa vipateyyā’’ti. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – ‘‘ahaṃ, brāhmaṇa, appaṭihatena sabbaññutaññāṇacakkhunā olokentopi taṃ puggalaṃ etasmiṃ sadevakādibhede loke na passāmi, yamahaṃ abhivādeyyaṃ vā paccuṭṭheyyaṃ vā āsanena vā nimanteyyaṃ. Anacchariyaṃ vā etaṃ, yvāhaṃ ajja sabbaññutaṃ patto evarūpaṃ nipaccakārārahaṃ puggalaṃ na passāmi. Apica kho yadāpāhaṃ sampatijātova uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gantvā sakalaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ olokesiṃ; tadāpi etasmiṃ sadevakādibhede loke taṃ puggalaṃ na passāmi, yamahaṃ abhivādeyyaṃ vā paccuṭṭheyyaṃ vā āsanena vā nimanteyyaṃ. Atha kho maṃ soḷasakappasahassāyuko khīṇāsavamahābrahmāpi añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘tvaṃ loke mahāpuriso, tvaṃ sadevakassa lokassa aggo ca jeṭṭho ca seṭṭho ca, natthi tayā uttaritaro’’ti sañjātasomanasso patināmesi; tadāpi cāhaṃ attanā uttaritaraṃ apassanto āsabhiṃ vācaṃ nicchāresiṃ – ‘‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassā’’ti. Evaṃ sampatijātassapi mayhaṃ abhivādanādiraho puggalo natthi, svāhaṃ idāni sabbaññutaṃ patto kaṃ abhivādeyyaṃ vā…pe… āsanena vā nimanteyyaṃ. Tasmā tvaṃ, brāhmaṇa, mā tathāgate evarūpaṃ nipaccakāraṃ patthayittha. Yañhi, brāhmaṇa, tathāgato abhivādeyya vā…pe… āsanena vā nimanteyya, muddhāpi tassa puggalassa rattipariyosāne paripākasithilabandhanaṃ vaṇṭā pavuttatālaphalamiva gīvato pacchijjitvā sahasāva bhūmiyaṃ vipateyyāti.
3 虽被如此告知,婆罗门却因智慧低劣,未能觉察如来在世间的最胜地位,只是不能忍受那番话,便说道:“乔达摩尊者是无味者。”据说他内心的意思是:世间所谓问讯、起迎、合掌、如法行事,被称为“和合之味”,而乔达摩尊者没有这些,由此说乔达摩尊者是“无味者”,即属无味之种类、有无味之本性。于是,世尊为了令他心生效柔软,避其锋芒而将那句话的含义以另一种方式显示于自身,说道:“婆罗门,确实有这一理趣……”显示巴利原文
3. Evaṃ vuttepi brāhmaṇo duppaññatāya tathāgatassa loke jeṭṭhabhāvaṃ asallakkhento kevalaṃ taṃ vacanaṃ asahamāno āha – ‘‘arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti. Ayaṃ kirassa adhippāyo – yaṃ loke abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammaṃ ‘‘sāmaggiraso’’ti vuccati, taṃ bhoto gotamassa natthi , tasmā arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamo, arasajātiko arasasabhāvoti. Athassa bhagavā cittamudubhāvajananatthaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhāvaṃ pariharanto aññathā tassa vacanassatthaṃ attani sandassento ‘‘atthi khvesa brāhmaṇa pariyāyo’’tiādimāha.
其中,“pariyāya”指原因。此“pariyāya”一词用于说法、次第、原因等义。如在“你们应将它持守为《蜜丸理趣》”等处,用于说法;在“阿难,今日该轮到谁去教诫比丘尼”等处,用于次第;在“善哉,尊者,请世尊开示另一种理趣,以使此比丘僧团得以和合而住”等处,用于原因。此处即用于原因。因此,应如是理解其义:婆罗门,确实有那样的理趣,依此理趣,称我为“沙门乔达摩是无味者”的人,可说是如实说,并非虚言。然而,那是怎样的理趣呢?婆罗门,那些色味……乃至触味,如来已断除。这是什么意思呢?那些因出身或生起方式而被视为最高等的凡夫,在享受、爱乐、耽著于色等所缘时,便生起名为欲乐味的色味、声味、香味、味味、触味。这些味如同以轭将世间套在颈上一般牵引流转,又由于依处与所缘等和合而生,故称为“和合味”。这一切,如来悉已断除。虽然理应说“我已断除”,世尊却并不以我执而抬高自己,而是如此说法。又或者说,这便是世尊的说法善巧。显示巴利原文
Tattha pariyāyoti kāraṇaṃ; ayañhi pariyāyasaddo desanā-vāra-kāraṇesu vattati. ‘‘Madhupiṇḍikapariyāyotveva naṃ dhārehī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.205) hi esa desanāyaṃ vattati. ‘‘Kassa nu kho, ānanda, ajja pariyāyo bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.398) vāre. ‘‘Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā aññaṃ pariyāyaṃ ācikkhatu, yathāyaṃ bhikkhusaṅgho aññāya saṇṭhaheyyā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 164) kāraṇe. Svāyamidha kāraṇe vattati . Tasmā ettha evamattho daṭṭhabbo – atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, etaṃ kāraṇaṃ; yena kāraṇena maṃ ‘‘arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti vadamāno puggalo sammā vadeyya, avitathavādīti saṅkhyaṃ gaccheyya. Katamo pana soti? Ye te brāhmaṇa rūparasā…pe… phoṭṭhabbarasā te tathāgatassa pahīnāti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ye te jātivasena vā upapattivasena vā seṭṭhasammatānampi puthujjanānaṃ rūpārammaṇādīni assādentānaṃ abhinandantānaṃ rajjantānaṃ uppajjanti kāmasukhassādasaṅkhātā rūparasasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbarasā, ye imaṃ lokaṃ gīvāya bandhitvā viya āviñchanti, vatthārammaṇādisāmaggiyañca uppannattā sāmaggirasāti vuccanti, te sabbepi tathāgatassa pahīnāti. Mayhaṃ pahīnāti vattabbepi mamākārena attānaṃ anukkhipanto dhammaṃ deseti. Desanāvilāso vā esa bhagavato.
其中,“已断除”是指从心相续中远离或舍弃。在此意义上,应当将具格作主格理解。以圣道之剑,将其以渴爱与无明为性的根斩断,故为“已断根”。令其根基如同多罗树的残桩,故为“已作多罗树基”。正如把多罗树连根拔起,只留下树桩,该处便不再有多罗树生长;同样,以圣道之剑将色味等连根拔起,在心相续中只留下它们过去曾生起的残基,这便是“已作多罗树基”。或者,因其不再生长的性质,如同被截去顶端的多罗树那样而作,故为“已作多罗树基”。因为如此已作多罗树基,它们便成为无有,即令它们之后不再存在,故说“已作无有”。此处应如此分解:anu-abhāvaṃ katā,即是an-abhāvaṃ katā。也有读作anabhāvaṃ gatā,其义为anu-abhāvaṃ gatā。分解时,anu-abhāvaṃ gatā即an-abhāvaṃ gatā,如同anu-acchariyā即an-acchariyā。未来不再生的性质,即未来不再生起的自性。既然已达无有,又如何能再生呢?因此说“已至无有”。显示巴利原文
Tattha pahīnāti cittasantānato vigatā jahitā vā. Etasmiṃ panatthe karaṇe sāmivacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ariyamaggasatthena ucchinnaṃ taṇhāvijjāmayaṃ mūlametesanti ucchinnamūlā. Tālavatthu viya nesaṃ vatthu katanti tālāvatthukatā. Yathā hi tālarukkhaṃ samūlaṃ uddharitvā tassa vatthumatte tasmiṃ padese kate na puna tassa tālassa uppatti paññāyati; evaṃ ariyamaggasatthena samūle rūpādirase uddharitvā tesaṃ pubbe uppannapubbabhāvena vatthumatte cittasantāne kate sabbepi te ‘‘tālāvatthukatā’’ti vuccanti. Avirūḷhidhammattā vā matthakacchinnatālo viya katāti tālāvatthukatā. Yasmā pana evaṃ tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṃkatā honti, yathā nesaṃ pacchābhāvo na hoti, tathā katā honti; tasmā āha – ‘‘anabhāvaṃkatā’’ti. Ayañhettha padacchedo – anuabhāvaṃ katā anabhāvaṃkatāti. ‘‘Anabhāvaṃ gatā’’tipi pāṭho, tassa anuabhāvaṃ gatāti attho. Tattha padacchedo anuabhāvaṃ gatā anabhāvaṃ gatāti, yathā anuacchariyā anacchariyāti. Āyatiṃ anuppādadhammāti anāgate anuppajjanakasabhāvā. Ye hi abhāvaṃ gatā, te puna kathaṃ uppajjissanti? Tenāha – ‘‘anabhāvaṃ gatā āyatiṃ anuppādadhammā’’ti.
“婆罗门,这是理趣”的意思是:婆罗门,这即是那个理由,依此理由,如实说者可以说“沙门乔达摩是无味者”。然而,并非如你所指称的那样——你所指称的那个,并非理趣。世尊为什么这样说呢?当这样说时,岂非承认了自身中仍存在婆罗门所说的“和合味”吗?答曰:并非如此。因为,如果一个人有能力成就那种和合味,却不去做,那他由于没有这种和合味,才可以被称为无味者。而世尊根本就没有能力做那种事。因此,为了显示他在做那种事上是无能的,世尊才说:“然而,并非如你所指称的那样。”你依据某个理趣而称我为“无味者”,那个理趣在我们这里根本不适用。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ kho brāhmaṇa pariyāyoti idaṃ kho, brāhmaṇa, kāraṇaṃ yena maṃ sammā vadamāno vadeyya ‘‘arasarūpo samaṇo gotamo’’ti. No ca kho yaṃ tvaṃ sandhāya vadesīti yañca kho tvaṃ sandhāya vadesi, so pariyāyo na hoti. Kasmā pana bhagavā evamāha? Nanu evaṃ vutte yo brāhmaṇena vutto sāmaggiraso tassa attani vijjamānatā anuññātā hotīti. Vuccate, na hoti. Yo hi taṃ sāmaggirasaṃ kātuṃ bhabbo hutvā na karoti, so tadabhāvena arasarūpoti vattabbo bhaveyya. Bhagavā pana abhabbova etaṃ kātuṃ, tenassa karaṇe abhabbataṃ pakāsento āha – ‘‘no ca kho yaṃ tvaṃ sandhāya vadesī’’ti. Yaṃ pariyāyaṃ sandhāya tvaṃ maṃ ‘‘arasarūpo’’ti vadesi, so amhesu neva vattabboti.
4 如此,婆罗门未能将自己执著的“无味性”强加于世尊,便又说出“乔达摩尊者是无所受用者”等语。在这一切理趣中,应依已述的方法了知连接次第,并了知依其所指而说的含义。婆罗门以为世间对年长者的敬礼等行为是和合共处的受用,因不见世尊有这些行为,便称世尊为无所受用者。然而,世尊观察到自身并无众生对色等所起的欲贪受用,因此认可了另一理趣。显示巴利原文
4. Evaṃ brāhmaṇo attanā adhippetaṃ arasarūpataṃ āropetuṃ asakkonto athāparaṃ nibbhogo bhavaṃ gotamotiādimāha. Sabbapariyāyesu cettha vuttanayeneva yojanakkamaṃ viditvā sandhāya bhāsitamattaṃ evaṃ veditabbaṃ. Brāhmaṇo tameva vayovuḍḍhānaṃ abhivādanakammādiṃ loke sāmaggiparibhogoti maññamāno tadabhāvena bhagavantaṃ nibbhogoti āha. Bhagavā pana yvāyaṃ rūpādīsu sattānaṃ chandarāgaparibhogo tadabhāvaṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti.
5 又,婆罗门见世尊不行世间人对年长者的敬礼等家族习俗行为,便称世尊为“无作论者”。然而,世尊因为宣说不作身恶行等,所以见到自身有此无作论,便认可了另一理趣。其中,身恶行应知为杀生、不与取、邪淫的思;语恶行应知为妄语、离间语、粗恶语、杂秽语的思;意恶行应知为贪求、嗔恚、邪见。除这些法,其余不善法当知为“种种恶不善法”。显示巴利原文
5. Puna brāhmaṇo yaṃ loke vayovuḍḍhānaṃ abhivādanādikulasamudācārakammaṃ lokiyā karonti tassa akiriyaṃ sampassamāno bhagavantaṃ akiriyavādoti āha. Bhagavā pana, yasmā kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ akiriyaṃ vadati tasmā, taṃ akiriyavādaṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti. Tattha ca kāyaduccaritanti pāṇātipāta-adinnādāna-micchācāracetanā veditabbā. Vacīduccaritanti musāvāda-pisuṇavācā-pharusavācā-samphappalāpacetanā veditabbā. Manoduccaritanti abhijjhābyāpādamicchādiṭṭhiyo veditabbā. Ṭhapetvā te dhamme, avasesā akusalā dhammā ‘‘anekavihitā pāpakā akusalā dhammā’’ti veditabbā.
6 又,婆罗门于世尊身上不见那些敬礼等行为,便以为“以此,世间传统便断绝了”,于是称世尊为“断灭论者”。然而,世尊由于宣说以不还道断除八种与贪俱行的心中的五种欲贪,以及于二种不善心中生起的嗔恚;又宣说以阿罗汉道断除一切不善之根源的无余痴;除了这三种,还宣说以四道随宜断除其余恶不善法。因此,见到自身有此断灭论,便认可了另一理趣。显示巴利原文
6. Puna brāhmaṇo tameva abhivādanādikammaṃ bhagavati apassanto imaṃ ‘‘āgamma ayaṃ lokatanti lokapaveṇī ucchijjatī’’ti maññamāno bhagavantaṃ ucchedavādoti āha. Bhagavā pana yasmā aṭṭhasu lobhasahagatacittesu pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassa dvīsu akusalacittesu uppajjamānakadosassa ca anāgāmimaggena ucchedaṃ vadati. Sabbākusalasambhavassa pana niravasesassa mohassa arahattamaggena ucchedaṃ vadati. Ṭhapetvā te tayo, avasesānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ yathānurūpaṃ catūhi maggehi ucchedaṃ vadati; tasmā taṃ ucchedavādaṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti.
7 又,婆罗门心想:“沙门乔达摩大概是厌弃了这些对年长者的敬礼等家族习俗,所以才不做的。”他便以此称世尊为“厌弃者”。然而,世尊实因厌弃身恶行等而称为厌弃者。这是什么意思呢?即三种身恶行、四种语恶行与三种意恶行,以及除此之外的其他法——因低劣而称为恶、因不善巧生起而称为不善法的那些等至、入定与具足。对于这一切,如同喜爱装饰种姓的人对粪便感到厌弃、羞耻一般,世尊亦厌弃、羞耻它们。因此,了知自身具有这种对所厌弃之事的厌弃,便认可了另一层含义。其中,“以身恶行”应视为具格,表示厌弃的对象。显示巴利原文
7. Puna brāhmaṇo ‘‘jigucchati maññe samaṇo gotamo idaṃ vayovuḍḍhānaṃ abhivādanādikulasamudācārakammaṃ, tena taṃ na karotī’’ti maññamāno bhagavantaṃ jegucchīti āha. Bhagavā pana yasmā jigucchati kāyaduccaritādīhi; kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti ? Yañca tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ, yañca catubbidhaṃ vacīduccaritaṃ, yañca tividhaṃ manoduccaritaṃ, yā ca ṭhapetvā tāni duccaritāni avasesānaṃ lāmakaṭṭhena pāpakānaṃ akosallasambhūtaṭṭhena akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpatti samāpajjanā samaṅgibhāvo, taṃ sabbampi gūthaṃ viya maṇḍanakajātiyo puriso jigucchati hirīyati, tasmā taṃ jegucchitaṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti. Tattha ‘‘kāyaduccaritenā’’ti upayogatthe karaṇavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
8 又,婆罗门见世尊没有那些敬礼等行为,便心想:“此人是在消除、破坏这世间尊长之道,或者说,因为他不做这些合宜的行为,所以此人应当被调伏、应受呵责。”他因此称世尊为“应调伏者”。在此,词义如是:调伏,即是令调伏,也就是破坏的意思。有调伏者,即是应被调伏者,或应受调伏者,也就是应受呵责。然而,世尊因为宣说调伏、平息贪等烦恼之法,故而是应调伏者。此处词义正是:为调伏而说法者,即是应调伏者。派生词的用法确实多种多样!世尊了知自身具有那应调伏者的意义,便认可了另一层含义。显示巴利原文
8. Puna brāhmaṇo tameva abhivādanādikammaṃ bhagavati apassanto ‘‘ayaṃ imaṃ lokajeṭṭhakakammaṃ vineti vināseti, atha vā yasmā etaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ na karoti tasmā ayaṃ vinetabbo niggaṇhitabbo’’ti maññamāno bhagavantaṃ venayikoti āha. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – vinayatīti vinayo, vināsetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vinayo eva venayiko, vinayaṃ vā arahatīti venayiko, niggahaṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhagavā pana, yasmā rāgādīnaṃ vinayāya vūpasamāya dhammaṃ deseti, tasmā venayiko hoti. Ayameva cettha padattho – vinayāya dhammaṃ desetīti venayiko. Vicitrā hi taddhitavutti! Svāyaṃ taṃ venayikabhāvaṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti.
9 又,婆罗门因见作敬礼等合宜行为的人能令年长者喜悦、欢喜,而不做的人则令他们苦恼、受伤、心生忧恼,而世尊不做那些行为;因此,婆罗门心想:“此人是在令年长者受苦。”又或因世尊不具足善士的行仪,心想:“这是个可怜人。”他于是称世尊为“苦行者”。在此,词义如是:令人苦恼,即是苦行,意为激怒、伤害,这是针对不做合宜行为而言的名称。有如此苦行的人,即是有苦行者。在另一种不推敲字面的释义中,世间称可怜人为“苦行者”。然而,世尊已断除那些因令世间苦恼而被称为“应被苦迫”的不善法,故称为苦行者。因此,了知自身具有那苦行者的意义,便认可了另一层含义。此处词义如是:令人苦恼者,即是苦,这是不善法的别名。正如经中所说:“此处受苦,死后亦受苦。”同样地,他已断除、驱逐、舍弃、破坏那些苦,故为苦行者。显示巴利原文
9. Puna brāhmaṇo yasmā abhivādanādīni sāmīcikammāni karontā vayovuḍḍhe tosenti hāsenti, akarontā pana tāpenti vihesenti domanassaṃ nesaṃ uppādenti, bhagavā ca tāni na karoti; tasmā ‘‘ayaṃ vayovuḍḍhe tapatī’’ti maññamāno sappurisācāravirahitattā vā ‘‘kapaṇapuriso aya’’nti maññamāno bhagavantaṃ tapassīti āha. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – tapatīti tapo, roseti vihesetīti vuttaṃ hoti, sāmīcikammākaraṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tapo assa atthīti tapassī. Dutiye atthavikappe byañjanāni avicāretvā loke kapaṇapuriso ‘‘tapassī’’ti vuccati. Bhagavā pana ye akusalā dhammā lokaṃ tapanato tapanīyāti vuccanti, tesaṃ pahīnattā yasmā tapassīti saṅkhyaṃ gato, tasmā taṃ tapassitaṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – tapantīti tapā, akusaladhammānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vuttampi hetaṃ – ‘‘idha tappati pecca tappatī’’ti. Tathā te tape assi nirassi pahāsi viddhaṃsesīti tapassī.
10 十、再者,那位婆罗门以为礼敬等行为能带来天界胎藏成就、获得天界结生,而他在世尊身上并未见到这些,于是称世尊为“无胎者”。又或者,他是出于忿怒,为了显示世尊在母胎中结生有失,才出此言。此处词义如下:“无胎者”意指已离胎者,即不能证得天界转生;或者,“无胎者”意指其胎藏低劣,即因被排除于天界胎藏之外,将来只获得低劣之胎;又或者,是指他在母胎中的胎居低劣。然而,世尊因为未来已断除胎居,所以自己观察到此无胎性,也认可另一种解释。其中,“婆罗门,若人未来之胎居、后有之再生已断除”这段话,应这样理解其义:婆罗门,若有人未来之胎居及后有之再生,由于以无上道断除了其因,故已究竟断除。在此,以“胎居”一词摄取了湿生,以“后有之再生”一词摄取了其余三种生。显示巴利原文
10. Puna brāhmaṇo taṃ abhivādanādikammaṃ devalokagabbhasampattiyā devalokapaṭisandhipaṭilābhāya saṃvattatīti maññamāno bhagavati cassa abhāvaṃ disvā bhagavantaṃ apagabbhoti āha. Kodhavasena vā bhagavato mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇe dosaṃ dassentopi evamāha. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – gabbhato apagatoti apagabbho, abhabbo devalokūpapattiṃ pāpuṇitunti adhippāyo. Hīno vā gabbho assāti apagabbho, devalokagabbhaparibāhirattā āyatiṃ hīnagabbhapaṭilābhabhāgīti, hīno vāssa mātukucchimhi gabbhavāso ahosīti adhippāyo. Bhagavato pana yasmā āyatiṃ gabbhaseyyā apagatā, tasmā so taṃ apagabbhataṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti. Tatra ca yassa kho brāhmaṇa āyatiṃ gabbhaseyyā punabbhavābhinibbatti pahīnāti etesaṃ padānaṃ evamattho daṭṭhabbo – brāhmaṇa, yassa puggalassa anāgate gabbhaseyyā, punabbhave ca abhinibbatti anuttarena maggena vihatakāraṇattā pahīnāti. Gabbhaseyyaggahaṇena cettha jalābujayoni gahitā. Punabbhavābhinibbattiggahaṇena itarā tissopi.
再者,应如此理解此处的含义:胎的居处名为胎居,后有即是再生,因此说为后有之再生。正如说到“识住”时,并非在识之外另有一个住存在,这里也应当知道并非在胎之外另有一个居处。又,所谓再生,因为既有属于后有的,也有不属于后有的,而此处所指是那属于后有的,所以说“后有即是再生,为后有之再生”。显示巴利原文
Apica gabbhassa seyyā gabbhaseyyā, punabbhavo eva abhinibbatti punabbhavābhinibbattīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yathā ca viññāṇaṭṭhitīti vuttepi na viññāṇato aññā ṭhiti atthi, evamidhāpi na gabbhato aññā seyyāti veditabbā. Abhinibbatti ca nāma yasmā punabbhavabhūtāpi apunabbhavabhūtāpi atthi, idha ca punabbhavabhūtā adhippetā. Tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘punabbhavo eva abhinibbatti punabbhavābhinibbattī’’ti.
11 十一、如此,从到来之时起,那位婆罗门便以“无味之形”等八种骂詈事由不断辱骂。世尊——法之主宰、法之王、法之主人、如来,出于悲悯,以清凉之眼注视着他。因为世尊善巧通达法界,通达后即获得说法妙趣,犹如秋空无云时升起的满月,又如秋日朗照,驱散婆罗门心中的黑暗,并以种种方式将那些骂詈事由显示为截然不同的意思。再有,为了显示自身悲心流露——以不为八种世间法所动而证得的“如地平等之心”与“不动法性”等如是功德之相,世尊思惟:“这位婆罗门仅凭白发、秃头、齿缺、皮皱等而自知年老,却不知自身正被生随逐、被老追随、为病所征服、为死所击打,已成了轮回的桩柱,今日死去,明日便成为仰卧的婴儿之身。然而,他付出这般大的努力来到我面前,愿他的到来能有利益。”于是,为了显示自己在此世间无与伦比的先出生身份,世尊便以“婆罗门,譬如”等方式,为婆罗门开示法义。显示巴利原文
11. Evaṃ āgatakālato paṭṭhāya arasarūpatādīhi aṭṭhahi akkosavatthūhi akkosantampi brāhmaṇaṃ bhagavā dhammissaro dhammarājā dhammassāmī tathāgato anukampāya sītaleneva cakkhunā olokento yaṃ dhammadhātuṃ paṭivijjhitvā desanāvilāsappatto hoti, tassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā vigatavalāhake antalikkhe samabbhuggato puṇṇacando viya saradakāle sūriyo viya ca brāhmaṇassa hadayandhakāraṃ vidhamanto tāniyeva akkosavatthūni tena tena pariyāyena aññathā dassetvā, punapi attano karuṇāvipphāraṃ aṭṭhahi lokadhammehi akampiyabhāvena paṭiladdhaṃ, tādiguṇalakkhaṇaṃ pathavīsamacittataṃ akuppadhammatañca pakāsento ‘‘ayaṃ brāhmaṇo kevalaṃ palitasirakhaṇḍadantavalittacatādīhi attano vuḍḍhabhāvaṃ sañjānāti, no ca kho jānāti attānaṃ jātiyā anugataṃ jarāya anusaṭaṃ byādhinā abhibhūtaṃ maraṇena abbhāhataṃ vaṭṭakhāṇubhūtaṃ ajja maritvā puna sveva uttānasayanadārakabhāvagamanīyaṃ. Mahantena kho pana ussāhena mama santikaṃ āgato, tadassa āgamanaṃ sātthakaṃ hotū’’ti cintetvā imasmiṃ loke attano appaṭisamaṃ purejātabhāvaṃ dassento seyyathāpi brāhmaṇātiādinā nayena brāhmaṇassa dhammadesanaṃ vaḍḍhesi.
其中,“se
yathā”是一个表示譬喻的不变词;“pi”是一个表示赞叹的不变词;两者共同表达“正如所谓的婆罗门”之义。至于“母鸡的蛋,或八枚、或十枚、或十二枚”,此处应知:虽然母鸡所生的蛋,数量有少于或多于上述情况,但为了语言的顺畅,才如此表述。因为世间如此方为流畅的表达。“tānassu”即“tāni assu”,意为“那些蛋应存在”。所谓“被母鸡妥善地孵卧”,是指那只生养它们的母鸡展开翅膀,覆盖其上,妥善地孵卧。所谓“被妥善地温热”,是指适时地使其受温,从各方面妥善地温热,即令其温暖之意。所谓“被妥善地培育”,是指适时地从各方面妥善培育,即令其浸润母鸡气息之意。显示巴利原文
Tattha seyyathāti opammatthe nipāto; pīti sambhāvanatthe; ubhayenāpi yathā nāma brāhmaṇāti dasseti. Kukkuṭiyā aṇḍāni aṭṭha vā dasa vā dvādasa vāti ettha pana kiñcāpi kukkuṭiyā vuttappakārato ūnādhikānipi aṇḍāni honti, atha kho vacanasiliṭṭhatāya evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Evañhi loke siliṭṭhavacanaṃ hoti. Tānassūti tāni assu, bhaveyyunti vuttaṃ hoti. Kukkuṭiyā sammā adhisayitānīti tāya janettiyā kukkuṭiyā pakkhe pasāretvā tesaṃ upari sayantiyā sammā adhisayitāni. Sammā pariseditānīti kālena kālaṃ utuṃ gaṇhāpentiyā suṭṭhu samantato seditāni, usmīkatānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sammā paribhāvitānīti kālena kālaṃ suṭṭhu samantato bhāvitāni, kukkuṭagandhaṃ gāhāpitānīti vuttaṃ hoti.
如今,因为这些蛋被那只母鸡以此三种方式如此护育着,所以不会腐坏。它们之中若有些许湿滑的润泽,也会逐渐消散。蛋壳变薄,脚爪尖与嘴喙也变得坚硬,雏鸡趋于成熟。由于蛋壳变薄,外部的光明便能在内部显现。于是,那些雏鸡便心想:“我们确实长久以来缩着手脚,住在这般狭窄之处。如今外面可见光明,我们将能有安乐的住处。”它们便欲出壳,用脚击破蛋壳,伸展颈项。于是,蛋壳裂为两半,雏鸡们振翅而出,发出与当时相应的叫声。在如此出壳的雏鸡中,最先出壳者,便被称作‘年长者’。因此,世尊想要以此譬喻来确立自己最尊长的身份,便问婆罗门:“那些雏鸡中……应如何称呼他呢?”其中,“雏鸡”即指小鸡。“应如何称呼他呢”,即应当如何称呼他,该称其为年长者还是年幼者。其余的文义浅显易懂。显示巴利原文
Idāni yasmā tāya kukkuṭiyā evaṃ tīhi pakārehi tāni aṇḍāni paripāliyamānāni na pūtīni honti. Yopi nesaṃ allasineho so pariyādānaṃ gacchati. Kapālaṃ tanukaṃ hoti, pādanakhasikhā ca mukhatuṇḍakañca kharaṃ hoti, kukkuṭapotakā paripākaṃ gacchanti, kapālassa tanukattā bahiddhā āloko anto paññāyati. Atha te kukkuṭapotakā ‘‘ciraṃ vata mayaṃ saṅkuṭitahatthapādā sambādhe sayimha, ayañca bahi āloko dissati, ettha dāni no sukhavihāro bhavissatī’’ti nikkhamitukāmā hutvā kapālaṃ pādena paharanti, gīvaṃ pasārenti. Tato taṃ kapālaṃ dvedhā bhijjati, kukkuṭapotakā pakkhe vidhunantā taṅkhaṇānurūpaṃ viravantā nikkhamanti. Evaṃ nikkhamantānañca nesaṃ yo paṭhamataraṃ nikkhamati so ‘jeṭṭho’ti vuccati. Tasmā bhagavā tāya upamāya attano jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ sādhetukāmo brāhmaṇaṃ pucchi – ‘‘yo nu kho tesaṃ kukkuṭacchāpakānaṃ…pe… kinti svassa vacanīyo’’ti. Tattha kukkuṭacchāpakānanti kukkuṭapotakānaṃ. Kinti svassa vacanīyoti so kinti vacanīyo assa, kinti vattabbo bhaveyya jeṭṭho vā kaniṭṭho vāti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
于是,婆罗门回答:“乔达摩尊者,应称那位为年长者。”乔达摩尊者,应称那位为年长者。若问为何?因为他是他们之中最年长的,因此他是他们中更为年长的,这便是其含义。接着,世尊为了阐明这个譬喻,说道:“婆罗门,我正是如此……”等等。正如那只小鸡被算作最年长者;同样地,我在被无明所覆盖的众生中也是如此。在“被无明所覆盖”这一句中,“无明”即指无知;“众生”则指已进入其中的有情,这是“有情”的同义词。因此,此处应理解为“在无明的蛋壳内所容纳的众生当中”。“卵生”是指在蛋中生成、出生、产生。正如有些在蛋中产生的有情被称为“卵生”;同样地,这一切众生由于在无明的蛋壳中产生,故被称为“卵生”。“被包裹”是指被那无明的蛋壳从各方面覆盖、束缚、缠绕。“破无明蛋壳”,是指打破那由无明所构成的蛋壳。“于世独一”,是指在一切世间的聚集之处,唯我一人,无有第二。“已证无上正等觉”,其中“无上”是指没有更上的、最殊胜的。“正等觉”是指正确地、由自己觉悟;或者指殊胜而美妙的觉悟。“觉”可以指树、道、一切知智或涅槃。例如,在“他来到菩提树下,成就正觉”以及“在伽耶与菩提之间”等文句中,“觉”是指树。在“觉即是指四道中的智慧”这处文句中,“觉”是指道智。显示巴利原文
Tato brāhmaṇo āha – ‘‘jeṭṭhotissa bho gotama vacanīyo’’ti. Bho, gotama, so jeṭṭho iti assa vacanīyo. Kasmāti ce? So hi nesaṃ jeṭṭho, tasmā so nesaṃ vuḍḍhataroti attho. Athassa bhagavā opammaṃ sampaṭipādento āha – ‘‘evameva kho ahaṃ brāhmaṇā’’tiādi. Yathā so kukkuṭacchāpako jeṭṭhoti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati; evaṃ ahampi avijjāgatāya pajāya. Avijjāgatāyāti avijjā vuccati aññāṇaṃ, tattha gatāya. Pajāyāti sattādhivacanametaṃ. Tasmā ettha avijjaṇḍakosassa anto paviṭṭhesu sattesūti evaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo. Aṇḍabhūtāyāti aṇḍe bhūtāya jātāya sañjātāya. Yathā hi aṇḍe nibbattā ekacce sattā aṇḍabhūtāti vuccanti; evamayaṃ sabbāpi pajā avijjaṇḍakose nibbattattā aṇḍabhūtāti vuccati. Pariyonaddhāyāti tena avijjaṇḍakosena samantato onaddhāya baddhāya veṭhitāya . Avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvāti taṃ avijjāmayaṃ aṇḍakosaṃ bhinditvā . Ekova loketi sakalepi lokasannivāse ahameva eko adutiyo. Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti anuttaranti uttaravirahitaṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ. Sammāsambodhinti sammā sāmañca bodhiṃ; atha vā pasatthaṃ sundarañca bodhiṃ; bodhīti rukkhopi maggopi sabbaññutaññāṇampi nibbānampi vuccati. ‘‘Bodhirukkhamūle paṭhamābhisambuddho’’ti (mahāva. 1; udā. 1) ca ‘‘antarā ca gayaṃ antarā ca bodhi’’nti (mahāva. 11; ma. ni. 1.285) ca āgataṭṭhānesu hi rukkho bodhīti vuccati. ‘‘Bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 121) āgataṭṭhāne maggo. ‘‘Pappoti bodhiṃ varabhūrimedhaso’’ti (dī. ni. 3.217) āgataṭṭhāne sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. ‘‘Patvāna bodhiṃ amataṃ asaṅkhata’’nti āgataṭṭhāne nibbānaṃ. Idha pana bhagavato arahattamaggañāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Sabbaññutaññāṇantipi vadanti. Aññesaṃ arahattamaggo anuttarā bodhi hoti, na hotīti? Na hoti. Kasmā? Asabbaguṇadāyakattā. Tesañhi kassaci arahattamaggo arahattaphalameva deti, kassaci tisso vijjā, kassaci cha abhiññā, kassaci catasso paṭisambhidā, kassaci sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ. Paccekabuddhānampi paccekabodhiñāṇameva deti. Buddhānaṃ pana sabbaguṇasampattiṃ deti, abhiseko viya rañño sabbalokissariyabhāvaṃ. Tasmā aññassa kassacipi anuttarā bodhi na hotīti. Abhisambuddhoti abbhaññāsiṃ paṭivijjhiṃ; pattomhi adhigatomhīti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,世尊以“婆罗门,我正是如此”等方式所说的譬喻阐明,应结合其义理来理解。正如那只母鸡对自己蛋的卧孵等三种行为的造作;同样,坐在菩提座上的菩萨世尊,于自心相续中修习无常、苦、无我三种随观。如同母鸡完成三种行为而使蛋不腐坏,菩萨世尊完成三种随观而使观智不退失。如同母鸡通过三种行为的造作而使蛋的润湿消耗殆尽,菩萨世尊通过完成三种随观而使贯穿三有的爱欲润湿消耗殆尽。如同母鸡通过三种行为的造作而使蛋壳变薄,菩萨世尊通过完成三种随观而使无明蛋壳变薄。如同母鸡通过三种行为的造作而使小鸡的脚爪尖和嘴喙变得坚硬锐利,菩萨世尊通过完成三种随观而使观智变得锐利、明净、有力。如同母鸡通过三种行为的造作而达到小鸡的成熟之时,菩萨世尊通过完成三种随观,应知是观智的成熟之时、增长之时、入胎之时。显示巴利原文
Idāni yadetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘evameva kho ahaṃ brāhmaṇā’’ti ādinā nayena vuttaṃ opammasampaṭipādanaṃ, taṃ evamatthena saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā veditabbaṃ. Yathā hi tassā kukkuṭiyā attano aṇḍesu adhisayanāditividhakiriyākaraṇaṃ; evaṃ bodhipallaṅke nisinnassa bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato attano cittasantāne aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti tividhānupassanākaraṇaṃ. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyāsampādanena aṇḍānaṃ apūtibhāvo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇassa aparihāni. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena aṇḍānaṃ allasinehapariyādānaṃ viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena bhavattayānugatanikantisinehapariyādānaṃ. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena aṇḍakapālānaṃ tanubhāvo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena avijjaṇḍakosassa tanubhāvo. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena kukkuṭacchāpakassa pādanakhasikhātuṇḍakānaṃ thaddhakharabhāvo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇassa tikkhakharavippasannasūrabhāvo. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena kukkuṭacchāpakassa paripākakālo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇassa paripākakālo vaḍḍhitakālo gabbhaggahaṇakālo veditabbo.
由此,如同母鸡通过三种行为的造作,小鸡以脚爪尖或嘴喙破开蛋壳、振拍翅膀而平安出壳之时;菩萨世尊通过完成三种随观,令观智入胎,以次第证得的阿罗汉道破开无明蛋壳、振拍神通之翼而平安现证一切佛功德之时,应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Tato kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena kukkuṭacchāpakassa pādanakhasikhāya vā mukhatuṇḍakena vā aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā pakkhe papphoṭetvā sotthinā abhinibbhidākālo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇaṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā anupubbādhigatena arahattamaggena avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā abhiññāpakkhe papphoṭetvā sotthinā sakalabuddhaguṇasacchikatakālo veditabboti.
“婆罗门,我即是世间的最年长者、最胜者”:婆罗门,正如那些小鸡中,最先破开蛋壳而出的小鸡是最年长者;同样,我于无明所摄的众生中,破开那无明蛋壳,最先以圣生而生,故被视作最年长、更年长者。然而,由于具足一切功德而无与伦比,故为最胜者。显示巴利原文
Svāhaṃ brāhmaṇa jeṭṭho seṭṭho lokassāti so ahaṃ brāhmaṇa yathā tesaṃ kukkuṭapotakānaṃ paṭhamataraṃ aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā abhinibbhido kukkuṭapotako jeṭṭho hoti; evaṃ avijjāgatāya pajāya taṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā paṭhamataraṃ ariyāya jātiyā jātattā jeṭṭho vuḍḍhataroti saṅkhyaṃ gato. Sabbaguṇehi pana appaṭisamattā seṭṭhoti.
如此,世尊向婆罗门阐明了自身无上的最胜地位之后,为了从前行部分开始,开示他证得此位所依的修行道,而宣说“婆罗门,我的精进确实已被激发……”等语。又或,婆罗门听闻世尊无上的最胜地位后,心中生起此念:“他究竟是依何种修行道证得此位的呢?”世尊了知其心念,为了说明“我正是依此修行道证得此无上最胜位的”,而作此说。其中,“婆罗门,我的精进确实已被激发”的意思是:婆罗门,这无上的最胜地位并非由懈怠、失念、身体躁动、心散乱的我所证得;相反,为了证得它,我的精进确实已被激发。坐在菩提树下的我,策发了具备四支的精进,意即已被策励、持续无松懈地生起。并且正因已被激发,我的精进是不退缩的。不仅精进如此,我的念也已现前,善住于所缘。正因已现前,所以是不忘失的。身体轻安而不躁动:由于身心轻安的力量,我的身体也是轻安的。其中,因为当名身轻安时,色身也必然轻安,所以不分别名身与色身,而总说为“身体轻安”。“不躁动”:而且正因轻安,它才是不躁动的,意思是远离了不安。心已得定、专一:我的心也显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā attano anuttaraṃ jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvaṃ brāhmaṇassa pakāsetvā idāni yāya paṭipadāya taṃ adhigato taṃ paṭipadaṃ pubbabhāgato pabhuti dassetuṃ ‘‘āraddhaṃ kho pana me brāhmaṇā’’tiādimāha. Imaṃ vā bhagavato anuttaraṃ jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvaṃ sutvā brāhmaṇassa cittamevamuppannaṃ – ‘‘kāya nu kho paṭipadāya imaṃ patto’’ti. Tassa cittamaññāya ‘‘imāyāhaṃ paṭipadāya imaṃ anuttaraṃ jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvaṃ patto’’ti dassento evamāha. Tattha āraddhaṃ kho pana me brāhmaṇa vīriyaṃ ahosīti brāhmaṇa, na mayā ayaṃ anuttaro jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvo kusītena muṭṭhassatinā sāraddhakāyena vikkhittacittena adhigato, apica kho tadadhigamāya āraddhaṃ kho pana me vīriyaṃ ahosi, bodhimaṇḍe nisinnena mayā caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ vīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ ahosi, paggahitaṃ asithilappavattitanti vuttaṃ hoti. Āraddhattāyeva ca me taṃ asallīnaṃ ahosi. Na kevalañca vīriyameva, satipi me ārammaṇābhimukhībhāvena upaṭṭhitā ahosi. Upaṭṭhitattāyeva ca asammuṭṭhā. Passaddho kāyo asāraddhoti kāyacittapassaddhivasena kāyopi me passaddho ahosi . Tattha yasmā nāmakāye passaddhe rūpakāyopi passaddhoyeva hoti, tasmā nāmakāyo rūpakāyoti avisesetvāva passaddho kāyoti vuttaṃ. Asāraddhoti so ca kho passaddhattāyeva asāraddho, vigatadarathoti vuttaṃ hoti. Samāhitaṃ cittaṃ ekagganti cittampi me sammā āhitaṃ suṭṭhu ṭhapitaṃ appitaṃ viya ahosi; samāhitattā eva ca ekaggaṃ acalaṃ nipphandananti. Ettāvatā jhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadā kathitā hoti.
初禅之论显示巴利原文
Paṭhamajjhānakathā
接下来,为了显示依此修行道所证得的、以初禅为始、以三明为终的殊胜成就,世尊宣说“那个我……”等语。其中,“已离诸欲,已离不善法”等的含义,虽然在《分别论》中已依“其中,什么是欲?欲求是欲,贪是欲,欲贪是欲;思惟是欲,贪是欲,思惟贪是欲——这些称为欲。其中,什么是不善法?欲贪……乃至……疑——这些称为不善法。如此,从这些欲和这些不善法已离、已别离,因此说‘已离诸欲,已离不善法’”等方式作了解释,但若不依注释书的方法,则不易完全明了,因此我们将依注释书的方法来阐明它。显示巴利原文
Idāni imāya paṭipadāya adhigataṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ ādiṃ katvā vijjattayapariyosānaṃ visesaṃ dassento ‘‘so kho aha’’nti ādimāha. Tattha vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehītiādīnaṃ kiñcāpi ‘‘tattha katame kāmā? Chando kāmo, rāgo kāmo, chandarāgo kāmo; saṅkappo kāmo, rāgo kāmo, saṅkapparāgo kāmo – ime vuccanti kāmā. Tattha katame akusalā dhammā? Kāmacchando…pe… vicikicchā – ime vuccanti akusalā dhammā. Iti imehi ca kāmehi imehi ca akusalehi dhammehi vivitto hoti pavivitto, tena vuccati – ‘vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’’tiādinā (vibha. 564) nayena vibhaṅgeyeva attho vutto. Tathāpi aṭṭhakathānayaṃ vinā na suṭṭhu pākaṭoti aṭṭhakathānayeneva naṃ pakāsayissāma.
即如下所说:“已离诸欲”的意思是:从欲中分离出来、脱离、远离。而这里所用的“eva”(确实、就)一字,应知是表示决定。因它是决定义,故于入住初禅之时,即使那些欲并不存在,它也阐明那些欲是此初禅的敌对,以及此初禅的证得正是由于舍离了诸欲。如何阐明呢?因为当以“确实已离诸欲”作出决定时,便可了知:此禅那的欲必定是其敌对,当那些欲存在时,此禅那便不能生起,犹如黑暗存在时灯光不能显现;而此禅那的证得正是由于舍离了那些欲,犹如舍离此岸方能到达彼岸。因此,它作出了决定。显示巴利原文
Seyyathidaṃ – vivicceva kāmehīti kāmehi viviccitvā vinā hutvā apasakketvā. Yo panāyamettha evakāro, so niyamatthoti veditabbo. Yasmā ca niyamattho, tasmā tasmiṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharaṇasamaye avijjamānānampi kāmānaṃ tassa paṭhamajjhānassa paṭipakkhabhāvaṃ kāmapariccāgeneva cassa adhigamaṃ dīpeti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Vivicceva kāmehī’’ti evañhi niyame kariyamāne idaṃ paññāyati. Nūnimassa jhānassa kāmā paṭipakkhabhūtā, yesu sati idaṃ na pavattati, andhakāre sati padīpo viya, tesaṃ pariccāgeneva cassa adhigamo hoti, orimatīrapariccāgena pārimatīrasseva, tasmā niyamaṃ karotīti.
于此,可能有人会问:为何这个‘eva’字唯说于前句,而不说于后句?难道不离不善法也能成就禅那而住吗?然而不应如此看待。因为这是就出离而言,故唯在前句中宣说。此禅那超越欲界,是欲贪的正对治,故正是诸欲的出离。正如所说:‘此是诸欲的出离,即是出离欲。’(《如是语》)然而在后句中,也应如‘诸比丘,此处即有第一沙门,此处即有第二沙门’(《中部》)那样,将‘eva’字带过来说。因为不可能不离其他称为盖的不善法而成就禅那而住。因此应知,两句中皆有此‘eva’字,即‘确实已离诸欲,确实已离不善法’。在两句中,‘离’这一共同说法虽总摄了彼分离、身离等一切远离,但此处应知唯取三种:身远离、心远离、镇伏远离。而‘诸欲’一词,应知既包含依‘何等为事欲?可爱可意之色……’等方式所释的事欲,也包含同处及《分别论》中依‘欲求为欲……’等方式所释的烦恼欲,总括这些一切。如此,‘确实已离诸欲’之义便可理解为‘于诸事欲亦已远离’,由此宣说显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā – ‘‘kasmā panesa pubbapadeyeva vutto na uttarapade, kiṃ akusalehi dhammehi aviviccāpi jhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyyā’’ti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tannissaraṇato hi pubbapadeeva esa vutto. Kāmadhātusamatikkamanato hi kāmarāgapaṭipakkhato ca idaṃ jhānaṃ kāmānameva nissaraṇaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, yadidaṃ nekkhamma’’nti (itivu. 72). Uttarapadepi pana yathā ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, paṭhamo samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139) ettha evakāro ānetvā vuccati, evaṃ vattabbo. Na hi sakkā ito aññehipi nīvaraṇasaṅkhātehi akusalehi dhammehi avivicca jhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ . Tasmā ‘‘vivicceva kāmehi vivicceva akusalehi dhammehī’’ti evaṃ padadvayepi esa daṭṭhabbo. Padadvayepi ca kiñcāpi ‘‘viviccā’’ti iminā sādhāraṇavacanena tadaṅgavivekādayo kāyavivekādayo ca sabbepi vivekā saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Tathāpi kāyaviveko, cittaviveko, vikkhambhanavivekoti tayo eva idha daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Kāmehī’’ti iminā pana padena ye ca niddese ‘‘katame vatthukāmā manāpiyā rūpā’’tiādinā (mahāni. 1; vibha. 964) nayena vatthukāmā vuttā, ye ca tattheva vibhaṅge ca ‘‘chando kāmo’’tiādinā (mahāni. 1) nayena kilesakāmā vuttā, te sabbepi saṅgahitā icceva daṭṭhabbā. Evañhi sati ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’ti vatthukāmehipi viviccevāti attho yujjati. Tena kāyaviveko vutto hoti.
‘已离不善法’之义,可理解为:从烦恼欲,或从一切不善法中远离。由此宣说了心远离。在此应知:由第一句说远离事欲,即阐明舍离欲乐;由第二句说远离烦恼欲,即阐明执取出离之乐。如是,仅由说远离事欲与烦恼欲,便已阐明:以初句舍离杂染之所依,以第二句断除杂染;以初句舍离贪欲之因,以第二句舍离愚痴之因;以初句阐明加行清净,以第二句阐明意乐长养。此即就事欲一面,对‘诸欲’一词所作的解释。显示巴利原文
Vivicca akusalehi dhammehīti kilesakāmehi sabbākusalehi dhammehi vā viviccāti attho yujjati. Tena cittaviveko vutto hoti. Purimena cettha vatthukāmehi vivekavacanatoyeva kāmasukhapariccāgo, dutiyena kilesakāmehi vivekavacanato nekkhammasukhapariggaho vibhāvito hoti. Evaṃ vatthukāmakilesakāmavivekavacanatoyeva ca etesaṃ paṭhamena saṃkilesavatthuppahānaṃ, dutiyena saṃkilesappahānaṃ; paṭhamena lolabhāvassa hetupariccāgo, dutiyena bālabhāvassa; paṭhamena ca payogasuddhi, dutiyena āsayaposanaṃ vibhāvitaṃ hotīti viññātabbaṃ. Esa tāva nayo ‘‘kāmehī’’ti ettha vuttakāmesu vatthukāmapakkhe.
就烦恼欲一面而言,所谓‘欲’,即指欲贪本身,它随‘欲’、‘贪’等多种品类而被施设。彼虽亦摄属不善法,然在《分别论》中,以‘其中,何等为欲贪?即欲……’等方式,从与禅那相违的角度被别别阐述。或因彼为烦恼欲,故于前句中宣说;或因彼摄属不善法,故于后句中宣说。又因彼有多类差别,故不说‘从欲’,而说‘从诸欲’。此外,虽然其余诸法亦具不善性,然在《分别论》中,以‘其中,何等为不善法?欲贪……’等方式,为示其与上禅支相违、相对反的法故,唯说诸盖。盖为禅支的相违者,而禅支正是他们的对治者、破坏者。正如《藏释》所说:‘定是欲贪的对治,喜是嗔恚的对治,寻是昏沉睡眠的对治,乐是掉悔的对治,伺是疑的对治。’显示巴利原文
Kilesakāmapakkhe pana chandoti ca rāgoti ca evamādīhi anekabhedo kāmacchandoyeva kāmoti adhippeto. So ca akusalapariyāpannopi samāno, ‘‘tattha katamo kāmachando kāmo’’tiādinā nayena vibhaṅge jhānapaṭipakkhato visuṃ vutto. Kilesakāmattā vā purimapade vutto, akusalapariyāpannattā dutiyapade. Anekabhedato cassa kāmatoti avatvā kāmehīti vuttaṃ. Aññesampi ca dhammānaṃ akusalabhāve vijjamāne ‘‘tattha katame akusalā dhammā kāmacchando’’tiādinā nayena vibhaṅge (vibha. 564) uparijhānaṅgapaccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanato nīvaraṇāneva vuttāni. Nīvaraṇāni hi jhānaṅgapaccanīkāni, tesaṃ jhānaṅgāneva paṭipakkhāni, viddhaṃsakānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi ‘‘samādhi kāmacchandassa paṭipakkho, pīti byāpādassa, vitakko thinamiddhassa, sukhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccassa, vicāro vicikicchāyā’’ti peṭake vuttaṃ.
在此,“已离诸欲”一句,说明了欲贪的镇伏离;“已离不善法”一句,则说明了五种盖的镇伏离。若以未取与已取的方式来分别,前句是欲贪的镇伏离,后句是其余诸盖的镇伏离。同样地,前句说明了以五种欲功德为境域的贪之镇伏离,后句说明了以十种嗔恚事等为境域的嗔与痴之镇伏离。又或者,在瀑流等法之中,前句说明了欲瀑流、欲轭、欲漏、欲取、悭贪身系、欲贪结的镇伏离;后句则说明了其余瀑流、轭、漏、取、系、结的镇伏离。再者,前句亦说明了渴爱及与其相应之法的镇伏离,后句则说明了无明及与其相应之法的镇伏离。此外,应知前句说明了八种与贪相应心的镇伏离,后句说明了其余四种不善心的镇伏离。这便是对“已离诸欲,已离不善法”这句意义的阐明。显示巴利原文
Evamettha ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’ti iminā kāmacchandassa vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hoti. ‘‘Vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’ti iminā pañcannampi nīvaraṇānaṃ. Aggahitaggahaṇena pana paṭhamena kāmacchandassa, dutiyena sesanīvaraṇānaṃ. Tathā paṭhamena tīsu akusalamūlesu pañcakāmaguṇabhedavisayassa lobhassa, dutiyena āghātavatthubhedādivisayānaṃ dosamohānaṃ. Oghādīsu vā dhammesu paṭhamena kāmogha-kāmayoga-kāmāsava-kāmupādāna-abhijjhākāyagantha-kāmarāga-saṃyojanānaṃ, dutiyena avasesaogha-yogāsava-upādāna-gantha-saṃyojanānaṃ. Paṭhamena ca taṇhāya taṃsampayuttakānañca, dutiyena avijjāya taṃsampayuttakānañca. Apica paṭhamena lobhasampayuttaaṭṭhacittuppādānaṃ, dutiyena sesānaṃ catunnaṃ akusalacittuppādānaṃ vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hotīti veditabbo. Ayaṃ tāva ‘‘vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’ti ettha atthappakāsanā.
至此,显示了初禅的断除支之后,现在为了显示相应支,便说“有寻、有伺”等语。其中,思量的作用为“寻”,意即“思忖”。此寻的特相是令心投向所缘,作用为撞击、遍撞击。正如所说:“由此,瑜伽行者令所缘被寻所撞击、被寻所遍撞击。”其现起为将心引向所缘。审察的作用为“伺”,意即“随行”。此伺的特相是遍摩所缘,作用为令俱生法随行于所缘,现起为令心持续系念。虽然二者在某些处所不相分离,但有粗细之别:寻如同撞钟的初声,是心的最初投向,其义粗重;伺如同余音的回响,是心的持续系念,其义微细。在此,寻是心的扩散、动荡状态,如同欲飞上天空的鸟振翅,或如心随香气的蜜蜂朝向莲花;伺是心的寂静运行、不过度动荡的状态,如同已飞上天空的鸟展翅盘旋,或如已朝向莲花落下的蜜蜂在莲花上方回旋。然而,它们的这种差别在初禅和第二禅中才变得明显。如此,此禅与此寻、此伺一同生起,犹如树与花果一同,故被称为“有寻有伺”。在《分别论》中,则以“以此寻及此伺而具备、等具备……”来表述。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca paṭhamassa jhānassa pahānaṅgaṃ dassetvā idāni sampayogaṅgaṃ dassento savitakkaṃ savicārantiādimāha. Tattha vitakkanaṃ vitakko, ūhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Svāyaṃ ārammaṇe cittassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇo, āhananapariyāhananaraso. Tathā hi ‘‘tena yogāvacaro ārammaṇaṃ vitakkāhataṃ vitakkapariyāhataṃ karotī’’ti vuccati. Ārammaṇe cittassa ānayanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Vicaraṇaṃ vicāro, anusañcaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Svāyaṃ ārammaṇānumajjanalakkhaṇo, tattha sahajātānuyojanaraso, cittassa anuppabandhanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge oḷārikaṭṭhena ghaṇṭābhighātasaddo viya cetaso paṭhamābhinipāto vitakko, sukhumaṭṭhena anuravo viya anuppabandho vicāro. Vipphāravā cettha vitakko paripphandanabhāvo cittassa, ākāse uppatitukāmassa pakkhino pakkhavikkhepo viya padumābhimukhapāto viya ca gandhānubandhacetaso bhamarassa. Santavutti vicāro nātiparipphandanabhāvo cittassa, ākāse uppatitassa pakkhino pakkhappasāraṇaṃ viya paribbhamanaṃ viya ca padumābhimukhapatitassa bhamarassa padumassa uparibhāge. So pana nesaṃ viseso paṭhama-dutiyajjhānesu pākaṭo hoti. Iti iminā ca vitakkena iminā ca vicārena saha vattati rukkho viya pupphena ca phalena cāti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti vuccati. Vibhaṅge pana ‘‘iminā ca vitakkena iminā ca vicārena upeto hoti samupeto’’tiādinā (vibha. 565) nayena puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā katā. Attho pana tatrāpi evameva daṭṭhabbo.
“离生”在此,“离”即远离,意为诸盖的离去。或者,“离”指已远离的状态,即已离诸盖的禅那相应法聚。因此,从离而生,或于彼离中生起,故为“离生”。“喜乐”在此,“喜”是令喜悦,其特相是喜爱,作用为令身心满足,或为遍满,现起为雀跃。“乐”是安乐,或善能吞噬、挖掘身心的病患,故称为乐,其特相是适意,作用为令相应法增益,现起为资助。虽然二者在某些处所不相分离,但获得可意所缘时的欢喜为喜,体验已得之味为乐。有喜之处必有乐,有乐之处则不一定有喜。喜摄于行蕴,乐摄于受蕴。喜如疲惫的旅人见到或听到林中有水,乐如进入林荫、享用其水。应知这是就彼时明显的情况而说的。此禅具有此喜与此乐,或者说此喜与此乐存于此禅之中,故此禅被称为“喜乐”。显示巴利原文
Vivekajanti ettha vivitti viveko, nīvaraṇavigamoti attho. Vivittoti vā viveko, nīvaraṇavivitto jhānasampayuttadhammarāsīti attho. Tasmā vivekā, tasmiṃ vā viveke jātanti vivekajaṃ. Pītisukhanti ettha pinayatīti pīti, sā sampiyāyanalakkhaṇā kāyacittapīnanarasā , pharaṇarasā vā, odagyapaccupaṭṭhānā. Sukhanaṃ sukhaṃ, suṭṭhu vā khādati khanati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ, taṃ sātalakkhaṇaṃ, sampayuttakānaṃ upabrūhanarasaṃ, anuggahapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Satipi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge iṭṭhārammaṇapaṭilābhatuṭṭhi pīti, paṭiladdharasānubhavanaṃ sukhaṃ. Yattha pīti tattha sukhaṃ, yattha sukhaṃ tattha na niyamato pīti. Saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitā pīti, vedanākkhandhasaṅgahitaṃ sukhaṃ. Kantārakhinnassa vanantodakadassanasavanesu viya pīti, vanacchāyappavesanaudakaparibhogesu viya sukhaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye pākaṭabhāvato cetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ayañca pīti, idañca sukhaṃ, assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘pītisukha’’nti vuccati.
或者,“喜”与“乐”合称“喜乐”,就如“法”与“律”等复合词那样。此禅那具足由离而生的喜乐,或者说,由离而生的喜乐存在于这禅那之中,因此也可以单用“离生喜乐”一词来称述。正如禅那本身是离生的,此中的喜乐也同样是离生的,且它确实存在于禅那中,所以用“离生喜乐”这一个词来表达,也是恰当的。在《分别论》中,则以“此乐与此喜俱行……”等方式作了说明,但其意趣在这里也应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Atha vā pīti ca sukhañca pītisukhaṃ, dhammavinayādayo viya. Vivekajaṃ pītisukhamassa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti evampi vivekajaṃpītisukhaṃ. Yatheva hi jhānaṃ, evaṃ pītisukhaṃ pettha vivekajameva hoti, tañcassa atthīti tasmā ekapadeneva ‘‘vivekajaṃ pītisukha’’ntipi vattuṃ yujjati. Vibhaṅge pana ‘‘idaṃ sukhaṃ imāya pītiyā sahagata’’ntiādinā (vibha. 567) nayenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Attho pana tatrāpi evameva daṭṭhabbo.
“第一”:依计数次第而为第一;此最先证得,故为第一。能烧尽敌对法,故为禅那;依此,瑜伽行者们修习,故亦为禅那,即烧尽敌对法或思虑所缘之义。或者,它自身审察、注视所缘,故为禅那,由此被称为“审察相”。此禅那有两种:所缘审察与特相审察。其中,所缘审察指连同近行的八等至。何以故?因审察遍等所缘故。特相审察指观、道、果。何以故?因审察特相故。其中,观审察无常等特相;观的审察作用由道来成就,故道称为特相审察。果则审察灭的真实相状,故称为特相审察。然而,在此处,唯取所缘审察为禅那之义。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamanti gaṇanānupubbatā paṭhamaṃ, idaṃ paṭhamaṃ samāpajjatītipi paṭhamaṃ. Paccanīkadhamme jhāpetīti jhānaṃ, iminā yogino jhāyantītipi jhānaṃ, paccanīkadhamme ḍahanti gocaraṃ vā cintentīti attho. Sayaṃ vā taṃ jhāyati upanijjhāyatīti jhānaṃ, teneva upanijjhāyanalakkhaṇanti vuccati. Tadetaṃ ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ , lakkhaṇūpanijjhānanti duvidhaṃ hoti. Tattha ārammaṇūpanijjhānanti saha upacārena aṭṭha samāpattiyo vuccanti. Kasmā? Kasiṇādiārammaṇūpanijjhāyanato. Lakkhaṇūpanijjhānanti vipassanāmaggaphalāni vuccanti. Kasmā? Lakkhaṇūpanijjhāyanato. Ettha hi vipassanā aniccalakkhaṇādīni upanijjhāyati, vipassanāya upanijjhāyanakiccaṃ pana maggena sijjhatīti maggo lakkhaṇūpanijjhānanti vuccati. Phalaṃ pana nirodhassa tathalakkhaṇaṃ upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānanti vuccati. Imasmiṃ panatthe ārammaṇūpanijjhānameva jhānanti adhippetaṃ.
于此有问:“那么,哪一种禅那才堪称可用‘有寻有伺……喜乐’等语词来指称呢?”答:譬如“有财有眷属”等语中,除去财富与眷属之外,并没有另外可称为有的东西;同样,除去寻等诸法之外,也并没有另外可称为有的东西。又如,说“有车有步兵的军队”时,“军队”的名称只是就军中的诸支而言;同样,在此应当了知,“禅那”的名称也只是指五支。哪五支?寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性。因为这些正是以“有寻有伺”等方式被说为支的。如果说“心一境性在这里没有被说到,所以不是一支”,这也不成立。为何不成立?因为它其实已被说了。在《分别论》中,世尊也说:“禅那即是寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性。”所以,正如此处说了“有寻有伺”,虽然没有直接说“有心一境性”,但依据《分别论》的这句话,便应知道心一境性也是禅那支。世尊在此作此略说的用意,在《分别论》中同样作了阐明。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – ‘‘katamaṃ pana taṃ jhānaṃ nāma, yaṃ savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ…pe… pītisukhanti evaṃ apadesaṃ arahatī’’ti? Vuccate – yathā sadhano saparijanotiādīsu ṭhapetvā dhanañca parijanañca añño apadesāraho hoti, evaṃ ṭhapetvā vitakkādidhamme aññaṃ apadesārahaṃ natthi. Yathā pana sarathā sapatti senāti vutte senaṅgesuyeva senāsammuti, evamidha pañcasu aṅgesuyeva jhānasammuti veditabbā. Katamesu pañcasu? Vitakko, vicāro, pīti, sukhaṃ, cittekaggatāti etesu. Etāneva hissa ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’ntiādinā nayena aṅgabhāvena vuttāni. Avuttattā ekaggatā aṅgaṃ na hotīti ce tañca na. Kasmā? Vuttattā eva. Sāpi hi vibhaṅge ‘‘jhānanti vitakko vicāro pīti sukhaṃ cittassekaggatā’’ti evaṃ vuttāyeva. Tasmā yathā savitakkaṃ savicāranti, evaṃ sacittekaggatanti idha avuttepi iminā vibhaṅgavacanena cittekaggatāpi aṅgamevāti veditabbā. Yena hi adhippāyena bhagavatā uddeso kato, so eva tena vibhaṅgepi pakāsitoti.
“具足”:意为进入、达到。或意为使具足、使成就。而在《分别论》中说:“‘具足’是初禅的获得、证得、到达、成就、触证、现证、具足。”对于此义,也应如此了知。“住”:即在菩提树下,以称为坐的威仪安住,成为前述那种禅那的具足者,令自身的仪态、行为、守护、存续、维持、游行、居住皆得成就,这就是它的含义。这在《分别论》中已说:“‘住’即行动、进行、守护、存续、维持、游行、居住,因此称为‘住’。”显示巴利原文
Upasampajjāti upagantvā, pāpuṇitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasampādayitvā vā, nipphādetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vibhaṅge pana ‘‘upasampajjāti paṭhamassa jhānassa lābho paṭilābho patti sampatti phusanā samphusanā sacchikiriyā upasampadā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassāpi evamevattho veditabbo. Vihāsinti bodhimaṇḍe nisajjasaṅkhātena iriyāpathavihārena itivuttappakārajhānasamaṅgī hutvā attabhāvassa iriyaṃ vuttiṃ pālanaṃ yapanaṃ yāpanaṃ cāraṃ vihāraṃ abhinipphādesinti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ vibhaṅge – ‘‘viharatīti iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti carati viharati, tena vuccati viharatī’’ti (vibha. 512).
那么,世尊是通过什么具足此禅那而住的呢?通过修习业处。哪一个业处?入出息念业处。若其他人希望如此,应当做什么?其他人也应修习此业处,或者修习地遍等其中的一种。这些业处的修习方法,应依照《清净道论》所说而了知。若在此详细说明,则律藏因缘会过于繁重,因此我们仅阐明圣典的义理。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana katvā bhagavā imaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja vihāsīti? Kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā. Kataraṃ? Ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ. Aññena tadatthikena kiṃ kātabbanti? Aññenapi etaṃ vā kammaṭṭhānaṃ pathavīkasiṇādīnaṃ vā aññataraṃ bhāvetabbaṃ. Tesaṃ bhāvanānayo visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.55) vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Idha pana vuccamāne atibhāriyaṃ vinayanidānaṃ hoti, tasmā pāḷiyā atthappakāsanamattameva karomāti.
第二禅那之释显示巴利原文
Dutiyajjhānakathā
“寻伺的止息”:指寻与伺两者的止息、超越;即在第二禅那的刹那,它们不出现,这就是它的意思。此处,虽然第二禅那中并非所有初禅之法都存在——初禅中的触等是此法,而此处是彼法——但应知“寻伺的止息”是为了说明:透过超越粗的、粗的支,从初禅证得其余的第二禅等。“内”:此处是指自身内在。在《分别论》中则仅说:“内,即个人的”。由于意指自身内在,因此这里的意思是:生于自己、在自己的相续中生起。显示巴利原文
Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti vitakkassa ca vicārassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vūpasamā samatikkamā; dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe apātubhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kiñcāpi dutiyajjhāne sabbepi paṭhamajjhānadhammā na santi, aññeyeva hi paṭhamajjhāne phassādayo, aññe idha; oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamo hotīti dīpanatthaṃ ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ajjhattanti idha niyakajjhattamadhippetaṃ. Vibhaṅge pana ‘‘ajjhattaṃ paccatta’’nti (vibha. 573) ettakameva vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, tasmā attani jātaṃ attano santāne nibbattanti ayamettha attho.
“净信”:净信即指信。由于与净信相应,禅那也称作净信,犹如由于与蓝色相应而称为蓝布。又因为此禅那具足净信,藉由寻与伺之动摇的止息而使心得净信,故也说为净信。在此义释中,应知“净信”与“心的”如此连结。而在前一义释中,“心的”应与“心一境性”结合。其释义如下:单独生起者为“独一”,即不被寻、伺所乘,以最上、殊胜之义而生起。殊胜者在世间也被称为“一”。或因远离寻、伺而成为单独、无伴,也可作此说。或者,“令生起”指令相应法生起,即令之生起之义。以殊胜义,彼既是“一”又是“生起”,故为“独一生起”,这是定的别名。如此修习、增长此“独一生起”,即是这第二禅那的“心一境性”。而此“独一生起”因为是心的,并非众生的、命者的,故称为“此心的心一境性”。显示巴利原文
Sampasādananti sampasādanaṃ vuccati saddhā. Sampasādanayogato jhānampi sampasādanaṃ, nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viya. Yasmā vā taṃ jhānaṃ sampasādanasamannāgatattā vitakkavicārakkhobhavūpasamanena ceto sampasādayati, tasmāpi sampasādananti vuttaṃ. Imasmiñca atthavikappe sampasādanaṃ cetasoti evaṃ padasambandho veditabbo. Purimasmiṃ pana atthavikappe cetasoti etaṃ ekodibhāvena saddhiṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ atthayojanā – eko udetīti ekodi, vitakkavicārehi anajjhārūḷhattā aggo seṭṭho hutvā udetīti attho. Seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccati. Vitakkavicāravirahato vā eko asahāyo hutvātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Atha vā sampayuttadhamme udāyatīti udi, uṭṭhāpetīti attho. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena eko ca so udi cāti ekodi, samādhissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Iti imaṃ ekodiṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhayatīti idaṃ dutiyajjhānaṃ ekodibhāvaṃ. So panāyaṃ ekodi yasmā cetaso, na sattassa na jīvassa, tasmā etaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvanti vuttaṃ.
难道这信在第一禅中不也存在,且那定也名为“一心”吗?那么为何仅在此处说为“清净”与“心之一境性”呢?答:因为第一禅被寻与伺的扰动所激荡,如同被波浪与涟漪搅乱的水,并非十分清净,因此即使有信,也不说为“清净”。正因为不清净,那里的定也不明显,所以也不说为“心之一境性”。然而在此第二禅中,由于没有了寻与伺的障碍,信获得了空间而变得强有力;又因获得了强信作为助伴,定也变得明显。因此应知,仅在此处如此说。在《分别论》中则说:“清净即信、相信、信赖、净信;心之一境性即心之安住……乃至……正定”。应知,如此所说的义理解释,与此并不相违,反而完全一致与契合。显示巴利原文
Nanu cāyaṃ saddhā paṭhamajjhānepi atthi, ayañca ekodināmako samādhi; atha kasmā idameva sampasādanaṃ ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāvañcā’’ti vuttanti? Vuccate – aduñhi paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkavicārakkhobhena vīcitaraṅgasamākulamiva jalaṃ na suppasannaṃ hoti, tasmā satiyāpi saddhāya sampasādananti na vuttaṃ. Na suppasannattāyeva cettha samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭo, tasmā ekodibhāvantipi na vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana jhāne vitakkavicārapalibodhābhāvena laddhokāsā balavatī saddhā, balavasaddhāsahāyappaṭilābheneva ca samādhipi pākaṭo; tasmā idameva evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Vibhaṅge pana ‘‘sampasādananti yā saddhā saddahanā okappanā abhippasādo, cetaso ekodibhāvanti yā cittassa ṭhiti…pe… sammāsamādhī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttena panetena saddhiṃ ayaṃ atthavaṇṇanā yathā na virujjhati aññadatthu saṃsandati ceva sameti ca evaṃ veditabbā.
“无寻、无伺”:由于通过修习而断除,在此禅中此寻不存在,或此禅无此寻,故为“无寻”。同理可知“无伺”。《分别论》中也说:“如此,此寻与此伺已寂静、已平息、已安息、已消失、已灭去、已消融、已干涸、已枯竭、已终止,因此称为无寻、无伺。”显示巴利原文
Avitakkaṃ avicāranti bhāvanāya pahīnattā etasmiṃ etassa vā vitakko natthīti avitakkaṃ. Imināva nayena avicāraṃ. Vibhaṅgepi (vibha. 576) vuttaṃ ‘‘iti ayañca vitakko ayañca vicāro santā honti samitā vūpasantā atthaṅgatā abbhatthaṅgatā appitā byappitā sositā visositā byantīkatā, tena vuccati avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti.
在此有人问:"'寻伺的止息'这句话,不是已经令此义得以成立了吗?为何还要再说'无寻、无伺'呢?"答曰:是的,此义确实已经成立,但那句话并非旨在阐明此义。我们不是说过吗:"为了阐明通过超越粗重的支分而从初禅进一步证得第二禅等,所以说'寻伺的止息'。"显示巴利原文
Etthāha – nanu ca ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti imināpi ayamattho siddho, atha kasmā puna vuttaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti? Vuccate – evametaṃ siddho vāyamattho, na panetaṃ tadatthadīpakaṃ; nanu avocumha – ‘‘oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamo hotīti dīpanatthaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti evaṃ vutta’’nti.
再者,由寻伺的止息而有此清净,并非因烦恼的浑浊而有;由寻伺的止息而有此心一境性,既不像近行禅那样由舍弃诸盖而得,也不像初禅那样由诸支的显现而得。因此,这句话阐明了清净与心一境性的原因。同样地,由寻伺的止息而有此无寻无伺,不像第三禅和第四禅那样是由于寻伺的缺失,也不像眼识等那样是由于本性上就不存在。因此,这句话也是阐明无寻无伺状态的原因,而非仅仅阐明寻伺的不存在。至于'无寻、无伺'这句话,则仅仅是阐明寻伺的不存在。因此,虽然前面已有表述,后面仍须再说。显示巴利原文
Apica vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ sampasādanaṃ, na kilesakālusiyassa. Vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā ekodibhāvaṃ na upacārajjhānamiva nīvaraṇappahānā, na paṭhamajjhānamiva ca aṅgapātubhāvāti evaṃ sampasādanaekodibhāvānaṃ hetuparidīpakamidaṃ vacanaṃ. Tathā vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ avitakkaavicāraṃ, na tatiyacatutthajjhānāni viya cakkhuviññāṇādīni viya ca abhāvāti evaṃ avitakkaavicārabhāvassa hetuparidīpakañca, na vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakaṃ. Vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakameva pana ‘‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ, tasmā purimaṃ vatvāpi puna vattabbamevāti.
"定所生":意为从初禅之定,或从与之相应之定所生。在此,虽然初禅也是从相应之定所生,但唯有此第二禅,因无有寻伺的扰动,极其稳固且十分清净,才真正配得上"定"之称谓。因此,为了赞叹此禅的功德,才称此禅为"定所生"。"喜、乐":如前文所说。显示巴利原文
Samādhijanti paṭhamajjhānasamādhito sampayuttasamādhito vā jātanti attho. Tattha kiñcāpi paṭhamampi sampayuttasamādhito jātaṃ, atha kho ayameva ‘‘samādhī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati vitakkavicārakkhobhavirahena ativiya acalattā suppasannattā ca. Tasmā imassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ idameva ‘‘samādhija’’nti vuttaṃ. Pītisukhanti idaṃ vuttanayameva.
‘第二’:依计数次第而为第二;又因证入这第二禅,故亦称为第二。‘禅那’:于此应知,如同初禅以寻等为五支,此第二禅以清净等为‘四支’。如所说:‘禅那即清净、喜、乐、心一境性’。这仅是教法上的方便说。若除去清净,依究竟义,此禅实为三支。如所说:‘于彼时,何为三支禅那?喜、乐、心一境性’。其余如前文所说。显示巴利原文
Dutiyanti gaṇanānupubbato dutiyaṃ, idaṃ dutiyaṃ samāpajjatītipi dutiyaṃ. Jhānanti ettha pana yathā paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkādīhi pañcaṅgikaṃ hoti, evamidaṃ sampasādādīhi ‘‘caturaṅgika’’nti veditabbaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘jhānanti sampasādo, pīti, sukhaṃ, cittassekaggatā’’ti (vibha. 580). Pariyāyoyeva ceso. Sampasādanaṃ pana ṭhapetvā nippariyāyena tivaṅgikamevetaṃ hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘katamaṃ tasmiṃ samaye tivaṅgikaṃ jhānaṃ hoti? Pīti, sukhaṃ, cittassekaggatā’’ti (dha. sa. 161). Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
第三禅那之释显示巴利原文
Tatiyajjhānakathā
‘由喜的离染’:这里‘喜’即如前所说。‘离染’,指对彼喜的厌离或超越。二者之间的‘ca’字为连接词,用以连接‘止息’或‘寻伺的止息’。若仅连接‘止息’,则当依此理解其文句:‘由喜的离染,以及更进一步的止息’。此时,‘离染’是厌离的意思,故其义为:‘由对喜的厌离,以及止息’。若连接‘寻伺的止息’,则当依此理解:‘由喜的离染,以及更进一步的寻伺的止息’。此时,‘离染’是超越的意思,故其义为:‘由喜的超越,以及寻伺的止息’。显示巴利原文
Pītiyāca virāgāti ettha vuttatthāyeva pīti. Virāgoti tassā jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā. Ubhinnamantarā ‘‘ca’’ saddo sampiṇḍanattho, so hi vūpasamaṃ vā sampiṇḍeti vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ vā. Tattha yadā vūpasamameva sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā virāgā ca, kiñca bhiyyo vūpasamā cāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāyaṃ virāgo jigucchanattho hoti. Tasmā pītiyā jigucchanā ca vūpasamā cāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo. Yadā pana vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā ca virāgā, kiñca bhiyyo vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāyaṃ virāgo samatikkamanattho hoti. Tasmā pītiyā ca samatikkamā, vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo.
虽然这些寻伺在第二禅中已经止息,但此处是为了指明此禅的道途并加以赞叹而说。因为当说‘寻伺的止息’时,人们便能了知:‘寻伺的止息正是此禅的道途’。正如在第三圣道中,对于尚未断除的身见等,说‘断除五下分结’,那是一种赞叹,能令精进者生起策励;同样地,此处对于已在第二禅中止息的寻伺,说其‘止息’,也是一种赞叹。因此,这一层意义被表述为:‘由喜的超越,以及寻伺的止息’。显示巴利原文
Kāmañcete vitakkavicārā dutiyajjhāneyeva vūpasantā imassa pana jhānassa maggaparidīpanatthaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthañcetaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti hi vutte idaṃ paññāyati – ‘‘nūna vitakkavicāravūpasamo maggo imassa jhānassā’’ti. Yathā ca tatiye ariyamagge appahīnānampi sakkāyadiṭṭhādīnaṃ ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ pahānā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.132) evaṃ pahānaṃ vuccamānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti tadadhigamāya ussukānaṃ ussāhajanakaṃ; evamevaṃ idha avūpasantānampi vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo vuccamāno vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti. Tenāyamattho vutto – ‘‘pītiyā ca samatikkamā, vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā’’ti.
“住于舍者”:此处,“舍”由“观照”义而得名,意为平等而观,即不偏不倚地看待。因具足那清净、广大、坚固的舍,第三禅的成就者被称为“住于舍者”。舍有十种:六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、精进舍、行舍、受舍、观舍、中舍性舍、禅舍、遍净舍。这十种舍应如各处所述,依地、人、心、所缘,以及依《法集论注释·殊胜义论》中蕴摄、同一刹那、善三法摄要之理而了知。此处未作广说,是为避免使律藏的因缘过于繁重。然就特相等而言,此处所指的舍,以中舍为特相,以不关切为作用,以无作为为现起,以离喜为足处。显示巴利原文
Upekkhako ca vihāsinti ettha upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā, samaṃ passati, apakkhapatitāva hutvā passatīti attho. Tāya visadāya vipulāya thāmagatāya samannāgatattā tatiyajjhānasamaṅgī ‘‘upekkhako’’ti vuccati. Upekkhā pana dasavidhā hoti – chaḷaṅgupekkhā, brahmavihārupekkhā, bojjhaṅgupekkhā, vīriyupekkhā, saṅkhārupekkhā, vedanupekkhā, vipassanupekkhā, tatramajjhattupekkhā, jhānupekkhā, pārisuddhupekkhāti. Evamayaṃ dasavidhāpi tattha tattha āgatanayato bhūmipuggalacittārammaṇato, khandhasaṅgaha-ekakkhaṇakusalattikasaṅkhepavasena ca aṭṭhasāliniyā dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāya vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Idha pana vuccamānā vinayanidānaṃ atibhāriyaṃ karotīti na vuttā. Lakkhaṇādito pana idha adhippetupekkhā majjhattalakkhaṇā, anābhogarasā, abyāpārapaccupaṭṭhānā, pītivirāgapadaṭṭhānāti.
于此有人问:“此舍不就是义理上的中舍性舍吗?而它也存在于初禅与第二禅中,既然如此,在那里也应说‘住于舍者’,为何不说呢?” 答:因其作用不明显故。在那里,它的作用确实不明显,被寻等所压倒。但在第三禅中,它不为寻、伺、喜所压制,犹如昂首而出,作用变得显著,故予以说明。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – nanu cāyaṃ atthato tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti, sā ca paṭhamadutiyajjhānesupi atthi, tasmā tatrāpi ‘‘upekkhako ca vihāsi’’nti evamayaṃ vattabbā siyā, sā kasmā na vuttāti? Aparibyattakiccato. Aparibyattañhi tassā tattha kiccaṃ, vitakkādīhi abhibhūtattā. Idha panāyaṃ vitakkavicārapītīhi anabhibhūtattā ukkhittasirā viya hutvā paribyattakiccā jātā, tasmā vuttāti.
“住于舍者”的义释,至此圆满。显示巴利原文
Niṭṭhitā ‘‘upekkhako ca vihāsi’’nti etassa sabbaso atthavaṇṇanā.
现在解说“具念与正知”:此处,“念”指能忆念,“正知”指遍了知。这是从人的角度来说明念与正知。其中,念以忆念为相,以不忘失为味,以守护为现起;正知以无痴为相,以审察为味,以简择为现起。虽然此念与正知在之前的诸禅那中亦已存在——因为若失念、无正知,连近行定尚且不能成就,更何况安止定——然而,由于那些禅那较为粗显,心运作起来犹如人行于平地般容易,念与正知的作用在那里并不明显。但此第三禅因舍离了粗显支而变得微细,心必须如同人行走于刀刃之上般谨细运作,全由念与正知之力所摄持,所以只在这里特别指出。再者,还有什么呢?犹如惯随母牛的牛犊,若被带离母牛而不加守护,又会再跑回母牛身边;同样,此第三禅的乐虽已远离喜,但如果不以念与正知的守护来守护,便可能再度接近喜,转为与喜相应。或者,有情易染着于乐,而此乐极为甜美,因为自此以上更无有乐。然而,在此处,依凭念与正知的力量,于乐中能不生染着,否则便不能。为了彰显这一法义上的殊胜,故应知唯于此说此。显示巴利原文
Idāni sato ca sampajānoti ettha saratīti sato, sampajānātīti sampajāno. Puggalena sati ca sampajaññañca vuttaṃ. Tattha saraṇalakkhaṇā sati, asammussanarasā, ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā; asammohalakkhaṇaṃ sampajaññaṃ, tīraṇarasaṃ, pavicayapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi idaṃ satisampajaññaṃ purimajjhānesupi atthi, muṭṭhassatissa hi asampajānassa upacārajjhānamattampi na sampajjati, pageva appanā; oḷārikattā pana tesaṃ jhānānaṃ bhūmiyaṃ viya purisassa cittassa gati sukhā hoti, abyattaṃ tattha satisampajaññakiccaṃ. Oḷārikaṅgappahānena pana sukhumattā imassa jhānassa purisassa khuradhārāyaṃ viya satisampajaññakiccapariggahitāyeva cittassa gati icchitabbāti idheva vuttaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo? Yathāpi dhenupago vaccho dhenuto apanīto arakkhiyamāno punadeva dhenuṃ upagacchati; evamidaṃ tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ pītito apanītampi satisampajaññārakkhena arakkhiyamānaṃ punadeva pītiṃ upagaccheyya pītisampayuttameva siyā. Sukhe vāpi sattā rajjanti, idañca atimadhuraṃ sukhaṃ, tato paraṃ sukhābhāvā . Satisampajaññānubhāvena panettha sukhe asārajjanā hoti, no aññathāti imampi atthavisesaṃ dassetuṃ idaṃ idheva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
现在解说“以身感受乐”:虽然成就第三禅者并无对乐感受的关切,但因为与名身相应的乐,其等起之极净色遍满色身,由于色身为极净色所遍满,即使出定后亦能感受乐。为显此义,故说“以身感受乐”。显示巴利原文
Idāni sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedesinti ettha kiñcāpi tatiyajjhānasamaṅgino sukhappaṭisaṃvedanābhogo natthi, evaṃ santepi yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, yaṃ vā taṃ nāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhānenassa yasmā atipaṇītena rūpena rūpakāyo phuṭo, yassa phuṭattā jhānā vuṭṭhitopi sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyya, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedesi’’nti āha.
现在解说“诸圣者所称说的住于舍、具念、住于乐者”:因该禅那、以该禅那为因,佛陀等诸圣者称说、宣示、施设、建立、开显、分别、阐明、光显那成就第三禅者,实为赞叹之意。如何称说?即“住于舍、具念、住于乐者”。成就第三禅而住。应知此处如此连结。显示巴利原文
Idāni yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti ettha yaṃjhānahetu yaṃjhānakāraṇā taṃ tatiyajjhānasamaṅgīpuggalaṃ buddhādayo ariyā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti pakāsenti, pasaṃsantīti adhippāyo. Kinti? ‘‘Upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’’ti. Taṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja vihāsinti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
然而,他们为何如此赞叹他呢?因为值得赞叹。的确,此人虽在极甜美、已达乐之究竟的第三禅中,却安住于舍,不为乐染所牵引;又因喜不生起、念已现前而具念。再者,他以名身感受那圣者所喜爱、唯圣者所修习且无杂染的乐,故值得赞叹。因此,应知诸圣者因值得赞叹,而如此开显那成为赞叹之因的功德,赞叹他为“住于舍、具念、住于乐者”。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana taṃ te evaṃ pasaṃsantīti? Pasaṃsārahato. Ayañhi yasmā atimadhurasukhe sukhapāramippattepi tatiyajjhāne upekkhako, na tattha sukhābhisaṅgena ākaḍḍhīyati, yathā ca pīti na uppajjati; evaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitāya satimā. Yasmā ca ariyakantaṃ ariyajanasevitameva ca asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ sukhaṃ nāmakāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, tasmā pasaṃsāraho. Iti pasaṃsārahato naṃ ariyā te evaṃ pasaṃsāhetubhūte guṇe pakāsentā ‘‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsantīti veditabbaṃ.
“第三”:依计数次第为第三。此第三禅亦因被证得而称为第三。“禅”:于此,正如第二禅具足净信等四支,此第三禅则具足舍等五支。如所说:“禅即舍、念、正知、乐、心一境性”(《分别论》591)。而这只是方便说。除去舍、念、正知,依非方便说,此禅唯具二支。如所说:“那时,什么是二支禅?乐与心一境性”(《法集论》163)。其余如前所述。显示巴利原文
Tatiyanti gaṇanānupubbato tatiyaṃ. Idaṃ tatiyaṃ samāpajjatītipi tatiyaṃ. Jhānanti ettha ca yathā dutiyaṃ sampasādādīhi caturaṅgikaṃ; evamidaṃ upekkhādīhi pañcaṅgikaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘jhānanti upekkhā sati sampajaññaṃ sukhaṃ cittassa ekaggatā’’ti (vibha. 591). Pariyāyoyeva ceso. Upekkhāsatisampajaññāni pana ṭhapetvā nippariyāyena duvaṅgikamevetaṃ hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘katamaṃ tasmiṃ samaye duvaṅgikaṃ jhānaṃ hoti ? Sukhaṃ, cittassekaggatā’’ti (dha. sa. 163). Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
第四禅那之释显示巴利原文
Catutthajjhānakathā
“由舍断乐与由舍断苦”:即舍断身乐与身苦。“先前”是指在那之前,而非在第四禅的刹那。“喜与忧的灭没”:即心乐与心苦——这两者的灭没也是说在先前就已舍断。那么,它们在何时被舍断呢?在四禅的近行刹那。因为喜是在第四禅的近行刹那才被舍断的;苦、忧、乐则是在初禅、二禅、三禅的近行刹那被舍断。如此,虽未按舍断的次第说明,但在《根分别》中,诸根是依列举的次第而说,此处亦然,应知乐、苦、喜、忧的舍断是依此理。显示巴利原文
Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānāti kāyikasukhassa ca kāyikadukkhassa ca pahānā. Pubbevāti tañca kho pubbeva, na catutthajjhānakkhaṇe . Somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāti cetasikasukhassa ca cetasikadukkhassa cāti imesampi dvinnaṃ pubbeva atthaṅgamā pahānā icceva vuttaṃ hoti. Kadā pana nesaṃ pahānaṃ hoti? Catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe. Somanassañhi catutthajjhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyati, dukkhadomanassasukhāni paṭhamadutiyatatiyānaṃ upacārakkhaṇesu. Evametesaṃ pahānakkamena avuttānaṃ, indriyavibhaṅge pana indriyānaṃ uddesakkameneva idhāpi vuttānaṃ sukhadukkhasomanassa domanassānaṃ pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
然而,如果这些受只是在各禅的近行刹那才被舍断,那么为什么在经典中又说:“已生的苦根在哪里无余灭尽?比丘们,在此,比丘离诸欲……具足初禅而住,已生的苦根即于此无余灭尽。已生的忧根……乐根……喜根在哪里无余灭尽?比丘们,在此,比丘由舍断乐……具足第四禅而住,已生的喜根即于此无余灭尽”(《相应部》5.510),像这样将灭尽说为就在诸禅之中呢?这是因为在诸禅中有殊胜的灭尽。因为在初禅等中,它们的灭尽是殊胜灭尽,而非仅仅是灭尽;而在近行刹那,则仅仅是灭尽,而非殊胜灭尽。例如,在转向不同的所缘时,即使在初禅近行中已灭尽的苦根,仍可能因蚊虻等触或不平等坐位的压迫而生起,但在安止内则绝不会生起。或者,在近行中被灭尽的它,并未彻底灭尽,因为未被其对立面所破坏。然而在安止内,由于喜的遍满,全身为乐所浸润。对于全身为乐所浸润者,苦根便彻底灭尽,因为它已被对立面所破坏。同样,在转向不同的所缘时,即使在二禅近行中已舍断的忧根,由于它是在有寻有伺为缘、有身疲劳和心恼害时生起,在无寻无伺时便不生起。而它生起之处,即是有寻有伺。显示巴利原文
Yadi panetāni tassa tassa jhānassupacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyanti, atha kasmā ‘‘kattha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, etthuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati. Kattha cuppannaṃ domanassindriyaṃ… sukhindriyaṃ… somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, etthuppannaṃ somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.510) evaṃ jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti? Atisayanirodhattā. Atisayanirodho hi nesaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīsu, na nirodhoyeva; nirodhoyeva pana upacārakkhaṇe, nātisayanirodho. Tathā hi nānāvajjane paṭhamajjhānūpacāre niruddhassāpi dukkhindriyassa ḍaṃsamakasādisamphassena vā visamāsanupatāpena vā siyā uppatti, na tveva antoappanāyaṃ. Upacāre vā niruddhampetaṃ na suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti; paṭipakkhena avihatattā. Antoappanāyaṃ pana pītipharaṇena sabbo kāyo sukhokkanto hoti. Sukhokkantakāyassa ca suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti dukkhindriyaṃ; paṭipakkhena vihatattā. Nānāvajjane eva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassa domanassindriyassa yasmā etaṃ vitakkavicārappaccayepi kāyakilamathe cittupaghāte ca sati uppajjati, vitakkavicārābhāve neva uppajjati. Yattha pana uppajjati tattha vitakkavicārabhāve. Appahīnā eva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre vitakkavicārāti tatthassa siyā uppatti; appahīnapaccayattā. Na tveva dutiyajjhāne; pahīnapaccayattā. Tathā tatiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi sukhindriyassa pītisamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭakāyassa siyā uppatti, na tveva tatiyajjhāne. Tatiyajjhāne hi sukhassa paccayabhūtā pīti sabbaso niruddhāti. Tathā catutthajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi somanassindriyassa āsannattā, appanāppattāya upekkhāya abhāvena sammā anatikkantattā ca siyā uppatti, na tveva catutthajjhāne. Tasmā eva ca ‘‘etthuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti tattha tattha aparisesaggahaṇaṃ katanti.
在此有人问:“既然这些受在各禅的近行中已被舍断,为什么在此又将它们集合在一起?” 这是为了把握“乐”。因为这里所说的“不苦不乐”受,微细而极难了知,不容易把握。因此,正如为捕捉一头无论用什么方法都无法靠近的桀骜不驯的公牛,牧牛人会把所有牛赶进一个牛栏,然后一头一头地往外赶,当按顺序轮到它时,便说“就是这头,抓住它”,从而让人把它抓住;同样,世尊为了把握“乐”,而将所有这些受集合在一起。如此,在展示了这些集合的受之后,就能让人了知:“那既非乐也非苦、既非喜也非忧的,就是不苦不乐受。”显示巴利原文
Etthāha – ‘‘athevaṃ tassa tassa jhānassūpacāre pahīnāpi etā vedanā idha kasmā samāharī’’ti? Sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ. Yā hi ayaṃ ‘‘adukkhamasukha’’nti ettha adukkhamasukhā vedanā vuttā, sā sukhumā atidubbiññeyyā na sakkā sukhena gahetuṃ. Tasmā yathā nāma duṭṭhassa yathā vā tathā vā upasaṅkamitvā gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyassa goṇassa gahaṇatthaṃ gopo ekasmiṃ vaje sabbe gāvo samāharati, athekekaṃ nīharanto paṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ ‘‘ayaṃ so, gaṇhatha na’’nti tampi gāhāpayati; evameva bhagavā sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ sabbā etā samāhari. Evañhi samāhaṭā etā dassetvā ‘‘yaṃ neva sukhaṃ na dukkhaṃ na somanassaṃ na domanassaṃ, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā’’ti sakkā hoti esā gāhayituṃ.
再者,应知这也是为了显示不苦不乐心解脱的缘而说。因为舍断乐等正是它的缘。如经中所说:“贤友,有四种缘能证得不苦不乐心解脱的等至。贤友,于此,比丘由舍断乐……具足第四禅而住。贤友,这便是四种能证得不苦不乐心解脱等至的缘。”(《中部》1.458)或者,如同在其他地方为称赞第三道,而将在那里已被舍断的身见等说为在那里被舍断;同样,在此也是为了称赞此禅而说这些受被舍断。又或者,说这些是为了通过断除其缘,来显示贪与嗔在此极为远离。因为在这些受中,乐是喜的缘,喜是贪的缘;苦是忧的缘,忧是嗔的缘。由于乐等已被断除,有缘的贪与嗔便因此被摧毁,从而变得极为遥远。显示巴利原文
Apica adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā paccayadassanatthañcāpi etā vuttāti veditabbā. Sukhappahānādayo hi tassā paccayā. Yathāha – ‘‘cattāro kho, āvuso, paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu, sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ime kho, āvuso, cattāro paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458). Yathā vā aññattha pahīnāpi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo tatiyamaggassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ tattha pahīnāti vuttā; evaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthampetassa jhānassetā idha vuttātipi veditabbā. Paccayaghātena vā ettha rāgadosānaṃ atidūrabhāvaṃ dassetumpetā vuttāti veditabbā. Etāsu hi sukhaṃ somanassassa paccayo, somanassaṃ rāgassa, dukkhaṃ domanassassa, domanassaṃ dosassa. Sukhādighātena ca te sappaccayā rāgadosā hatāti atidūre hontīti.
“不苦不乐”:因无苦而不苦,因无乐而不乐。此处以此开显与苦乐相违的第三受,而非仅指无苦无乐之状态。所谓第三受,即不苦不乐,亦称为舍。应知此舍以领受非可爱非不可爱之境为相,以中舍为味,以不显为现起,以乐灭为足处。“舍念清净”,指由舍所生的念之清净。在此禅中,念极其清净,而此念之清净全由舍所成就,不由他缘,故称“舍念清净”。《分别》中亦说:“此念依此舍而明净、清净、洁白,是故名为‘舍念清净’。”此处令念清净的舍,从义理上当知即是“中舍性”。不仅念清净,一切相应法亦皆清净;但以念为首而作此说。显示巴利原文
Adukkhamasukhanti dukkhābhāvena adukkhaṃ, sukhābhāvena asukhaṃ. Etenettha dukkhasukhapaṭipakkhabhūtaṃ tatiyavedanaṃ dīpeti, na dukkhasukhābhāvamattaṃ. Tatiyavedanā nāma – adukkhamasukhā, upekkhātipi vuccati. Sā iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇā, majjhattarasā, avibhūtapaccupaṭṭhānā, sukhanirodhapadaṭṭhānāti veditabbā. Upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti upekkhāya janitasatipārisuddhiṃ. Imasmiñhi jhāne suparisuddhā sati. Yā ca tassā satiyā pārisuddhi, sā upekkhāya katā na aññena; tasmā etaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti vuccati. Vibhaṅgepi vuttaṃ – ‘‘ayaṃ sati imāya upekkhāya visadā hoti parisuddhā pariyodātā, tena vuccati – ‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’’nti (vibha. 597). Yāya ca upekkhāya ettha satiyā pārisuddhi hoti, sā atthato tatramajjhattatā veditabbā. Na kevalañcettha tāya satiyeva parisuddhā, apica kho sabbepi sampayuttadhammā; satisīsena pana desanā vuttā.
于此,此舍虽在下三禅中亦存在,但犹如白天的月光,虽存在却因日光压制、自身柔和的性质,或因未得与之相应的夜晚为助缘而不清净、不洁白。同样,此中舍性的月光,在初禅等诸禅中虽亦存在,却因被寻、伺等敌对法之光焰所压制,且未得与之相应的舍受之夜为助缘而不清净。当其不清净时,如同白昼蒙昧的月光光辉,与之俱生的念等诸法亦不清净,故于彼诸禅中,无一得名“舍念清净”。但在此第四禅中,因无寻等敌对法光焰之压制,且获得了与之相应的舍受之夜,此中舍性的月光极为清净;因其清净,如同清净月光的光辉,与之俱生的念等诸法亦清净洁白。是故,当知唯此第四禅被称为“舍念清净”。显示巴利原文
Tattha kiñcāpi ayaṃ upekkhā heṭṭhāpi tīsu jhānesu vijjati, yathā pana divā sūriyappabhābhibhavā sommabhāvena ca attano upakārakattena vā sabhāgāya rattiyā alābhā divā vijjamānāpi candalekhā aparisuddhā hoti apariyodātā; evamayampi tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā vitakkavicārādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā alābhā vijjamānāpi paṭhamādijjhānabhedesu aparisuddhā hoti. Tassā ca aparisuddhāya divā aparisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo aparisuddhāva honti; tasmā tesu ekampi ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti na vuttaṃ. Idha pana vitakkādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavābhāvā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā paṭilābhā ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā ativiya parisuddhā, tassā parisuddhattā parisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo parisuddhā honti pariyodātā, tasmā idameva upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“第四”:依数目的次第为第四。因成就此第四禅,故亦称为第四。“禅”:于此,如同第三禅由舍等五支构成,此第四禅则由舍等三支构成。如所说:“禅即舍、念、心一境性。”这仅是譬喻说。若除去念,唯取舍与一境性,依非譬喻说,则此禅唯具二支。如所说:“于彼时,何等为二支禅?舍与心一境性。”其余如前所述。显示巴利原文
Catutthanti gaṇanānupubbato catutthaṃ. Idaṃ catutthaṃ samāpajjatītipi catutthaṃ. Jhānanti ettha yathā tatiyaṃ upekkhādīhi pañcaṅgikaṃ; evamidaṃ upekkhādīhi tivaṅgikaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘jhānanti upekkhā, sati cittassekaggatā’’ti. Pariyāyo eva ceso. Ṭhapetvā pana satiṃ upekkhekaggatameva gahetvā nippariyāyena duvaṅgikamevetaṃ hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘katamaṃ tasmiṃ samaye duvaṅgikaṃ jhānaṃ hoti? Upekkhā, cittassekaggatā’’ti (dha. sa. 165). Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
宿住随念论显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsakathā
12 如是,这四种禅那,对某些人是为了心一境性,对某些人是为了作为观的基础,对某些人是为了作为神通的基础,对某些人是为了作为灭尽定的基础,对某些人则是为了转生。其中,对漏尽者是为了心一境性。他们证入禅那后,心想:“我们将以专一之心,安乐地度过时日。”如此修习遍相业处后,便生起八种等至。对于有学与凡夫,若他们证得禅那后心想:“从等至出定后,将以入定之心修习观。”则这些禅那成为观的基础。若有人生起八种等至后,进入作为神通基础的禅那,从等至出定后,希求如前所述“一身而成多身”等神通,则这些禅那成为神通的基础。若有人生起八种等至后,心想:“进入灭尽定,七日成为无心者,于现法证得灭尽涅槃而安住于乐。”则这些禅那成为灭尽定的基础。若有人生起八种等至后,心想:“成为不退失禅那者,生于梵天界。”则这些禅那是为了转生。显示巴利原文
12. Iti imāni cattāri jhānāni kesañci cittekaggatatthāni honti, kesañci vipassanāpādakāni, kesañci abhiññāpādakāni, kesañci nirodhapādakāni, kesañci bhavokkamanatthāni. Tattha khīṇāsavānaṃ cittekaggatatthāni honti, te hi samāpajjitvā ‘‘ekaggacittā sukhaṃ divasaṃ viharissāmā’’ti iccevaṃ kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattenti. Sekkhaputhujjanānaṃ ‘‘samāpattito vuṭṭhāya samāhitena cittena vipassissāmā’’ti nibbattentānaṃ vipassanāpādakāni honti. Ye pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā abhiññāpādakaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ekopi hutvā bahudhā hotī’’ti vuttanayā abhiññāyo patthentā nibbattenti, tesaṃ abhiññāpādakāni honti. Ye pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā ‘‘nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā sattāhaṃ acittakā hutvā diṭṭheva dhamme nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ patvā sukhaṃ viharissāmā’’ti nibbattenti, tesaṃ nirodhapādakāni honti. Ye pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā ‘‘aparihīnajjhānā hutvā brahmaloke uppajjissāmā’’ti nibbattenti, tesaṃ bhavokkamanatthāni honti.
然而,应知世尊于菩提树下所证得的这第四禅,对他而言,既是观的基础,也是神通的基础,也是灭尽定的基础,并能成就一切义利,赐予一切世间与出世间的功德。为显示其所赐功德之一部分,世尊说:“彼如是于心入定……”等语。显示巴利原文
Bhagavatā panidaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ bodhirukkhamūle nibbattitaṃ, taṃ tassa vipassanāpādakañceva ahosi abhiññāpādakañca nirodhapādakañca sabbakiccasādhakañca sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakanti veditabbaṃ. Yesañca guṇānaṃ dāyakaṃ ahosi, tesaṃ ekadesaṃ dassento ‘‘so evaṃ samāhite citte’’tiādimāha.
其中,“彼”即“我”。“如是”是显示第四禅的次第。意即依此次第证得第四禅。“入定”指以此第四禅定而入定。“清净”等:因舍念清净而清净;因清净故洁白,即说明亮。“无秽”:因断除乐等诸缘,摧破了贪等污秽,故无秽;因无秽故离随烦恼,因为污秽能染污心。“柔软”:因善修习而柔软,即达到自在。能随意运作之心,即称为柔软。因柔软故“堪任”,即堪能作业、适于作业。柔软之心,如同精炼的黄金,堪能作业;而柔软与堪任两者,皆因善修习所致。如所说:“诸比丘,我不见有其他一法,如此修习、多修习后,能如此柔软且堪任,诸比丘,此即是心。”显示巴利原文
Tattha soti so ahaṃ. Evanti catutthajjhānakkamanidassanametaṃ. Iminā kamena catutthajjhānaṃ paṭilabhitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Samāhiteti iminā catutthajjhānasamādhinā samāhite. Parisuddhetiādīsu pana upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvena parisuddhe. Parisuddhattāyeva pariyodāte, pabhassareti vuttaṃ hoti. Sukhādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ ghātena vihatarāgādiaṅgaṇattā anaṅgaṇe. Anaṅgaṇattāyeva ca vigatūpakkilese; aṅgaṇena hi cittaṃ upakkilissati. Subhāvitattā mudubhūte, vasībhāvappatteti vuttaṃ hoti. Vase vattamānañhi cittaṃ mudūti vuccati. Muduttāyeva ca kammaniye, kammakkhame kammayoggeti vuttaṃ hoti. Mudu hi cittaṃ kammaniyaṃ hoti sudhantamiva suvaṇṇaṃ, tadubhayampi ca subhāvitattā eva. Yathāha – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ bhāvitaṃ bahulīkataṃ mudu ca hoti kammaniyañca, yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, citta’’nti (a. ni. 1.22).
安住于这些清净等状态,故为“住立”;正因为住立,故说达到不动、不动摇、无污染。或者,由于柔软、适业的状态而于自在之处住立,故为“住立”;由于被信等所摄持,故达到不动。因为被信摄持的心不因无信而动摇,被精进摄持的心不因懈怠而动摇,被念摄持的心不因放逸而动摇,被定摄持的心不因掉举而动摇,被慧摄持的心不因无明而动摇,被光明摄持的心不因烦恼黑暗而动摇。被这六法所摄持的心,便成为达到不动。如此具足八支的心,堪能导引,为以证智证得那些应被证得之法。显示巴利原文
Etesu parisuddhabhāvādīsu ṭhitattā ṭhite. Ṭhitattāyeva āneñjappatte, acale niriñjaneti vuttaṃ hoti. Mudukammaññabhāvena vā attano vase ṭhitattā ṭhite, saddhādīhi pariggahitattā āneñjappatte. Saddhāpariggahitañhi cittaṃ assaddhiyena na iñjati, vīriyapariggahitaṃ kosajjena na iñjati, satipariggahitaṃ pamādena na iñjati, samādhipariggahitaṃ uddhaccena na iñjati, paññāpariggahitaṃ avijjāya na iñjati, obhāsagataṃ kilesandhakārena na iñjati. Imehi chahi dhammehi pariggahitaṃ āneñjappattaṃ cittaṃ hoti. Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ cittaṃ abhinīhārakkhamaṃ hoti abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhiññāsacchikiriyāya.
另一种方法:以第四禅定而等持,以远离诸盖而清净,以超越寻等而明净,以无有那些能获得禅那的、属于欲求的恶法而离垢,以贪欲等心之随烦恼的息灭而离随烦恼。此两者(离垢与离随烦恼)应依《离垢经》等(中部1.57等)来理解。以达到自在而柔软,以成就神足而适业,以修习圆满、达到殊胜状态而住立、达到不动。意思是:如同达到不动那样而住立。如此具足八支的心,堪能导引,为以证智证得那些应被证得之法,即是说,它成为基础、成为近因。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – catutthajjhānasamādhinā samāhite. Nīvaraṇadūrībhāvena parisuddhe. Vitakkādisamatikkamena pariyodāte. Jhānappaṭilābhapaccayānaṃ pāpakānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ abhāvena anaṅgaṇe. Abhijjhādīnaṃ cittūpakkilesānaṃ vigamena vigatūpakkilese. Ubhayampi cetaṃ anaṅgaṇavatthasuttānusārena (ma. ni. 1.57 ādayo) veditabbaṃ. Vasippattiyā mudubhūte. Iddhipādabhāvūpagamena kammaniye. Bhāvanāpāripūriyā paṇītabhāvūpagamena ṭhiteāneñjappatte. Yathā āneñjappattaṃ hoti; evaṃ ṭhiteti attho. Evampi aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ cittaṃ abhinīhārakkhamaṃ hoti abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhiññāsacchikiriyāya, pādakaṃ padaṭṭhānabhūtanti attho.
“为了宿住随念智”:当如此证智的基础心生起时,为了那宿住随念中的智。其中,“宿住”指过去、在已过去的生中曾住过的诸蕴。“曾住”指曾经居住、曾经经验,在自己的相续中生起后又灭去的曾住法;或者以行境之住而住;被自己的识所知、所限定;或者也被他人的识所知,如在忆念断灭之途等中。“宿住随念”:以那念而随念宿住,那即是宿住随念。“智”:与那念相应的智。如此,为了这宿住随念智——即为了证得此智——而这样说。“引导”:即引导。显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāyāti evaṃ abhiññāpādake jāte etasmiṃ citte pubbenivāsānussatimhi yaṃ ñāṇaṃ tadatthāya. Tattha pubbenivāsoti pubbe atītajātīsu nivutthakkhandhā. Nivutthāti ajjhāvutthā anubhūtā attano santāne uppajjitvā niruddhā nivutthadhammā vā nivutthā, gocaranivāsena nivutthā, attano viññāṇena viññātā paricchinnā, paraviññāṇaviññātāpi vā chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsu. Pubbenivāsānussatīti yāya satiyā pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati, sā pubbenivāsānussati. Ñāṇanti tāya satiyā sampayuttañāṇaṃ. Evamimassa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇassa atthāya pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya etassa ñāṇassa adhigamāya pattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Abhininnāmesinti abhinīhariṃ.
“我”:即我。“多种”:指多种类,或以种种方式发生、被说明的意思。“宿住”:以紧接过去的那一生为起点,于各处曾居住的相续。“随念”:即“一生、二生……”这样依生起次第追忆、追忆而念,或随顺而念,表明心一被导向便能忆念。已圆满波罗蜜的大士们无需预备行,因此他们一将心导向即能忆念。然而,初学的善男子须先完成预备行才能忆念,所以依于他们而说预备行是应当的。但若解说预备行,则过于繁重,会如同律藏的因缘部分,故我们不述。有意了解者,应依《清净道论》(清净道论2.402等)所述之法来把握。在此,我们只注解圣典本身。显示巴利原文
Soti so ahaṃ. Anekavihitanti anekavidhaṃ, anekehi vā pakārehi pavattitaṃ saṃvaṇṇitanti attho. Pubbenivāsanti samanantarātītaṃ bhavaṃ ādiṃ katvā tattha tattha nivutthasantānaṃ. Anussarāmīti ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’ti evaṃ jātipaṭipāṭiyā anugantvā anugantvā sarāmi, anudeva vā sarāmi, citte abhininnāmitamatte eva sarāmīti dasseti. Pūritapāramīnañhi mahāpurisānaṃ parikammakaraṇaṃ natthi, tena te cittaṃ abhininnāmetvāva saranti. Ādikammikakulaputtā pana parikammaṃ katvāva saranti, tasmā tesaṃ vasena parikammaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā. Taṃ pana vuccamānaṃ atibhāriyaṃ vinayanidānaṃ karoti, tasmā taṃ na vadāma. Atthikehi pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.402 ādayo) vuttanayeneva gahetabbaṃ. Idha pana pāḷimeva vaṇṇayissāma.
“即如此”:这是显示所展示种类的虚词。因此,为显示那所展示的宿住种类差别,而说“一生”等。其中,“一生”:即以结生为始、以死为终,一个生有中所包含的蕴相续。“二生”等亦同此理。在“许多坏劫”等中,则应了知:正在毁坏的劫是坏劫,正在生成的劫是成劫。其中,以坏劫包含了坏住劫,因为那是根本;以成劫包含了成住劫。如此,经文所说的“比丘们,有这四种不可计数的劫。哪四种?坏、坏住、成、成住”,这一切便都被含摄其中了。显示巴利原文
Seyyathidanti āraddhappakāradassanatthe nipāto. Teneva yvāyaṃ pubbenivāso āraddho, tassa pakārappabhedaṃ dassento ekampi jātintiādimāha. Tattha ekampi jātinti ekampi paṭisandhimūlaṃ cutipariyosānaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannaṃ khandhasantānaṃ. Esa nayo dvepi jātiyotiādīsu. Anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappetiādīsu pana parihāyamāno kappo saṃvaṭṭakappo, vaḍḍhamāno vivaṭṭakappoti veditabbo. Tattha ca saṃvaṭṭena saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī gahito hoti tammūlakattā. Vivaṭṭena ca vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Evañhi sati yāni tāni ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, kappassa asaṅkhyeyyāni . Katamāni cattāri? Saṃvaṭṭo saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī, vivaṭṭo vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī’’ti vuttāni tāni sabbāni pariggahitāni honti.
其中,有三坏:火坏、水坏、风坏。三种坏的界限:光音天、遍净天、广果天。当劫以火而坏时,从光音天以下尽被火焚。当以水而坏时,从遍净天以下尽被水融。当以风而坏时,从广果天以下尽被风所摧。然就广度而言,总是一个佛刹正在毁灭。显示巴利原文
Tattha tayo saṃvaṭṭā – tejosaṃvaṭṭo, āposaṃvaṭṭo, vāyosaṃvaṭṭoti. Tisso saṃvaṭṭasīmā – ābhassarā, subhakiṇhā, vehapphalāti. Yadā kappo tejena saṃvaṭṭati, ābhassarato heṭṭhā agginā ḍayhati. Yadā udakena saṃvaṭṭati, subhakiṇhato heṭṭhā udakena vilīyati. Yadā vātena saṃvaṭṭati, vehapphalato heṭṭhā vātena viddhaṃsiyati. Vitthārato pana sadāpi ekaṃ buddhakkhettaṃ vinassati.
佛刹有三种:诞刹、教令刹与境刹。其中,诞刹以一万轮围世界为其边际,于如来入胎等时震动。教令刹以百千俱胝轮围世界为其边际,于此范围内,《宝经》《蕴经》《幢顶经》《阿吒那胝经》《孔雀经》等护卫经的威力得以显现。境刹则无有边际、无有量,如所说:“如果他希望,则能随念任何处。”(增支部3.81)在那里,凡有所愿,皆可随念。在这三种佛刹之中,若有某一教令刹坏灭,当它坏灭时,诞刹亦已坏灭;他们之坏灭是同时坏灭,成立亦同时成立。此坏灭与成立之理,已于《清净道论》(清净道论2.404)中说。有志者当从彼处了解。显示巴利原文
Buddhakkhettaṃ nāma tividhaṃ hoti – jātikkhettaṃ, āṇākkhettaṃ, visayakkhettañca. Tattha jātikkhettaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷapariyantaṃ hoti, yaṃ tathāgatassa paṭisandhiādīsu kampati. Āṇākkhettaṃ koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷapariyantaṃ hoti. Yattha ratanaparittaṃ, khandhaparittaṃ, dhajaggaparittaṃ, āṭānāṭiyaparittaṃ, moraparittanti imesaṃ parittānaṃ ānubhāvo pavattati. Visayakkhettaṃ pana anantaṃ aparimāṇaṃ, ‘‘yaṃ yāvatā vā pana ākaṅkheyyā’’ti (a. ni. 3.81) vuttaṃ yattha yaṃ yaṃ ākaṅkhati taṃ taṃ anussarati. Evametesu tīsu buddhakkhettesu ekaṃ āṇākkhettaṃ vinassati. Tasmiṃ pana vinassante jātikkhettampi vinaṭṭhameva hoti; vinassantañca ekatova vinassati, saṇṭhahantampi ekatova saṇṭhahati. Tassa vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.404) vuttaṃ. Atthikehi tato gahetabbaṃ.
至于所说的坏劫与成劫,世尊为在菩提道场证得正自觉而坐时,曾忆念无量坏劫、无量成劫、无量坏成劫。如何忆念?即依“我曾于彼处”等理趣。其中,“我曾于彼处”是指:于彼坏劫中,我曾在彼有、或某生处、或某趣、或某识住、或某有情居、或某有情聚中。名如此:或名毗山多罗,或名光护。姓如此:或姓跋伽婆,或姓乔达摩。肤彩如此:或白,或黑。食如此:或以米饭肉食为食,或以所生之果为食。如此领受苦乐:即以种种方式,经历属于身心的、分为有依与无依等类别的苦与乐。寿量如此:寿量百岁为最,或寿量八万四千劫为最。显示巴利原文
Ye panete saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭā vuttā, etesu bhagavā bodhimaṇḍe sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhanatthāya nisinno anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe sari. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Amutrāsi’’ntiādinā nayena. Tattha amutrāsinti amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappe ahaṃ amumhi bhave vā yoniyā vā gatiyā vā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā vā sattāvāse vā sattanikāye vā ahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmoti vessantaro vā jotipālo vā. Evaṃgottoti bhaggavo vā gotamo vā. Evaṃvaṇṇoti odāto vā sāmo vā. Evamāhāroti sālimaṃsodanāhāro vā pavattaphalabhojano vā. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti anekappakārena kāyikacetasikānaṃ sāmisanirāmisādippabhedānaṃ vā sukhadukkhānaṃ paṭisaṃvedī. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ vassasataparamāyupariyanto vā caturāsītikappasahassaparamāyupariyanto vā.
“从彼处死后,于某处再生”指:那个我从彼有、彼生处、彼趣、彼识住、彼有情居、彼有情聚死后,又于名为某处的有、生处、趣、识住、有情居、有情聚中再生。“于彼处亦如此”指:此后,于彼有、生处、趣、识住、有情居、有情聚中,我又如此存在。名如这些,悉如前说。显示巴利原文
Sotato cuto amutra udapādinti so ahaṃ tato bhavato yonito gatito viññāṇaṭṭhitito sattāvāsato sattanikāyato vā cuto, puna amukasmiṃ nāma bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā udapādiṃ. Tatrāpāsinti atha tatrāpi bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā puna ahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmotiādi vuttanayameva.
或者,因为“我曾在那里”,是对次第上升者随其所欲的忆念;“从该处死后”,是对返回者的观察。因此,“在此处再生”应如此理解:在此处受生之后,紧接着“在那里再生”,指的是兜率天。“在那里我也如此,名为如此”是说:在兜率天,我成为名为白幢的天子。“姓为如此”指与那些天众同姓。“肤色为如此”指金色。“食为如此”指以天界净食为食。“如此领受苦乐”指如此领受天界之乐,而苦则仅是行苦。“寿限如此”指寿限为五十七俱胝又六十万百岁。“从该处死后”:那个我从兜率天死后。“在此处再生”指在此处,于摩诃摩耶夫人胎中结生。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yasmā amutrāsinti idaṃ anupubbena ārohantassa yāvadicchakaṃ saraṇaṃ. So tato cutoti paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇaṃ. Tasmā idhūpapannoti imissā idhūpapattiyā anantaraṃ amutra udapādinti tusitabhavanaṃ sandhāyāhāti veditabbaṃ. Tatrāpāsiṃ evaṃnāmoti tatrāpi tusitabhavane setaketu nāma devaputto ahosiṃ. Evaṃgottoti tāhi devatāhi saddhiṃ ekagotto. Evaṃvaṇṇoti suvaṇṇavaṇṇo. Evamāhāroti dibbasudhāhāro. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti evaṃ dibbasukhappaṭisaṃvedī. Dukkhaṃ pana saṅkhāradukkhamattameva. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ sattapaññāsavassakoṭisaṭṭhivassasatasahassāyupariyanto. So tato cutoti so ahaṃ tato tusitabhavanato cuto. Idhūpapannoti idha mahāmāyāya deviyā kucchimhi nibbatto.
“如是”即如此。“具有相状、具有称谓”:以名与姓为具有称谓,以肤色等为具有相状。因为以名与姓,有情被指称为“达多、帝须、乔达摩”;以肤色等,被认知为白色、黑色等差别。因此,名与姓是称谓,其余是相状。那么,是否只有诸佛才忆念宿住呢?答:并非只有诸佛,独觉、佛弟子、外道也都能忆念,但并非毫无差别。外道只能忆念四十劫,不能超过。何以故?因为智慧薄弱。由于他们没有名色分别,智慧薄弱。弟子之中,八十位大弟子能忆念十万劫;两位上首弟子能忆念一个阿僧祇又十万劫。独觉能忆念两个阿僧祇又十万劫。这是他们的愿力所及。而诸佛则没有限量,想忆念多少就忆念多少。外道只能按蕴的次第忆念,不能离开次第而以死生相续的方式忆念。他们如同盲人,不能随意进入所欲之处。弟子们能以两种方式忆念,独觉也是如此。而诸佛无论按蕴的次第,还是以死生相续的方式,还是以狮子跃入的方式,于无数俱胝劫中,向下或向上,无论希望忆念何处,都能全部忆念。显示巴利原文
Itīti evaṃ. Sākāraṃ sauddesanti nāmagottavasena sauddesaṃ, vaṇṇādivasena sākāraṃ. Nāmagottavasena hi satto ‘‘datto, tisso, gotamo’’ti uddisīyati; vaṇṇādīhi odāto, sāmoti nānattato paññāyati; tasmā nāmagottaṃ uddeso, itare ākārā. Kiṃ pana buddhāyeva pubbenivāsaṃ sarantīti? Vuccate – na buddhāyeva, paccekabuddha-buddhasāvaka-titthiyāpi, no ca kho avisesena. Titthiyā hi cattālīsaṃyeva kappe saranti, na tato paraṃ. Kasmā? Dubbalapaññattā. Tesañhi nāmarūpaparicchedavirahato dubbalā paññā hoti. Sāvakesu pana asītimahāsāvakā kappasatasahassaṃ saranti; dve aggasāvakā ekamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ satasahassañca. Paccekabuddhā dve asaṅkhyeyyāni satasahassañca. Ettako hi tesaṃ abhinīhāro. Buddhānaṃ pana paricchedo natthi, yāva icchanti tāva saranti. Titthiyā ca khandhapaṭipāṭimeva saranti. Paṭipāṭiṃ muñcitvā cutipaṭisandhivasena sarituṃ na sakkonti. Tesañhi andhānaṃ viya icchitappadesokkamanaṃ natthi. Sāvakā ubhayathāpi saranti; tathā paccekabuddhā. Buddhā pana khandhapaṭipāṭiyāpi cutipaṭisandhivasenapi sīhokkantavasenapi anekāsu kappakoṭīsu heṭṭhā vā upari vā yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ ākaṅkhanti, taṃ sabbaṃ sarantiyeva.
在“婆罗门,这是我的……”等句中,“我的”即由我所证得。“明”:以令知为义,令知什么呢?令知宿住。“无明”:对于那宿住不令知,即覆盖它的痴。“暗”:就是那痴本身,因其覆盖而称为“暗”。“光”:就是那明本身,因其照亮而称为“光”。这里,明已证得是主要意义,其余是赞叹之语。而此处的衔接是:婆罗门,这明确实已由我证得。对于已证得明的我,无明已被破坏,即已灭尽。为什么呢?因为明已生起。此理也适用于其余两个词句。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇātiādīsu meti mayā. Vijjāti viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā. Kiṃ viditaṃ karoti? Pubbenivāsaṃ. Avijjāti tasseva pubbenivāsassa aviditakaraṇaṭṭhena tappaṭicchādakamoho vuccati. Tamoti sveva moho tappaṭicchādakaṭṭhena ‘‘tamo’’ti vuccati. Ālokoti sāyevavijjā obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhena ‘‘āloko’’ti vuccati. Ettha ca vijjā adhigatāti ayaṃ attho, sesaṃ pasaṃsāvacanaṃ. Yojanā panettha – ayaṃ kho me vijjā adhigatā, tassa me adhigatavijjassa avijjā vihatā, vinaṭṭhāti attho. Kasmā? Yasmā vijjā uppannā. Esa nayo itarasmimpi padadvaye.
“正如”一语中,“如”是譬喻之义,“正如”是不变词。以念的不散乱安住不放逸,以精进的热忱安住勤勇,对身体与生命无所顾恋而安住于已策励心——这是其含义。意思是:正如不放逸、勤勇、已策励心而住者,无明被破坏,明生起,黑暗被破坏,光明生起;同样地,我的无明已被破坏,明已生起,黑暗已被破坏,光明已生起。我这般精勤修行,得到了恰如其分的果报。显示巴利原文
Yathā tanti ettha yathāti opammatthe. Tanti nipāto. Satiyā avippavāsena appamattassa. Vīriyātāpena ātāpino. Kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāya pahitattassa, pesitacittassāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avijjā vihaññeyya vijjā uppajjeyya, tamo vihaññeyya āloko uppajjeyya; evameva mama avijjā vihatā vijjā uppannā, tamo vihato āloko uppanno. Etassa me padhānānuyogassa anurūpameva phalaṃ laddhanti.
“婆罗门,这是我的第一次破壳而出,犹如小鸡从蛋壳中”意思是:婆罗门,这确实是我——以宿住随念智为嘴喙,啄破覆盖着过去所住诸蕴的无明蛋壳后,第一次破出、第一次出离、第一次圣生;正如小鸡以嘴喙或脚爪尖啄破蛋壳后,从那个蛋壳中破出、出离,归于鸡类之中。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇa paṭhamā abhinibbhidā ahosi kukkuṭacchāpakasseva aṇḍakosamhāti ayaṃ kho mama brāhmaṇa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇamukhatuṇḍakena pubbe nivutthakkhandhapaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā paṭhamā abhinibbhidā paṭhamā nikkhanti paṭhamā ariyājāti ahosi, kukkuṭacchāpakasseva mukhatuṇḍakena vā pādanakhasikhāya vā aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tamhā aṇḍakosamhā abhinibbhidā nikkhanti kukkuṭanikāye paccājātīti.
天眼智论显示巴利原文
Dibbacakkhuñāṇakathā
13 十三、他如此……死生智:即关于死与生的智慧;透过此智慧能了知众生的死与生,这是为了说明其目的而说的。“引导心转向”:即引出遍作心。然而,在“我以天眼……看见”这一句里,对于已圆满波罗蜜的大士们,是没有遍作的预备修行的。因为他们只要将心转向,立即便以天眼看见众生;而初学的善男子则需作遍作。因此,就初学者的角度,遍作是应当说明的。但如果解释这遍作,会使律藏的因缘部分变得过于冗长,因此我们不作解说。有志者应依《清净道论》中所说的方法去了解。在此,我们只解说圣典本身的文义。显示巴利原文
13.Soevaṃ…pe… cutūpapātañāṇāyāti cutiyā ca upapāte ca ñāṇāya; yena ñāṇena sattānaṃ cuti ca upapāto ca ñāyati, tadatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Cittaṃ abhininnāmesinti parikammacittaṃ nīhariṃ. So dibbena…pe… passāmīti ettha pana pūritapāramīnaṃ mahāsattānaṃ parikammakaraṇaṃ natthi. Te hi citte abhininnāmitamatte eva dibbena cakkhunā satte passanti, ādikammikakulaputtā pana parikammaṃ katvā. Tasmā tesaṃ vasena parikammaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā. Taṃ pana vuccamānaṃ atibhāriyaṃ vinayanidānaṃ karoti; tasmā taṃ na vadāma. Atthikehi pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.411) vuttanayena gahetabbaṃ. Idha pana pāḷimeva vaṇṇayissāma.
“我”:即那个我。“以天……”等:因与天相似,故称“天的”。诸天由善业所生,其眼不为胆汁、痰、血等所障碍,远离随烦恼,即使在远处也能领纳所缘,故其净色眼为天眼。而此由精进修习之力所生之智眼亦复如是:由似天眼故,名为“天的”;由依天住而得,且自身亦依止天住,故名为“天的”;由以光明为摄持,有大光辉,故名为“天的”;由能见穿墙等色法,有大行境,故名为“天的”。这一切应依声论典而了知。以能见之义为“眼”。因能行眼之作用,如同眼一般,故亦名为“眼”。能见死与生,为见清净之因,故为“清净的”。若唯见死而不见生,则执断见;若唯见生而不见死,则执新众生出现之见。若俱见二者,则超越此二邪见,其见即成见清净之因。世尊俱见二者,故如是说:“能见死与生,为见清净之因,故名为清净”。显示巴利原文
Soti so ahaṃ. Dibbenātiādīsu dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ. Devatānañhi sucaritakammanibbattaṃ pittasemharuhirādīhi apalibuddhaṃ upakkilesavinimuttatāya dūrepi ārammaṇasampaṭicchanasamatthaṃ dibbaṃ pasādacakkhu hoti. Idañcāpi vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattaṃ ñāṇacakkhu tādisamevāti dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ, dibbavihāravasena paṭiladdhattā attanā ca dibbavihārasannissitattāpi dibbaṃ, ālokapariggahena mahājutikattāpi dibbaṃ, tirokuṭṭādigatarūpadassanena mahāgatikattāpi dibbaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabbaṃ. Dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu. Cakkhukiccakaraṇena cakkhumivātipi cakkhu. Cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttā visuddhaṃ. Yo hi cutimattameva passati na upapātaṃ, so ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo upapātamattameva passati na cutiṃ, so navasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo pana tadubhayaṃ passati, so yasmā duvidhampi taṃ diṭṭhigataṃ ativattati, tasmāssa taṃ dassanaṃ diṭṭhivisuddhihetu hoti. Tadubhayañca bhagavā addasa. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttā visuddha’’nti.
又,由远离十一种随烦恼而清净。世尊的天眼远离十一种随烦恼。如经云:“阿那律,我如是了知‘疑是心之随烦恼’后,即断除疑——心之随烦恼。不作意……惛沉睡眠……怖畏……兴奋……粗重……过度精进……过于懈怠……欲求……种种想……‘过度审察诸色是心之随烦恼’,我如是了知后,即断除过度审察诸色——心之随烦恼。阿那律,我如是安住于不放逸、热忱、坚定,便觉知光明而不见色,或见色而不觉知光明。”云云。如是,即由远离十一种随烦恼而清净。显示巴利原文
Ekādasaupakkilesavirahato vā visuddhaṃ. Bhagavato hi ekādasapakkilesavirahitaṃ dibbacakkhu. Yathāha – ‘‘so kho ahaṃ, anuruddha, ‘vicikicchā cittassa upakkileso’ti iti viditvā vicikicchaṃ cittassa upakkilesaṃ pajahiṃ. Amanasikāro…pe… thinamiddhaṃ… chambhitattaṃ… uppilaṃ… duṭṭhullaṃ… accāraddhavīriyaṃ… atilīnavīriyaṃ… abhijappā… nānattasaññā… ‘atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ cittassa upakkileso’ti iti viditvā atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ cittassa upakkilesaṃ pajahiṃ. So kho ahaṃ, anuruddha, appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto obhāsañhi kho sañjānāmi, na ca rūpāni passāmi. Rūpāni hi kho passāmi, na ca obhāsaṃ sañjānāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.242-243) evamādi. Tadevaṃ ekādasupakkilesavirahato visuddhaṃ.
因超越人间范围而见色,故称“超越人间的”;或由超越人间肉眼,故称“超越人间的”。即以那清净、超越人间的天眼。显示巴利原文
Manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā rūpadassanena atikkantamānusakaṃ; mānusakaṃ vā maṃsacakkhuṃ atikkantattā atikkantamānusakanti veditabbaṃ. Tena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena.
“我见众生”:犹如以人的肉眼,我观见、察见、照见众生。“死去与再生”:在此,天眼并不能看见正在死亡的那一刹那或正在再生的那一刹那;然而,那些临近死亡、即将死去者,被称为“正在死去”;那些已取得结生、或刚刚出生者,被称为“正在再生”。他显示:“我见到如是这般死去和再生者。”“卑贱”:由于与痴的等流相应,因出身、家族、财富等而被轻贱、藐视、贬斥、鄙弃。“高贵”:由于不与痴的等流相应,与此相反。“美貌”:由于与无嗔的等流相应,具备可爱、可意、悦人的容貌。“丑陋”:由于与嗔的等流相应,具备不可爱、不可意、不悦人的容貌;也有“美丽”与“丑陋”的含义。“善趣”:在善趣中;或指由于与无贪的等流相应,成为富有、大财富者。“恶趣”:在恶趣中;或指由于与贪的等流相应,成为贫穷、少饮食者。“随业而生”:随其所造作的各种业,各各投生。此中,前以“正在死去”等句说明天眼的作用;而此句则说明随业生智的作用。显示巴利原文
Sattepassāmīti manussamaṃsacakkhunā viya satte passāmi dakkhāmi olokemi. Cavamāne upapajjamāneti ettha cutikkhaṇe vā upapattikkhaṇe vā dibbacakkhunā daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā, ye pana āsannacutikā idāni cavissanti te cavamānā. Ye ca gahitapaṭisandhikā sampatinibbattā vā, te upapajjamānāti adhippetā. Te evarūpe cavamāne upapajjamāne ca passāmīti dasseti. Hīneti mohanissandayuttattā hīnānaṃ jātikulabhogādīnaṃ vasena hīḷite ohīḷite uññāte avaññāte. Paṇīteti amohanissandayuttattā tabbiparīte. Suvaṇṇeti adosanissandayuttattā iṭṭhakantamanāpavaṇṇayutte. Dubbaṇṇeti dosanissandayuttattā aniṭṭhākantaamanāpavaṇṇayutte; abhirūpe virūpetipi attho. Sugateti sugatigate, alobhanissandayuttattā vā aḍḍhe mahaddhane. Duggateti duggatigate, lobhanissandayuttattā vā dalidde appannapāne. Yathākammūpageti yaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ upacitaṃ tena tena upagate. Tattha purimehi ‘‘cavamāne’’tiādīhi dibbacakkhukiccaṃ vuttaṃ; iminā pana padena yathākammūpagañāṇakiccaṃ.
此智的生起次第如下:他先向下方地狱方向扩展光明,见地狱众生正受大苦,此见仅仅是天眼的作用。他如此作意:“这些众生是造了什么业而受此苦呢?”于是,关于“他们造了如是业”,以该业为所缘的智便生起。同样地,他向上方天界方向扩展光明,见欢喜园、杂林园、粗涩园等处的众生正在享受广大福乐,此见也仅仅是天眼的作用。他如此作意:“这些众生是造了什么业而享此福乐呢?”于是,关于“他们造了如是业”,以该业为所缘的智便生起。这称为随业生智。它没有单独的遍作。如同此智,未来分智也是如此。因为这些智皆以天眼为基,与天眼一同成就。显示巴利原文
Tassa ca ñāṇassa ayamuppattikkamo – so heṭṭhā nirayābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nerayikasatte passati mahantaṃ dukkhamanubhavamāne, taṃ dassanaṃ dibbacakkhukiccameva. So evaṃ manasi karoti – ‘‘kinnu kho kammaṃ katvā ime sattā etaṃ dukkhamanubhavantī’’ti? Athassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma katvā’’ti taṃ kammārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Tathā upari devalokābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nandanavana-missakavana-phārusakavanādīsu satte passati mahāsampattiṃ anubhavamāne. Tampi dassanaṃ dibbacakkhukiccameva. So evaṃ manasi karoti – ‘‘kinnu kho kammaṃ katvā ime sattā etaṃ sampattiṃ anubhavantī’’ti? Athassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma katvā’’ti taṃkammārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Idaṃ yathākammūpagañāṇaṃ nāma. Imassa visuṃ parikammaṃ nāma natthi. Yathā cimassa, evaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇassapi. Dibbacakkhupādakāneva hi imāni dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhanti.
“身恶行”等:恶行,即恶的行、或因烦恼腐坏而称为恶行;以身所作的恶行,或从身生起的恶行,名为身恶行。语恶行、意恶行亦当如是理解。“具足”:即具备。“诽谤圣者”:对佛、独觉、佛弟子等圣者,乃至最下位的在家须陀洹,怀恶意而诽谤,或以根本事诽谤,或以毁坏功德诽谤;即辱骂、指责。其中,若说“这些人无沙门法,非沙门”,是为以根本事诽谤。若说“他们没有禅那、解脱、道、果”,是为以毁坏功德诽谤,当如此理解。无论知或不知而作诽谤,两者皆属诽谤圣者。此为极重业,障碍生天、障碍圣道,但可忏除。为显明此义,举例如下:显示巴利原文
Kāyaduccaritenātiādīsu duṭṭhu caritaṃ duṭṭhaṃ vā caritaṃ kilesapūtikattāti duccaritaṃ; kāyena duccaritaṃ, kāyato vā uppannaṃ duccaritanti kāyaduccaritaṃ. Evaṃ vacīmanoduccaritānipi daṭṭhabbāni. Samannāgatāti samaṅgībhūtā. Ariyānaṃ upavādakāti buddha-paccekabuddha-buddhasāvakānaṃ ariyānaṃ antamaso gihisotāpannānampi anatthakāmā hutvā antimavatthunā vā guṇaparidhaṃsanena vā upavādakā; akkosakā, garahakāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ‘‘natthi imesaṃ samaṇadhammo, assamaṇā ete’’ti vadanto antimavatthunā upavadati. ‘‘Natthi imesaṃ jhānaṃ vā vimokkho vā maggo vā phalaṃ vā’’ti vadanto guṇaparidhaṃsanena upavadatīti veditabbo. So ca jānaṃ vā upavadeyya ajānaṃ vā, ubhayathāpi ariyūpavādova hoti. Bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ saggāvaraṇaṃ maggāvaraṇañca, satekicchaṃ pana hoti. Tassa ca āvibhāvatthaṃ idaṃ vatthumudāharanti –
据说在某村,一位长老与一位年轻比丘一同行乞。他们才到第一家,便获得了大约一勺的热粥。长老素有腹风之疾。他想:‘这粥于我良益,趁它未凉,我先喝了。’于是,他坐在人们搬来用于劈开的木桩上,将那粥喝了。年轻比丘对此极感厌嫌:‘这老比丘竟如此贪吃,令我等蒙羞了。’长老在村中次第乞食后回到寺院,问年轻比丘:‘贤友,你于这教法中可有证得什么吗?’‘是的,尊者,我已是须陀洹。’‘既如此,贤友,你不必再为上进之道而用功了,因你已诽谤了漏尽者。’年轻比丘便向长老请求原谅,由此罪过得以清净。因此,若有他人诽谤圣者,应当前往圣者处,若自己较为年长,应这样说:‘我对尊者说了如此这般的话,请原谅我。’如此请求原谅。若自己较为年轻,应当顶礼、长跪、合掌,说道:‘尊者,我此前对您说了如此这般的话,请您原谅我。’如此请求原谅。若对方不接受,或已远走他方,则应前往住于此寺的比丘们那里,若自己较年长,站着便可;若较年轻,应长跪合掌,说道:‘诸位尊者,我先前曾对某位尊者说了如此这般的话,愿那位尊者能原谅我。’如此请求原谅。若那位圣者已经般涅槃,则应前往他般涅槃之处,乃至到塔墓处请求原谅。这样行持,则不再障碍生天、障碍修道,过失得以还净。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aññatarasmiṃ kira gāme eko thero ca daharabhikkhu ca piṇḍāya caranti. Te paṭhamaghareyeva uḷuṅkamattaṃ uṇhayāguṃ labhiṃsu. Therassa ca kucchivāto atthi. So cintesi – ‘ayaṃ yāgu mayhaṃ sappāyā, yāva na sītalā hoti tāva naṃ pivāmī’ti. So manussehi ummāratthāya āhaṭe dārukkhandhe nisīditvā taṃ pivi. Itaro taṃ jigucchi – ‘aticchāto vatāyaṃ mahallako amhākaṃ lajjitabbakaṃ akāsī’ti. Thero gāme caritvā vihāraṃ gantvā daharabhikkhuṃ āha – ‘atthi te, āvuso, imasmiṃ sāsane patiṭṭhā’ti? ‘Āma, bhante, sotāpanno aha’nti. ‘Tena hāvuso, uparimaggatthāya vāyāmaṃ mā akāsi, khīṇāsavo tayā upavadito’ti. So taṃ khamāpesi. Tenassa taṃ pākatikaṃ ahosi’’. Tasmā yo aññopi ariyaṃ upavadati, tena gantvā sace attanā vuḍḍhataro hoti, ‘‘ahaṃ āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, taṃ me khamāhī’’ti khamāpetabbo. Sace navakataro hoti , vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ bhante tumhe idañcidañca avacaṃ, taṃ me khamathā’’ti khamāpetabbo. Sace so nakkhamati disāpakkanto vā hoti, ye tasmiṃ vihāre bhikkhū vasanti tesaṃ santikaṃ gantvā sace attanā vuḍḍhataro hoti ṭhitakeneva, sace navakataro ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, asukaṃ nāma āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, khamatu me so āyasmā’’ti evaṃ vadantena khamāpetabbo. Sace so parinibbuto hoti, parinibbutamañcaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā yāva sivathikaṃ gantvāpi khamāpetabbo. Evaṃ kate saggāvaraṇañca maggāvaraṇañca na hoti, pākatikameva hoti.
“邪见者”是指具颠倒见之人。“受持邪见业”是说依邪见而受持的种种业,以及教令他人受持那些以邪见为根本的身业等。在此,语恶行本已包含诽谤圣者,意恶行本已包含邪见,然而重又宣说此二者,应知是为显示其重大过失。因为诽谤圣者有过失极重,类同无间业。正如经中所说:“舍利弗,譬如有比丘具足戒、具足定、具足慧,能于现法自证阿拉汉。舍利弗,我说此人若不舍彼语、不舍彼心、不舍彼见,便会如同被拖来弃掷一般,就这样堕入地狱。”显示巴利原文
Micchādiṭṭhikāti viparītadassanā. Micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānāti micchādiṭṭhivasena samādinnanānāvidhakammā, ye ca micchādiṭṭhimūlakesu kāyakammādīsu aññepi samādapenti. Tattha vacīduccaritaggahaṇeneva ariyūpavāde, manoduccaritaggahaṇena ca micchādiṭṭhiyā saṅgahitāyapi imesaṃ dvinnaṃ puna vacanaṃ mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthanti veditabbaṃ. Mahāsāvajjo hi ariyūpavādo ānantariyasadiso. Yathāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi, sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṃ ārādheyya; evaṃsampadamidaṃ, sāriputta, vadāmi taṃ vācaṃ appahāya taṃ cittaṃ appahāya taṃ diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṃ nikkhitto, evaṃ niraye’’ti (ma. ni. 1.149).
没有比邪见更具重大过失的了。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,我不见有其他任何一法,能有如此大的过失,那就是邪见。诸比丘,邪见是诸过失中之最。”显示巴利原文
Micchādiṭṭhito ca mahāsāvajjataraṃ nāma aññaṃ natthi. Yathāha – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, evaṃ mahāsāvajjataraṃ, yathayidaṃ, micchādiṭṭhi. Micchādiṭṭhiparamāni, bhikkhave, vajjānī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310).
“身坏”指对所执取五蕴的舍弃。“命终后”指其后执取新生的五蕴。或者,“身坏”指命根的断绝,“命终后”指死心之后。“恶趣”等一切皆是地狱的异名。其中,地狱(niraya)因为无有善业所感的喜乐(aya),故称恶趣(apāya);或因为无有乐因,故称恶趣。它是苦的归趣、依处,故称恶道(duggati);或因嗔恚众多,为恶业所生的归趣,故称恶道。造恶者在此无自在而坠落,故称坠堕(vinipāta);或在此处肢节毁坏而坠堕,故称坠堕。此处没有可爱之乐(aya),故称地狱(niraya)。显示巴利原文
Kāyassa bhedāti upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā. Paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe. Athavā kāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassupacchedā. Paraṃ maraṇāti cuticittato uddhaṃ. Apāyanti evamādi sabbaṃ nirayavevacanaṃ. Nirayo hi saggamokkhahetubhūtā puññasammatā ayā apetattā, sukhānaṃ vā āyassa abhāvā apāyo. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggati; dosabahulatāya vā duṭṭhena kammunā nibbattā gatīti duggati. Vivasā nipatanti ettha dukkaṭakārinoti vinipāto; vinassantā vā ettha nipatanti sambhijjamānaṅgapaccaṅgāti vinipāto. Natthi ettha assādasaññito ayoti nirayo.
再者,以“恶趣”一词指畜生道。畜生道是恶趣,因为远离善趣;但不是恶道,因为有大威力的龙王等生于其中。以“恶道”一词指饿鬼界。饿鬼界既是恶趣又是恶道,因为远离善趣,又是苦的归趣;但不是坠堕,因为不像阿修罗那样坠落,大威力的饿鬼也有宫殿现起。以“坠堕”一词指阿修罗身。阿修罗身依上述之义,既是恶趣又是恶道,且因从一切荣华中坠落,故称坠堕。以“地狱”一词指无间地狱等多种地狱。“往生”意指到达、生于彼处。相反方面应知为白分。显示巴利原文
Atha vā apāyaggahaṇena tiracchānayoniṃ dīpeti. Tiracchānayoni hi apāyo, sugatiyā apetattā; na duggati, mahesakkhānaṃ nāgarājādīnaṃ sambhavato. Duggatiggahaṇena pettivisayaṃ dīpeti. So hi apāyo ceva duggati ca sugatito apetattā, dukkhassa ca gatibhūtattā; na tu vinipāto asurasadisaṃ avinipatitattā. Petamahiddhikānañhi vimānānipi nibbattanti. Vinipātaggahaṇena asurakāyaṃ dīpeti. So hi yathāvuttenatthena apāyo ceva duggati ca sabbasamussayehi ca vinipatitattā vinipātoti vuccati. Nirayaggahaṇena avīci-ādianekappakāraṃ nirayameva dīpeti. Upapannāti upagatā, tattha abhinibbattāti adhippāyo. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
然而,此处有一个差别:在此,以“善趣”一词,人趣也被包含在内;以“天”一词,则仅指天趣。其中,美好的趣处称为“善趣”;在色等所缘中最为殊胜,故称为“天”。所有这一切,因为坏灭、崩解的意义而称为“世间”,这是从词源上说的。“明”是指天眼智明。“无明”是指遮蔽众生死亡与结生的无明。其余部分如前所述。此处的差别仅在于:如同在宿住随念论中所说:“以宿住随念智的嘴喙,啄破了遮蔽过去所住诸蕴的无明蛋壳”;在此处则说:“以死生智的嘴喙,啄破了遮蔽死生的无明蛋壳”。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana viseso – ettha sugatiggahaṇena manussagatipi saṅgayhati. Saggaggahaṇena devagatiyeva. Tattha sundarā gatīti sugati. Rūpādivisayehi suṭṭhu aggoti saggo. So sabbopi lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti ayaṃ vacanattho. Vijjāti dibbacakkhuñāṇavijjā. Avijjāti sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhipaṭicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ayameva hettha viseso – yathā pubbenivāsakathāyaṃ ‘‘pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇamukhatuṇḍakena pubbenivutthakkhandhapaacchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā’’ti vuttaṃ; evamidha ‘‘cutūpapātañāṇamukhatuṇḍakena cutūpapātapaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā’’ti vattabbanti.
漏尽智论显示巴利原文
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathā
14 “他的心如此得定”——此处当知是指作为毗婆舍那基础的第四禅心。“为了诸漏灭尽的智”——即为了阿罗汉道智。因为阿罗汉道能灭尽诸漏,故称为“诸漏灭尽”,而此智即属于该道。“引导心”——即引导毗婆舍那心。“我彻底了知‘这是苦’”等:我以通晓自性相的方式,如实遍知、了知、证悟了一切苦谛,确知“苦唯此多,更无超出”;对于那苦的生起因——渴爱,我如实遍知、了知、证悟了“这是苦集”;对于两者灭尽后不再转起的涅槃,我如实遍知、了知、证悟了“这是苦灭”;对于那能证得涅槃的圣道,我如实遍知、了知、证悟了“这是导向苦灭之道”。应如此理解其义。显示巴利原文
14.Soevaṃ samāhite citteti idha vipassanāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti arahattamaggañāṇatthāya. Arahattamaggo hi āsavavināsanato āsavānaṃ khayoti vuccati. Tatra cetaṃ ñāṇaṃ tappariyāpannattāti . Cittaṃ abhininnāmesinti vipassanācittaṃ abhinīhariṃ. So idaṃ dukkhanti evamādīsu ‘‘ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti sabbampi dukkhasaccaṃ sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ jāniṃ paṭivijjhiṃ. Tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattikaṃ taṇhaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti, tadubhayampi yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhati taṃ tesaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’’ti, tassa ca sampāpakaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ jāniṃ paṭivijjhinti evamattho veditabbo.
如此从自性上显示了诸谛之后,现在为了从烦恼的角度以异门显示,而说“这些漏”等。“我如此知、如此见”——这是说,对于如此知、如此见的我,伴随着毗婆舍那,宣说了达到顶点的道。“从欲漏”——即从欲漏中。“心解脱”——以此显示果的刹那。因为在道刹那,心正在解脱;在果刹那,心已解脱。“于解脱中,有‘已解脱’之智”——以此显示省察智。“生已尽”等,是显示其省察智的范围。因为世尊以那省察智省察时,彻底了知了“生已尽”等。然而,世尊的什么“生”已尽?他又如何彻底了知它呢?回答是:并非他过去的生已尽,因为过去早已灭尽;并非未来的生,因为未来没有精勤令其灭尽;并非现在的生,因为它正在存在。然而,若未修习道,未来可能在欲有、色有、无色有等一个、四个、五个蕴的差别生起之处,结生起种种差别的生;由于道已修习,它已达到了不再生起的性质,故说已尽。他省察了由修道所断除的烦恼后,了知“在烦恼灭尽时,即使有业存在,未来也不会再结生”,从而彻底了知了“生已尽”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sarūpato saccāni dassetvā idāni kilesavasena pariyāyato dassento ‘‘ime āsavā’’tiādimāha. Tassa me evaṃ jānato evaṃ passatoti tassa mayhaṃ evaṃ jānantassa evaṃ passantassa saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ katheti. Kāmāsavāti kāmāsavato. Vimuccitthāti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Maggakkhaṇe hi cittaṃ vimuccati, phalakkhaṇe vimuttaṃ hoti. Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇanti iminā paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ dasseti. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmiṃ. Tena hi ñāṇena bhagavā paccavekkhanto ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādīni abbhaññāsiṃ. Katamā pana bhagavato jāti khīṇā, kathañca naṃ abbhaññāsīti? Vuccate – na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā, pubbeva khīṇattā; na anāgatā, anāgate vāyāmābhāvato; na paccuppannā, vijjamānattā. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā; taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā ‘‘kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃ hotī’’ti jānanto abbhaññāsiṃ.
“已住”的意思是已住、已遍住,已作、已行、已究竟。“梵行”是指道梵行。因为与凡夫善人一起,七位有学被称为“住于梵行之住”,而漏尽者则是“已住之住”。因此,世尊省察自己的梵行之住时,彻底了知了“梵行已住”。“应作已作”的意思是:对于四谛,通过四种道,以遍知、断除、证悟、修习的证入方式,完成了十六种应作之事。因为凡夫善人等正在做这件事,而漏尽者则是已作应作之人。因此,世尊省察自己的应作之事时,彻底了知了“应作已作”。“不再有如此状态”的意思是:现在,为了如此状态,即为了十六种应作的状态,或为了烦恼的灭尽,我彻底了知了“再也没有道修习的应作之事了”。显示巴利原文
Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ, kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhitanti attho. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ, puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ satta sekkhā brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasanti nāma, khīṇāsavo vutthavāso. Tasmā bhagavā attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘vusitaṃ brahmacariya’’nti abbhaññāsiṃ. Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayavasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho . Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi etaṃ kiccaṃ karonti, khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā bhagavā attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti abbhaññāsiṃ. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti idāni puna itthabhāvāya evaṃ soḷasakiccabhāvāya kilesakkhayāya vā maggabhāvanākiccaṃ me natthīti abbhaññāsiṃ.
现在,为了向婆罗门开示如此为省察智所摄持的、证得诸漏灭尽智的过程,世尊说:“婆罗门!这是我的……”等。此处,“明”是指阿罗汉道智之明。“无明”是指那遮蔽四圣谛的无明。其余部分如前所述。不过,这里有一处差异:在“婆罗门!这是我的第三度破壳而出”这一句中,其含义是:婆罗门!这是我的——以诸漏灭尽智为嘴喙,啄破遮蔽四圣谛的无明蛋壳之后,所作的第三度破壳而出,第三度出离,第三度圣者之诞生;正如小鸡以嘴喙或爪尖啄破蛋壳后,从那个蛋壳中破壳而出、出离,得以再生于鸡的族类一般。显示巴利原文
Idāni evaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇapariggahitaṃ taṃ āsavānaṃ khayañāṇādhigamaṃ brāhmaṇassa dassento ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Tattha vijjāti arahattamaggañāṇavijjā. Avijjāti catusaccapaṭicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ayaṃ pana viseso – ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇa tatiyā abhinibbhidā ahosīti ettha ayaṃ kho mama brāhmaṇa āsavānaṃ khayañāṇamukhatuṇḍakena catusaccapaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tatiyā abhinibbhidā tatiyā nikkhanti tatiyā ariyajāti ahosi, kukkuṭacchāpakasseva mukhatuṇḍakena vā pādanakhasikhāya vā aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tamhā aṇḍakosamhā abhinibbhidā nikkhanti kukkuṭanikāye paccājātīti.
至此,他显示了什么呢?婆罗门!那只小鸡啄破蛋壳后,从那里出来时,只是生为它自己(鸡)。然而,我首先破开了遮蔽过去所住诸蕴的无明蛋壳,以宿住随念智之明而诞生;然后,破开了遮蔽众生死亡与结生的无明蛋壳,第二次以天眼智之明而诞生;又破开了遮蔽四圣谛的无明蛋壳,第三次以诸漏灭尽智之明而诞生;如此,我以三明而三次诞生。而且,我的那次诞生是圣洁的、极为清净的——他显示了这一点。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā kiṃ dassetīti? So hi brāhmaṇa kukkuṭacchāpako aṇḍakosaṃ
如此开示时,他以宿住随念智揭示了过去分的智慧,以天眼智揭示了现在与未来分的智慧,以诸漏灭尽智展示了所有世间与出世间的功德;就这样,他以三明阐明了一切知智的功德之后,便向婆罗门显示了自身的圣洁诞生中那最上、最胜的地位。显示巴利原文
Padāletvā tato nikkhamanto sakimeva jāyati, ahaṃ pana pubbe-nivutthakkhandhapaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ bhinditvā paṭhamaṃ tāva pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇavijjāya jāto, tato sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhipaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā dutiyaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇavijjāya jāto, puna catusaccapaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tatiyaṃ āsavānaṃ khayañāṇavijjāya jāto; evaṃ tīhi vijjāhi tikkhattuṃ jāto. Sā ca me jāti ariyā suparisuddhāti idaṃ dassesi. Evaṃ dassento ca pubbenivāsañāṇena atītaṃsañāṇaṃ, dibbacakkhunā paccuppannānāgataṃsañāṇaṃ, āsavakkhayena sakalalokiyalokuttaraguṇanti evaṃ tīhi vijjāhi sabbepi sabbaññuguṇe pakāsetvā attano ariyāya jātiyā jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvaṃ brāhmaṇassa dassesīti.
关于随喜开示的论说显示巴利原文
Desanānumodanakathā
15 如是说时,无忧婆罗门——世尊出于对世间的悲悯,怜愍这位婆罗门,以宣说三明的法教,开示了即使应当隐藏的自身圣生之最尊、最胜性,无忧婆罗门身心盈满喜悦,了知世尊圣生之最尊、最胜之后,心想:“我竟然说这样一位一切世间最尊最胜、具足一切功德、一切知者‘不行对他人的问讯等事’——真是无知啊!”如此自责后,他得出结论:“如今在世间,此人以圣生、先出生之义为最尊,以一切功德无与伦比之义为最胜。”于是便对世尊这样说:“乔达摩尊者是至为尊长者,乔达摩尊者是至为优胜者。”这样说了之后,又随喜世尊的法教,说道:“太殊胜了,乔达摩尊者!太殊胜了,乔达摩尊者!”等等。显示巴利原文
15.Evaṃvutte verañjo brāhmaṇoti evaṃ bhagavatā lokānukampakena brāhmaṇaṃ anukampamānena vinigūhitabbepi attano ariyāya jātiyā jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāve vijjattayapakāsikāya dhammadesanāya vutte pītivipphāraparipuṇṇagattacitto verañjo brāhmaṇo taṃ bhagavato ariyāya jātiyā jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvaṃ viditvā ‘‘īdisaṃ nāmāhaṃ sabbalokajeṭṭhaseṭṭhaṃ sabbaguṇasamannāgataṃ sabbaññuṃ ‘aññesaṃ abhivādanādikammaṃ na karotī’ti avacaṃ – ‘dhīratthu vatare aññāṇa’’’nti attānaṃ garahitvā ‘‘ayaṃ dāni loke ariyāya jātiyā purejātaṭṭhena jeṭṭho, sabbaguṇehi appaṭisamaṭṭhena seṭṭho’’ti niṭṭhaṃ gantvā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘jeṭṭho bhavaṃ gotamo seṭṭho bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti. Evañca pana vatvā puna taṃ bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ abbhanumodamāno ‘‘abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṃ, bho gotamā’’tiādimāha.
在此,“abhikkanta”一词用于耗尽、美好、美丽、随喜等义。如“尊者,夜已尽;初夜分已过,比丘僧团久坐”(增支部8.20)等,即表耗尽义。又如“此人令我满意,于这四人中更为优胜、更为殊妙”(增支部4.100)等,则表美好义。显示巴利原文
Tatthāyaṃ abhikkantasaddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhanumodanesu dissati. ‘‘Abhikkantā, bhante, ratti; nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.20) hi khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ me puggalo khamati, imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare.
谁以神通与名声闪耀,礼敬我双足;
以极美的容貌,照亮一切方向。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’ti. –
在(《维曼纳瓦特图》857)等处,是‘美丽’之义;在‘太殊胜了,尊者’等(《长部》1.250)处,则是‘随喜’之义。此处也是随喜之义。由于是随喜,故应知此处是说‘善哉善哉,乔达摩尊者’。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu (vi. va. 857) abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ, bhante’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.250) abbhanumodane. Idhāpi abbhanumodaneyeva. Yasmā ca abbhanumodane, tasmā ‘‘sādhu sādhu, bho gotamā’’ti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
‘于恐惧时、愤怒时、赞赏时、慌忙时、好奇时、惊异时,
于欢笑时、悲伤时、虔信时,智者当用叠语。’
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhaye kodhe pasaṃsāyaṃ, turite kotūhalacchare; Hāse soke pasāde ca, kare āmeḍitaṃ budho’’ti.
由此特征可知,此处是出于净信与赞叹而两度宣说。显示巴利原文
Iminā ca lakkhaṇena idha pasādavasena pasaṃsāvasena cāyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ vuttoti veditabbo.
或者,‘abhikkanta’意为极可爱、极可意、极美妙。在此,一个‘abhikkanta’词赞叹说法,另一个表达自己的净信。此处的意趣是:‘太殊胜了,乔达摩尊者,这便是乔达摩尊者的说法;太殊胜了,这便是缘于乔达摩尊者的说法而生起的净信。’又或者,此语是以两种意义来赞叹:乔达摩尊者的话语殊胜,因能断除过失而殊胜,因能证得功德而殊胜;同样,因能生信而殊胜、能生慧而殊胜;因有意义、有文采而殊胜;因文句浅显、义理深奥而殊胜;因悦耳、入心而殊胜;因不自赞、不毁他而殊胜;因悲怀清凉、智慧明净而殊胜;因初闻悦意、谛思堪任而殊胜;因听闻时得乐、审察时获益而殊胜。应当以这些方式如理结合而理解。显示巴利原文
Atha vā abhikkantanti atiiṭṭhaṃ atimanāpaṃ atisundaranti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ekena abhikkantasaddena desanaṃ thometi, ekena attano pasādaṃ. Ayañhi ettha adhippāyo – ‘‘abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama, yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanā, abhikkantaṃ yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanaṃ āgamma mama pasādo’’ti. Bhagavatoyeva vā vacanaṃ dve dve atthe sandhāya thometi – bhoto gotamassa vacanaṃ abhikkantaṃ dosanāsanato abhikkantaṃ guṇādhigamanato, tathā saddhājananato paññājananato, sātthato sabyañjanato, uttānapadato gambhīratthato, kaṇṇasukhato hadayaṅgamato, anattukkaṃsanato aparavambhanato, karuṇāsītalato paññāvadātato, apātharamaṇīyato vimaddakkhamato, suyyamānasukhato vīmaṃsiyamānahitatoti evamādīhi yojetabbaṃ.
此后,又以四种譬喻来赞叹说法本身。其中,‘倒覆的’指被放置成口朝下,或成为面朝下。‘令其朝上’指使其口朝上。‘隐藏的’指被草、叶等遮盖。‘揭开’指打开。‘迷路者’指迷失方向者。‘指示道路’指握住其手说‘这是路’。‘黑暗中’指在黑半月的十四日、半夜、密林丛、云层这四重黑暗之中。以上是字面义。而意趣的联结如下:如同有人将倒覆的令其朝上,世尊将我这个背离正法、住立于非正法者,从非正法中扶起;如同揭开隐藏的,世尊将迦叶佛的教法隐没以来被邪见丛林覆盖的教法揭开;如同为迷路者指示道路,世尊为我这个行于邪道、歧途者,指示了天界与解脱之道;如同在黑暗中持油灯,世尊为我这个沉没于愚痴黑暗、不见佛法僧三宝之相者,持来能破除那覆盖的愚痴黑暗的说法之灯。因为乔达摩尊者以这些方式为我开示,所以说‘以种种方式开示了法’。显示巴利原文
Tato parampi catūhi upamāhi desanaṃyeva thometi. Tattha nikkujjitanti adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ, heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ vā. Ukkujjeyyāti uparimukhaṃ kareyya. Paṭicchannanti tiṇapaṇṇādipaṭicchāditaṃ. Vivareyyāti ugghāṭeyya. Mūḷhassāti disāmūḷhassa. Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti hatthe gahetvā esa maggoti vadeyya. Andhakāreti kāḷapakkhacātuddasī aḍḍharatta-ghanavanasaṇḍa-meghapaṭalehi caturaṅge tamasi. Ayaṃ tāva anuttānapadattho. Ayaṃ pana adhippāyayojanā – yathā koci nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyya, evaṃ saddhammavimukhaṃ asaddhamme patiṭṭhitaṃ maṃ asaddhammā vuṭṭhāpentena; yathā paṭicchannaṃ vivareyya, evaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānā pabhuti micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchannaṃ sāsanaṃ vivarantena; yathā mūḷhassa maggaṃ ācikkheyya, evaṃ kummaggamicchāmaggappaṭipannassa me saggamokkhamaggaṃ ācikkhantena; yathā andhakāre telapajjotaṃ dhāreyya, evaṃ mohandhakāre nimuggassa me buddhādiratanattayarūpāni apassato tappaṭicchādakamohandhakāraviddhaṃsakadesanāpajjotaṃ dhārentena, mayhaṃ bhotā gotamena etehi pariyāyehi pakāsitattā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsitoti.
关于净信相的论说显示巴利原文
Pasannākārakathā
如此赞叹说法之后,他因闻此法而对三宝生起净信之心,为表达这份净信,便说出“Esāha”等语。其中,“Esāha”即“eso ahaṃ”,意为“我”。在“我皈依乔达摩尊者”一句中,“我”怀着“乔达摩尊者是皈依、是庇护、是苦难的救护者、是利益的施与者”这样的意趣,前往、亲近、侍奉、承事乔达摩尊者;又或者,意为我如此了知、如此觉悟。因为那些具有“前往”含义的词根,同时也具备“觉悟”的意义,所以说“gacchāmi”也有“我了知、我觉悟”之意。至于“以及法,以及比丘僧团”,此处的“法”,是指能够令已证道、已现证灭、依教奉行者不再堕入四恶趣的持守之法;就其根本含义而言,则是指圣道与涅槃。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,于一切有为法中,圣八支道于他们中被称为最上。”(《增支部》4.34)等等。这里的“法”所指的不仅是圣道与涅槃,还包括伴随着圣果的教法。在《恰塔玛那瓦卡维摩那》中也说到:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ desanaṃ thometvā imāya desanāya ratanattaye pasannacitto pasannākāraṃ karonto ‘‘esāha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha esāhanti eso ahaṃ. Bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ saraṇanti gacchāmi; bhavaṃ me gotamo saraṇaṃ, parāyaṇaṃ, aghassa tātā, hitassa ca vidhātāti iminā adhippāyena bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ gacchāmi bhajāmi sevāmi payirupāsāmi , evaṃ vā jānāmi bujjhāmīti. Yesañhi dhātūnaṃ gatiattho, buddhipi tesaṃ attho; tasmā ‘‘gacchāmī’’ti imassa jānāmi bujjhāmīti ayampi attho vutto. Dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcāti ettha pana adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne ca catūsu apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammo; so atthato ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ – ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34) vitthāro. Na kevalañca ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca, api ca kho ariyaphalehi saddhiṃ pariyattidhammopi. Vuttampi hetaṃ chattamāṇavakavimāne –
“离贪、无垢、无忧、无为、无嗔恚之法,
这甜美、娴熟、善分别的法,你应当前来皈依此法。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ; Madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ, dhammamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 887);
在此,“离贪”即离染,说的是道;“不动、无忧”说的是果;“无为法”说的是涅槃。“不违逆、甘美、娴熟、善分别”,是指由三藏所分别的一切法蕴。由见与戒的集合而和合者名为僧伽,就实质而言,即八种圣者的集合。这也正是在那座殿堂中所宣说的:显示巴利原文
Ettha hi rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Anejamasokanti phalaṃ. Dhammamasaṅkhatanti nibbānaṃ. Appaṭikūlaṃ madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattanti piṭakattayena vibhattā sabbadhammakkhandhāti. Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātena saṃhatoti saṅgho, so atthato aṭṭhaariyapuggalasamūho. Vuttañhetaṃ tasmiṃyeva vimāne –
于四双八辈的清净者中,布施即被认为有大果报;
这八位见法者,你应皈依此僧伽。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yattha ca dinnamahapphalamāhu, catūsu sucīsu purisayugesu; Aṭṭha ca puggaladhammadasā te, saṅghamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 888);
比丘之集合,称为比丘僧伽。至此,婆罗门宣说了三种皈依。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho bhikkhusaṅgho. Ettāvatā ca brāhmaṇo tīṇi saraṇagamanāni paṭivedesi.
关于皈依的论说显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanakathā
现在,为了对这三种皈依善巧,应了知:皈依、皈依行、皈依者、显示巴利原文
Idāni tesveva tīsu saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ, yo saraṇaṃ gacchati,
皈依的类别、皈依的果、杂染、破坏——这些是应知的分科。然而,若在这里解释,会使《律藏》的缘起部分过于冗重,因此不加阐述。有意深究者,可从《破除迷执》——《中部义注》的《怖畏经》注释,或从《吉祥光悦》——《长部义注》的皈依注释中获知。显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanappabhedo, saraṇagamanaphalaṃ, saṃkileso, bhedoti ayaṃ vidhi vedi tabbo. So pana idha vuccamāno atibhāriyaṃ vinayanidānaṃ karotīti na vutto. Atthikehi pana papañcasūdaniyaṃ vā majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ bhayabheravasuttavaṇṇanato (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.56) sumaṅgalavilāsiniyaṃ vā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.250) saraṇavaṇṇanato gahetabboti.
近事男身份表白之论显示巴利原文
Upāsakattapaṭivedanākathā
“愿乔达摩尊者摄受我为近事男”,意思是:愿乔达摩尊者以这样的方式摄受我——“此人是近事男”。在此,为了善巧了解近事男的相关规定,应了知以下要点:谁是近事男?为何称为近事男?他的戒是什么?活命方式是什么?什么属于衰损?什么属于成就?由于会使内容过于沉重,在此不作详述,有志者应从《破除迷执》即《中部义注》所述的方法中了知。在“从今日起”一语中,此“agga”一词有“开始、末端、部分、最胜”等含义。例如:“从今日起,善哉守门人,我关闭尼乾陀男女之门”等语中,取“开始”义;“即以指尖触彼指尖”、“蔗尖、竹尖”等处,取“末端”义;“酸味部分、甜味部分、苦味部分”、“诸比丘,我允许以精舍部分或周房部分分配”等语中,取“部分”义;“诸比丘,凡无足、二足……乃至……如来被称为他们之最胜”等语中,取“最胜”义。但在此处,应视为“开始”。因此,“从今日起”在这里应理解为“以今日为开始”。“今日”即指“现今”。或读作“ajjadagge”,其中的“d”是连音字,意为“以今日为开始”。“有命”即与命同在,只要我的生命延续,就以此三皈依为皈依,无显示巴利原文
Upāsakaṃmaṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretūti maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo ‘‘upāsako aya’’nti evaṃ dhāretūti attho. Upāsakavidhikosallatthaṃ panettha ko upāsako, kasmā upāsakoti vuccati, kimassa sīlaṃ, ko ājīvo, kā vipatti, kā sampattīti idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ. Taṃ atibhāriyakaraṇato idha na vibhattaṃ, atthikehi pana papañcasūdaniyaṃ majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.56) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ajjataggeti ettha ayaṃ aggasaddo ādikoṭikoṭṭhāsaseṭṭhesu dissati. ‘‘Ajjatagge, samma dovārika, āvarāmi dvāraṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ nigaṇṭhīna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.70) hi ādimhi dissati. ‘‘Teneva aṅgulaggena taṃ aṅgulaggaṃ parāmaseyya (kathā. 441), ucchaggaṃ veḷagga’’ntiādīsu koṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Ambilaggaṃ vā madhuraggaṃ vā tittakaggaṃ vā (saṃ. ni. 5.374) anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vihāraggena vā pariveṇaggena vā bhājetu’’ntiādīsu (cūḷava. 318) koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā…pe… tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.34) seṭṭhe. Idha panāyaṃ ādimhi daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā ajjataggeti ajjataṃ ādiṃ katvāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Ajjatanti ajjabhāvanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ajjadagge icceva vā pāṭho, dakāro padasandhikaro, ajja aggaṃ katvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇupetanti pāṇehi upetaṃ, yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva upetaṃ anaññasatthukaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi saraṇagataṃ maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretu jānātu, ahañhi sacepi me tikhiṇena asinā sīsaṃ chindeyyuṃ, neva buddhaṃ ‘‘na buddho’’ti vā, dhammaṃ ‘‘na dhammo’’ti vā, saṅghaṃ ‘‘na saṅgho’’ti vā vadeyyanti. Ettha ca brāhmaṇo pāṇupetaṃ saraṇagatanti puna saraṇagamanaṃ vadanto attasanniyyātanaṃ pakāsetīti veditabbo.
如此将自己奉献后,他愿侍奉世尊及其徒众,便说道:“愿乔达摩尊者与比丘僧团一起,接受我在毗兰若的雨安居。”这是什么意思呢?——这是说:“愿乔达摩尊者摄受我为优婆塞,并接受我在毗兰若的雨安居;为摄受我故,请应允在毗兰若附近住三个月。”世尊默然接受了。即闻其言后,世尊未动身业或语业,于内心安住忍辱,以默然接受;也就是说,为了摄受婆罗门,他以意答应了。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ attānaṃ niyyātetvā bhagavantaṃ saparisaṃ upaṭṭhātukāmo āha – ‘‘adhivāsetu ca me bhavaṃ gotamo verañjāyaṃ vassāvāsaṃ saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghenā’’ti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – upāsakañca maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretu, adhivāsetu ca me verañjāyaṃ vassāvāsaṃ, tayo māse verañjaṃ upanissāya mama anuggahatthaṃ vāsaṃ sampaṭicchatūti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvenāti athassa vacanaṃ sutvā bhagavā kāyaṅgaṃ vā vācaṅgaṃ vā acopetvā abbhantareyeva khantiṃ cāretvā tuṇhībhāvena adhivāsesi; brāhmaṇassa anuggahatthaṃ manasāva sampaṭicchīti vuttaṃ hoti.
那时,毗兰若婆罗门了知世尊已接受后,心想:“如果沙门乔达摩不接受我,他会以身或语拒绝。然而他既未拒绝,而于内心保持忍辱,因此是以意接受了我。”他因善巧观察相状,如是了知世尊已接受,便从座起身,向世尊敬礼,右绕三匝。虽然从初来时,他就因不行礼敬年长婆罗门等而受责备,但现在已了知佛陀功德,以身语意再三礼敬犹不满足,合掌举至头顶,十指并拢,光辉闪耀,面向世尊倒退而行,直至视线所及之处,在视线之外顶礼后离去。显示巴利原文
Athakho verañjo brāhmaṇo bhagavato adhivāsanaṃ viditvāti atha verañjo brāhmaṇo sace me samaṇo gotamo nādhivāseyya, kāyena vā vācāya vā paṭikkhipeyya. Yasmā pana appaṭikkhipitvā abbhantare khantiṃ dhāresi, tasmā me manasāva adhivāsesīti evaṃ ākārasallakkhaṇakusalatāya bhagavato adhivāsanaṃ viditvā, attano nisinnāsanato vuṭṭhāya catūsu disāsu bhagavantaṃ sakkaccaṃ vanditvā tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā āgatakālato pabhuti jātimahallakabrāhmaṇānaṃ abhivādanādīni na karotīti vigarahitvāpi idāni viññātabuddhaguṇo kāyena vācāya manasā ca anekakkhattuṃ vandantopi atittoyeva hutvā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ paggayha sirasmiṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā yāva dassanavisayo tāva paṭimukhoyeva apakkamitvā dassanavisayaṃ vijahanaṭṭhāne vanditvā pakkāmi.
饥馑之论显示巴利原文
Dubbhikkhakathā
16 那时,毗兰若发生了饥荒:即在毗兰若婆罗门请求世尊在毗兰若附近雨安居的期间,毗兰若发生了饥荒。“饥荒”意为难得食物。然而,那种难得食物的状况,在人们无信、不净信之处,即使丰收时节谷物极度昂贵时也会发生。但在毗兰若,并非如此,而是由于收成不好、饥饿所致。因此,为了说明此义,而说“生活困难”等。其中,“生活困难”指以两种方式生活。所谓“生活”即生存方式,分为两种:心之生存、心之希求。“我们在此乞食,能得些许否?或不能?”“我们能活命否?或不能?”这便是此处意趣。显示巴利原文
16.Tena kho pana samayena verañjā dubbhikkhā hotīti yasmiṃ samaye verañjena brāhmaṇena bhagavā verañjaṃ upanissāya vassāvāsaṃ yācito , tena samayena verañjā dubbhikkhā hoti. Dubbhikkhāti dullabhabhikkhā; sā pana dullabhabhikkhatā yattha manussā assaddhā honti appasannā, tattha susassakālepi atisamagghepi pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇe hoti. Verañjāyaṃ pana yasmā na tathā ahosi, apica kho dusassatāya chātakadosena ahosi tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento dvīhitikātiādimāha. Tattha dvīhitikāti dvidhā pavattaīhitikā. Īhitaṃ nāma iriyā dvidhā pavattā – cittairiyā, cittaīhā. ‘‘Ettha lacchāma nu kho kiñci bhikkhamānā na lacchāmā’’ti, ‘‘jīvituṃ vā sakkhissāma nu kho no’’ti ayamettha adhippāyo.
或者,“dvīhitikā”意为难以维生,īhita、īhā、iriyana、pavattana、jīvita等词是同义词。因此,这里指以痛苦维持生计,故称“dvīhitikā”,这是此处所表明的词义。“setaṭṭhikā”意为那里有白色的骨骸,故称“setaṭṭhikā”。据说,那些乞讨终日而一无所获便死去的可怜人,其骨骸散落在各处,颜色如蛇菇一般。另一种读法是“setaṭṭikā”,其含义为:那里有白色的骨骸,故称“setaṭṭikā”。或者,“aṭṭi”指病苦、疾病。在那里,庄稼结穗时,被白病侵害,浆汁断绝、未成米粒,长出惨白的稻穗或大麦、小麦穗,因此称为“setaṭṭikā”。显示巴利原文
Atha vā dvīhitikāti dujjīvikā, īhitaṃ īhā iriyanaṃ pavattanaṃ jīvitantiādīni padāni ekatthāni. Tasmā dukkhena īhitaṃ ettha pavattatīti dvīhitikāti ayamettha padattho. Setaṭṭhikāti setakāni aṭṭhīni etthāti setaṭṭhikā. Divasampi yācitvā kiñci aladdhā matānaṃ kapaṇamanussānaṃ ahicchattakavaṇṇehi aṭṭhīhi tatra tatra parikiṇṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Setaṭṭikātipi pāṭho. Tassattho – setā aṭṭi etthāti setaṭṭikā. Aṭṭīti āturatā byādhi rogo. Tattha ca sassānaṃ gabbhaggahaṇakāle setakarogena upahatameva pacchinnakhīraṃ aggahitataṇḍulaṃ paṇḍarapaṇḍaraṃ sālisīsaṃ vā yavagodhūmasīsaṃ vā nikkhamati, tasmā ‘‘setaṭṭikā’’ti vuccati.
在播种时节,即使妥善准备,所说的谷物在那里也只长出签子,故称“salākāvuttā”;或者,在那里靠签子维持生计,故称“salākāvuttā”。这是什么意思呢?据说,在那里,当买谷物的人来到卖谷物的人那里时,强壮的人压倒弱小的人,买了谷物便走。弱小的人得不到谷物,便大声喧嚷。卖谷物的人说:“我们会照顾到所有人。”于是让量谷者坐在谷仓旁,又让监秤者坐在一旁。需要谷物的人来到监秤者面前。监秤者按来者顺序收钱后,写下签子:“应给某某人这么些。”然后交给他们。他们拿着签子到量谷者那里,按给签的顺序领取谷物。如此,在那里靠签子维生,故称“salākāvuttā”。显示巴利原文
Vappakāle suṭṭhu abhisaṅkharitvāpi vuttasassaṃ tattha salākā eva sampajjatīti salākāvuttā; salākāya vā tattha jīvitaṃ pavattentīti salākāvuttā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Tattha kira dhaññavikkayakānaṃ santikaṃ kayakesu gatesu dubbalamanusse abhibhavitvā balavamanussāva dhaññaṃ kiṇitvā gacchanti. Dubbalamanussā alabhamānā mahāsaddaṃ karonti. Dhaññavikkayakā ‘‘sabbesaṃ saṅgahaṃ karissāmā’’ti dhaññakaraṇaṭṭhāne dhaññamāpakaṃ nisīdāpetvā ekapasse vaṇṇajjhakkhaṃ nisīdāpesuṃ. Dhaññatthikā vaṇṇajjhakkhassa santikaṃ gacchanti. So āgatapaṭipāṭiyā mūlaṃ gahetvā ‘‘itthannāmassa ettakaṃ dātabba’’nti salākaṃ likhitvā deti, te taṃ gahetvā dhaññamāpakassa santikaṃ gantvā dinnapaṭipāṭiyā dhaññaṃ gaṇhanti. Evaṃ salākāya tattha jīvitaṃ pavattentīti salākāvuttā.
“难以靠拾穗维持生计”的意思是:靠拾穗所得,难以维生。手持钵盂,如同圣者们那样拾穗、行乞食,以那样的拾穗维生是困难的——这便是所说之义。据说,那时在那里,即使在七八个村庄行乞,一整天也得不到足以维生的食物。显示巴利原文
Na sukarā uñchena paggahena yāpetunti paggahena yo uñcho, tena yāpetuṃ na sukarā. Pattaṃ gahetvā yaṃ ariyā uñchaṃ karonti, bhikkhācariyaṃ caranti, tena uñchena yāpetuṃ na sukarāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tadā kira tattha sattaṭṭhagāme piṇḍāya caritvā ekadivasampi yāpanamattaṃ na labhanti.
那时,北方来的马商……世尊听到了臼杵声。这里的“那时”,是指世尊依止毘兰若入雨安居的那个时候。那些住在北方,或从北方而来、因而得名“北方马商”的商人,在北方产马地买了五百匹马。他们为求两倍三倍的利润,带着这大约五百匹作为商品的马前往他国,途中便在毘兰若入雨安居。何以如此?因为在那地方,雨季四个月无法行路。他们抵达后,在城外不被水淹处,为自己建造住所与马厩,并围起篱笆。那些住处便称为“马圈”。因此说:“他们在马圈里为比丘们准备了每人一钵盂的粗碾麦。”“每人一钵盂的粗碾麦”,是指每位比丘一钵盂量的粗碾麦。一钵盂约为一升,足够一人维生。这也曾说过:“一钵盂饭,不足两人。”(《本生经》2.21.192)“粗碾麦”即去壳后蒸过取出的麦米。因为若带壳,便会生虫,不堪行路。所以那些商人准备了堪能行路的麦米上路,心想:“在骡马草料难得的地方,这就作为马料。”显示巴利原文
Tena kho pana samayena uttarāpathakā assavāṇijā…pe… assosi kho bhagavā udukkhalasaddanti – tenāti yasmiṃ samaye bhagavā verañjaṃ upanissāya vassāvāsaṃ upagato tena samayena. Uttarāpathavāsikā uttarāpathato vā āgatattā evaṃ laddhavohārā assavāṇijā uttarāpathe assānaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhāne pañca assasatāni gahetvā diguṇaṃ tiguṇaṃ lābhaṃ patthayamānā desantaraṃ gacchantā tehi attano vikkāyikabhaṇḍabhūtehi pañcamattehi assasatehi verañjaṃ vassāvāsaṃ upagatā honti. Kasmā? Na hi sakkā tasmiṃ dese vassike cattāro māse addhānaṃ paṭipajjituṃ. Upagacchantā ca bahinagare udakena anajjhottharaṇīye ṭhāne attano ca vāsāgārāni assānañca mandiraṃ kārāpetvā vatiyā parikkhipiṃsu. Tāni tesaṃ vasanaṭṭhānāni ‘‘assamaṇḍalikāyo’’ti paññāyiṃsu. Tenāha – ‘‘tehi assamaṇḍalikāsu bhikkhūnaṃ patthapatthapulakaṃ paññattaṃ hotī’’ti. Patthapatthapulakanti ekamekassa bhikkhuno patthapatthapamāṇaṃ pulakaṃ. Pattho nāma nāḷimattaṃ hoti, ekassa purisassa alaṃ yāpanāya. Vuttampi hetaṃ – ‘‘patthodano nālamayaṃ duvinna’’nti (jā. 2.21.192). Pulakaṃ nāma nitthusaṃ katvā ussedetvā gahitayavataṇḍulā vuccanti. Yadi hi sathusā honti, pāṇakā vijjhanti, addhānakkhamā na honti. Tasmā te vāṇijā addhānakkhamaṃ katvā yavataṇḍulamādāya addhānaṃ paṭipajjanti ‘‘yattha assānaṃ khādanīyaṃ tiṇaṃ dullabhaṃ bhavissati, tatthetaṃ assabhattaṃ bhavissatī’’ti.
他们为什么为比丘们准备那些呢?据说:他们不像南方人那样无信、不净信,而是有信、净信,以佛为皈依,以法为皈依,以僧为皈依。他们在午前因事入城时,于两三天里见到七八位比丘,衣著整齐,威仪具足,行遍全城乞食,却一无所获。看见后,他们心想:“尊者们依止此城入雨安居,而饥荒正发生,他们什么也得不到,极为疲劳。我们是外来者,无法每天为他们准备粥和饭。但我们的马早晚各得一次饲料。不如我们从每匹马的早餐饲料中,分出给每位比丘一钵盂粗碾麦。这样尊者们不致疲劳,马也能维生。”于是他们来到比丘们面前,说明此事,请求道:“尊者,请接受这一钵盂粗碾麦,随意处理后食用。”于是每天准备一钵盂粗碾麦。因此说:“他们在马圈里为比丘们准备了每人一钵盂的粗碾麦。”显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana tehi taṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paññattanti? Vuccate – ‘‘na hi te dakkhiṇāpathamanussā viya assaddhā appasannā, te pana saddhā pasannā buddhamāmakā, dhammamāmakā, saṅghamāmakā; te pubbaṇhasamayaṃ kenacideva karaṇīyena nagaraṃ pavisantā dve tayo divase addasaṃsu sattaṭṭha bhikkhū sunivatthe supārute iriyāpathasampanne sakalampi nagaraṃ piṇḍāya caritvā kiñci alabhamāne. Disvāna nesaṃ etadahosi – ‘‘ayyā imaṃ nagaraṃ upanissāya vassaṃ upagatā; chātakañca vattati, na ca kiñci labhanti, ativiya kilamanti. Mayañcamha āgantukā, na sakkoma nesaṃ devasikaṃ yāguñca bhattañca paṭiyādetuṃ. Amhākaṃ pana assā sāyañca pāto ca dvikkhattuṃ bhattaṃ labhanti. Yaṃnūna mayaṃ ekamekassa assassa pātarāsabhattato ekamekassa bhikkhuno patthapatthapulakaṃ dadeyyāma. Evaṃ ayyā ca na kilamissanti , assā ca yāpessantī’’ti. Te bhikkhūnaṃ santikaṃ gantvā etamatthaṃ ārocetvā ‘‘bhante, tumhe patthapatthapulakaṃ paṭiggahetvā yaṃ vā taṃ vā katvā paribhuñjathā’’ti yācitvā devasikaṃ patthapatthapulakaṃ paññapesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tehi assamaṇḍalikāsu bhikkhūnaṃ patthapatthapulakaṃ paññattaṃ hotī’’ti.
所谓“施设”,是以常施食的简要方式而确立的。现在,在“比丘们于午前时分,著下衣……”等句中,“午前时分”是指白天的前段时分,即午前时分的意思。或者说,午前的时分称为午前时分,即指午前的一个时刻。如此,在持续关系中,此处获得了业格。“著下衣”即穿著、披覆,这应理解为更换在寺内的住处衣,因为他们在此之前并非未穿著。“持钵与衣”即用手持钵、以身持衣,取来并妥善披覆,也就是“持用”的意思。因为无论以何种方式拿取,都称为“持取”,例如“持取后便离去”(《长部》1.21)。“得不到团食”,是指即使走遍整个毘兰若城,且不说团食,连一句“请取用”的话也得不到。显示巴利原文
Paññattanti niccabhattasaṅkhepena ṭhapitaṃ. Idāni bhikkhū pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvātiādīsu pubbaṇhasamayanti divasassa pubbabhāgasamayaṃ, pubbaṇhasamayeti attho. Pubbaṇhe vā samayaṃ pubbaṇhasamayaṃ, pubbaṇhe ekaṃ khaṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ labbhati. Nivāsetvāti paridahitvā, vihāranivāsanaparivattanavasenetaṃ veditabbaṃ. Na hi te tato pubbe anivatthā ahesuṃ. Pattacīvaramādāyāti pattaṃ hatthehi cīvaraṃ kāyena ādiyitvā sampaṭicchādetvā, dhāretvāti attho. Yena vā tena vā hi pakārena gaṇhantā ādāyaicceva vuccanti, yathā ‘‘samādāyeva pakkamatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.21). Piṇḍaṃ alabhamānāti sakalampi verañjaṃ caritvā tiṭṭhatu piṇḍo, antamaso ‘‘aticchathā’’ti vācampi alabhamānā.
“将一捧捧粗谷带到寺院”,指于途经各处所得的一捧捧粗谷,一一取回寺院。“在臼中捣了又捣而食用”,指长老们没有净人能为他们拿这些粗谷煮粥或做饭。自己煮食既不符合沙门仪则,也不被允许。他们心想:“这样既能生活轻便,又能免于自己煮食。”于是八人、十人聚在一起,在臼中反复捣碎,各自将所得的一份用水浸湿后食用。这样食用后,他们少事少业,专注于沙门法的修习。然而,那些马商供养世尊粗谷,以及相配的酥、蜜、糖。阿难尊者取来后,在石上研磨。具福德、智慧之人所作,总是令人悦意的。随后,他将研磨后的粗谷,以酥等善加调和,奉呈世尊。此时,诸天神注入了天界之味。世尊便进食。食已,以果定度日。从此以后,世尊不再外出乞食。显示巴利原文
Patthapatthapulakaṃ ārāmaṃ āharitvāti gatagataṭṭhāne laddhaṃ ekamekaṃ patthapatthapulakaṃ gahetvā ārāmaṃ netvā. Udukkhale koṭṭetvā koṭṭetvā paribhuñjantīti therānaṃ koci kappiyakārako natthi, yo nesaṃ taṃ gahetvā yāguṃ vā bhattaṃ vā paceyya. Sāmampi pacanaṃ samaṇasāruppaṃ na hoti na ca vaṭṭati. Te evaṃ no sallahukavuttitā ca bhavissati, sāmapākaparimocanañcāti aṭṭha aṭṭha janā vā dasa dasa janā vā ekato hutvā udukkhale koṭṭetvā koṭṭetvā sakaṃ sakaṃ paṭivīsaṃ udakena temetvā paribhuñjanti. Evaṃ paribhuñjitvā appossukkā samaṇadhammaṃ karonti . Bhagavato pana te assavāṇijā patthapulakañca denti, tadupiyañca sappimadhusakkaraṃ. Taṃ āyasmā ānando āharitvā silāyaṃ pisati. Puññavatā paṇḍitapurisena kataṃ manāpameva hoti. Atha naṃ pisitvā sappiādīhi sammā yojetvā bhagavato upanāmesi. Athettha devatā dibbojaṃ pakkhipanti. Taṃ bhagavā paribhuñjati. Paribhuñjitvā phalasamāpattiyā kālaṃ atināmeti. Na tato paṭṭhāya piṇḍāya carati.
那么,当时阿难尊者是世尊的侍者吗?是,但他尚未获得侍者之位。因为世尊在初成道后的二十年间,并没有固定的常随侍者。有时是那伽沙摩罗长老侍奉世尊,有时是那耆多长老,有时是弥醯耶长老,有时是优波婆那长老,有时是娑伽陀长老,有时是离车族之子善星。他们随自己的意愿而侍奉,想离开时便离开。阿难尊者在他们侍奉时少事少业,在他们离开后便自己履行义务。世尊心想:“虽然这位亲族中最胜者尚未获得侍者之位,但在此场合,他最为合适。”因此世尊默然应许。故说:“阿难尊者将粗谷在石上研磨后,奉呈世尊,世尊便进食。”显示巴利原文
Kiṃ panānandatthero tadā bhagavato upaṭṭhāko hotīti? Hoti, no ca kho upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ laddhā. Bhagavato hi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsativassantare nibaddhupaṭṭhāko nāma natthi. Kadāci nāgasamālatthero bhagavantaṃ upaṭṭhāsi, kadāci nāgitatthero, kadāci meghiyatthero, kadāci upavāṇatthero, kadāci sāgatatthero, kadāci sunakkhatto licchaviputto. Te attano ruciyā upaṭṭhahitvā yadā icchanti tadā pakkamanti. Ānandatthero tesu tesu upaṭṭhahantesu appossukko hoti, pakkantesu sayameva vattapaṭipattiṃ karoti. Bhagavāpi kiñcāpi me ñātiseṭṭho upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ na tāva labhati, atha kho evarūpesu ṭhānesu ayameva patirūpoti adhivāsesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘āyasmā panānando patthapulakaṃ silāyaṃ pisitvā bhagavato upanāmesi, taṃ bhagavā paribhuñjatī’’ti.
难道人们于饥馑时,不生起极大精进、勤修福德,即使自己不吃,也认为应当布施给比丘们吗?那么,他们当时为何连一匙之食也不供养呢?况且,那位毘兰若婆罗门曾以极大热忱邀请世尊雨安居,他为何连世尊的存在都不知道呢?答:这是由于魔罗的扰乱。毘兰若婆罗门刚从世尊身边离开,魔罗便扰乱并迷惑了整座城邑,乃至周围约一由旬内、凡能在午前乞食并返回的地方,使所有人都处于不觉知的状态,然后离去。因此,没有一人认为应当做,哪怕只是如法问讯。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca manussā dubbhikkhakāle ativiya ussāhajātā puññāni karonti, attanā abhuñjitvāpi bhikkhūnaṃ dātabbaṃ maññanti. Te tadā kasmā kaṭacchubhikkhampi na adaṃsu? Ayañca verañjo brāhmaṇo mahatā ussāhena bhagavantaṃ vassāvāsaṃ yāci, so kasmā bhagavato atthibhāvampi na jānātīti? Vuccate – mārāvaṭṭanāya. Verañjañhi brāhmaṇaṃ bhagavato santikā pakkantamattameva sakalañca nagaraṃ samantā ca yojanamattaṃ yattha sakkā purebhattaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā paccāgantuṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ māro āvaṭṭetvā mohetvā sabbesaṃ asallakkhaṇabhāvaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Tasmā na koci antamaso sāmīcikammampi kattabbaṃ maññittha.
莫非世尊不知魔罗的扰乱,便在那里入雨安居吗?并非不知。那么,为何不在瞻波、舍卫城、王舍城等处择一处入雨安居呢?且不说瞻波、舍卫城、王舍城,纵使世尊当年前往北俱卢洲或三十三天城入雨安居,魔罗也会扰乱彼处。据说,那一年魔罗内心被极大的嗔恚所缠缚。然而,世尊在此见到一个特别的因由:‘马商们将护持比丘们。’因此,世尊便在毘兰若入雨安居。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana bhagavāpi mārāvaṭṭanaṃ ajānitvāva tattha vassaṃ upagatoti? No ajānitvā. Atha kasmā campā-sāvatthi-rājagahādīnaṃ aññatarasmiṃ na upagatoti? Tiṭṭhantu campā-sāvatthi-rājagahādīni, sacepi bhagavā tasmiṃ saṃvacchare uttarakuruṃ vā tidasapuraṃ vā gantvā vassaṃ upagaccheyya, tampi māro āvaṭṭeyya. So kira taṃ saṃvaccharaṃ ativiya āghātena pariyuṭṭhitacitto ahosi. Idha pana bhagavā imaṃ atirekakāraṇaṃ addasa – ‘‘assavāṇijā bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgahaṃ karissantī’’ti. Tasmā verañjāyameva vassaṃ upagacchi.
那么,魔罗不能扰乱那些商人吗?并非不能,但他们是在扰乱结束之后才来的。既然他们已经折返,为何魔罗不再扰乱?因为无能为力。他无力障碍对如来所呈献的食物、常恒的布施,或已确立的义务。有四件事,无人能作障碍。哪四件?对如来所呈献的食物,常恒的布施,已确立的义务,以及已施舍的四种资具,无人能作障碍。对诸佛的寿命,无人能作障碍。对八十种随形好及身光,无人能作障碍。即便是日月、天、梵天的光明,遇到如来随形好与身光之处,其光芒亦被摧破。对诸佛的一切知智,无人能作障碍。对于这些事,无人能作障碍。因此,应知魔罗未能障碍,世尊与声闻僧团当时便食用了那些食物。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana māro vāṇijake āvaṭṭetuṃ na sakkotīti? No na sakkoti, te pana āvaṭṭitapariyosāne āgamiṃsu. Paṭinivattitvā kasmā na āvaṭṭetīti? Avisahatāya. Na hi so tathāgatassa abhihaṭabhikkhāya nibaddhadānassa appitavattassa antarāyaṃ kātuṃ visahati. Catunnañhi na sakkā antarāyo kātuṃ. Katamesaṃ catunnaṃ? Tathāgatassa abhihaṭabhikkhāsaṅkhepena vā nibaddhadānassa appitavattasaṅkhepena vā pariccattānaṃ catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ na sakkā kenaci antarāyo kātuṃ. Buddhānaṃ jīvitassa na sakkā kenaci antarāyo kātuṃ. Asītiyā anubyañjanānaṃ byāmappabhāya vā na sakkā kenaci antarāyo kātuṃ. Candimasūriyadevabrahmānampi hi pabhā tathāgatassa anubyañjanabyāmappabhāppadesaṃ patvā vihatānubhāvā honti. Buddhānaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇassa na sakkā kenaci antarāyo kātunti imesaṃ catunnaṃ na sakkā kenaci antarāyo kātuṃ. Tasmā mārena akatantarāyaṃ bhikkhaṃ bhagavā sasāvakasaṅgho tadā paribhuñjatīti veditabbo.
当他如此受用时,有一日,世尊听到了杵声——世尊听见比丘们捣着碎米,杵棒碰撞所发出的杵声。此后,‘诸如来虽知亦……’等语,是为了阐明后文所问‘阿难,那杵声究竟是什么?’的解答而说。在此简释如下:名为如来者,即使知道,若有发问的因缘,便会发问;若无发问的因缘,即使知道,也不会发问。然而,因诸佛绝无不知,故不说‘不知’。他们了知时机而问——若发问的时机成熟,便这样了知时机而问;若时机不成熟,亦这样了知时机而不问。如此发问时,如来只问与义相应、与理相应的问题,不问与无义相应的问题。何以故?因为如来于无义之事已‘断桥’。所谓桥,即是道路,意即以道断除、彻底截断那样的言说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paribhuñjanto ca ekadivasaṃ assosi kho bhagavā udukkhalasaddanti bhagavā patthapatthapulakaṃ koṭṭentānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ musalasaṅghaṭṭajanitaṃ udukkhalasaddaṃ suṇi. Tato paraṃ jānantāpi tathāgatāti evamādi yaṃ parato ‘‘kinnu kho so, ānanda, udukkhalasaddo’’ti pucchi, tassa parihāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepavaṇṇanā – tathāgatā nāma jānantāpi sace tādisaṃ pucchākāraṇaṃ hoti, pucchanti. Sace pana tādisaṃ pucchākāraṇaṃ natthi, jānantāpi na pucchanti. Yasmā pana buddhānaṃ ajānanaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā ajānantāpīti na vuttaṃ. Kālaṃ viditvā pucchantīti sace tassā pucchāya so kālo hoti, evaṃ taṃ kālaṃ viditvā pucchanti; sace na hoti , evampi kālaṃ viditvāva na pucchanti. Evaṃ pucchantāpi ca atthasaṃhitaṃ tathāgatā pucchanti, yaṃ atthanissitaṃ kāraṇanissitaṃ, tadeva pucchanti, no anatthasaṃhitaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā anatthasaṃhite setughāto tathāgatānaṃ. Setu vuccati maggo, maggeneva tādisassa vacanassa ghāto, samucchedoti vuttaṃ hoti.
今为彰显“与义相应”——如来所问乃依止于义之语,而说“以二种理由”等。其中,“理由”即是因缘。“我们将说法”:将讲述与事缘相应的经,或讲述与宿世因缘相应的本生。“或为弟子制定学处”:将藉由发问揭示违犯,制定轻或重的学处,确立教令。显示巴利原文
Idāni atthasaṃhitanti ettha yaṃ atthasannissitaṃ vacanaṃ tathāgatā pucchanti, taṃ dassento ‘‘dvīhākārehī’’ti ādimāha. Tattha ākārehīti kāraṇehi. Dhammaṃ vā desessāmāti aṭṭhuppattiyuttaṃ suttaṃ vā pubbacaritakāraṇayuttaṃ jātakaṃ vā kathayissāma. Sāvakānaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃpaññapessāmāti sāvakānaṃ vā tāya pucchāya vītikkamaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā garukaṃ vā lahukaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāma āṇaṃ ṭhapessāmāti.
“世尊……告知此事”一句中,无须多作解释。因为此处正是告知先前已说的诸比丘获碎米、行轻安、免自煮等事,故说“告知此事”。而“善哉,善哉,阿难”是世尊称赞尊者阿难而说。世尊在给予善哉之后,便依二种理由之一而说法,说道:“阿难,你们这些善士已战胜了;未来的后辈大众将会轻视米饭肉食。”此处意趣如下:阿难,你们这些善士,在如此饥馑、乞食难得的时期,以此轻安行持、以此严苛克己,已战胜了。战胜了什么?战胜了饥馑,战胜了贪,战胜了欲行。如何战胜?显示巴利原文
Atha kho bhagavā…pe… etamatthaṃ ārocesīti ettha natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ. Pubbe vuttameva hi bhikkhūnaṃ patthapatthapulakapaṭilābhaṃ sallahukavuttitaṃ sāmapākaparimocanañca ārocento etamatthaṃ ārocesīti vuccati. ‘‘Sādhusādhu, ānandā’’ti idaṃ pana bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ sampahaṃsento āha. Sādhukāraṃ pana datvā dvīsu ākāresu ekaṃ gahetvā dhammaṃ desento āha – ‘‘tumhehi, ānanda, sappurisehi vijitaṃ, pacchimā janatā sālimaṃsodanaṃ atimaññissatī’’ti. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – tumhehi, ānanda, sappurisehi evaṃ dubbhikkhe dullabhapiṇḍe imāya sallahukavuttitāya iminā ca sallekhena vijitaṃ. Kiṃ vijitanti? Dubbhikkhaṃ vijitaṃ, lobho vijito, icchācāro vijito. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Ayaṃ verañjā dubbhikkhā, samantato pana anantarā gāmanigamā phalabhāranamitasassā subhikkhā sulabhapiṇḍā. Evaṃ santepi bhagavā idheva amhe niggaṇhitvā vasatī’’ti ekabhikkhussapi cintā vā vighāto vā natthi. Evaṃ tāva dubbhikkhaṃ vijitaṃ abhibhūtaṃ attano vase vattitaṃ.
如何战胜贪?“此韦兰阇正值饥馑,然周边不远处的村落城镇,庄稼被果实压弯了腰,食物丰足,乞食易得。来吧,我们去那里受用吧。”——却没有任何一位比丘因贪的力量而中断一夜,或作“我们到那里过雨季后安居”而中断安居。如此,贪便被战胜了。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ lobho vijito? ‘‘Ayaṃ verañjā dubbhikkhā, samantato pana anantarā gāmanigamā phalabhāranamitasassā subhikkhā sulabhapiṇḍā . Handa mayaṃ tattha gantvā paribhuñjissāmā’’ti lobhavasena ekabhikkhunāpi ratticchedo vā ‘‘pacchimikāya tattha vassaṃ upagacchāmā’’ti vassacchedo vā na kato. Evaṃ lobho vijito.
如何是“欲行被战胜”?当时韦兰阇正值饥馑,而当地的民众对我们住上两三个月也毫不在意。我们不如来做一种功德交易——彼此向人们这样宣扬:“这位比丘是初禅的证得者……这位比丘证得六神通”,先养护身体,然后再去确立戒行。——这样的欲求,没有任何一位比丘生起。如是,欲行被战胜、被制伏,被置于自己的掌控之下。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ icchācāro vijito? Ayaṃ verañjā dubbhikkhā, ime ca manussā amhe dve tayo māse vasantepi na kismiñci maññanti. Yaṃnūna mayaṃ guṇavāṇijjaṃ katvā ‘‘asuko bhikkhu paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhī…pe… asuko chaḷabhiññoti evaṃ manussānaṃ aññamaññaṃ pakāsetvā kucchiṃ paṭijaggitvā pacchā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhaheyyāmā’’ti ekabhikkhunāpi evarūpā icchā na uppāditā. Evaṃ icchācāro vijito abhibhūto attano vase vattitoti.
然而在未来,后辈的人们坐在寺院中,即使毫不费力地获得食物,也会这样轻视米饭和肉食:“这是什么?米煮得太硬、太烂,不够咸、太咸,不够酸、太酸,这种东西有什么用?”他们将轻视、鄙视、蔑视这些食物。可是,世间并非任何时候都闹饥荒,有时饥馑,有时丰足。当世间变得丰足时,那些对你们的修行生起净信的人们,会认为应当以粥、硬食等种种米饭制品和肉食供养比丘们。而这份依止你们而生起的恭敬,却被称作你们同梵行者的后辈大众所轻慢:他们坐在你们中间,一边受用,一边轻视它,并因此生起慢心与轻蔑心。他们怎样说呢?“为什么要煮这么多?难道你们没有自己的容器吗?每人把自己应得的那份盛出来放着不就好了。”显示巴利原文
Anāgate pana pacchimā janatā vihāre nisinnā appakasireneva labhitvāpi ‘‘kiṃ idaṃ uttaṇḍulaṃ atikilinnaṃ aloṇaṃ atiloṇaṃ anambilaṃ accambilaṃ, ko iminā attho’’ti ādinā nayena sālimaṃsodanaṃ atimaññissati, oññātaṃ avaññātaṃ karissati. Atha vā janapado nāma na sabbakālaṃ dubbhikkho hoti. Ekadā dubbhikkho hoti, ekadā subhikkho hoti. Svāyaṃ yadā subhikkho bhavissati, tadā tumhākaṃ sappurisānaṃ imāya paṭipattiyā pasannā manussā bhikkhūnaṃ yāgukhajjakādippabhedena anekappakāraṃ sālivikatiṃ maṃsodanañca dātabbaṃ maññissanti. Taṃ tumhe nissāya uppannaṃ sakkāraṃ tumhākaṃ sabrahmacārīsaṅkhātā pacchimā janatā tumhākaṃ antare nisīditvā anubhavamānāva atimaññissati, tappaccayaṃ mānañca omānañca karissati. Kathaṃ? Kasmā ettakaṃ pakkaṃ, kiṃ tumhākaṃ bhājanāni natthi, yattha attano santakaṃ pakkhipitvā ṭhapeyyāthāti.
大摩嘎剌那之狮子吼论显示巴利原文
Mahāmoggallānassasīhanādakathā
17 “那时,具寿大目犍连……”等句中,“具寿”是亲昵的称呼,也是表达尊重、恭敬与景仰的称谓。“大目犍连”意为:他因功德广博而为“大”,又以族姓而为“目犍连”,因此称为“大目犍连”。“如此说”即说了此语,此处引出接下来所说的“现在,尊者……”等话。为何这样说呢?据说长老出家后第七天,便达到了声闻波罗蜜智的顶点,且被导师以具大神通力而置于第一之位。他依止自己的大神通力而思惟:“这韦兰阇正值饥馑,比丘们疲惫不堪,我何不翻转大地,以地衣之味供养比丘们呢?”继而他心想:“然而,我若住于世尊身边,不向世尊请求就这么去做,那对我而言不合适,那会显得像是要与世尊争胜一般。”因此,他怀着请求之意,前来对世尊如此说。显示巴利原文
17.Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallānotiādīsu āyasmāti piyavacanametaṃ, garugāravasappatissādhivacanametaṃ. Mahāmoggallānoti mahā ca so guṇamahantatāya moggallāno ca gottenāti mahāmoggallāno. Etadavocāti etaṃ avoca. Idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘etarahi bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ dasseti. Kasmā avoca? Thero kira pabbajitvā sattame divase sāvakapāramiñāṇassa matthakaṃ patto, satthārāpi mahiddhikatāya etadagge ṭhapito. So taṃ attano mahiddhikataṃ nissāya cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ verañjā dubbhikkhā, bhikkhū ca kilamanti, yaṃnūnāhaṃ pathaviṃ parivattetvā bhikkhū pappaṭakojaṃ bhojeyya’’nti. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘sace panāhaṃ bhagavato santike viharanto bhagavantaṃ ayācitvā evaṃ kareyyaṃ, na metaṃ assa patirūpaṃ; yugaggāho viya bhagavatā saddhiṃ kato bhaveyyā’’ti. Tasmā yācitukāmo āgantvā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca.
“下层具足”指的是大地之下层有地壳、地髓、地膜,这是对此而言。此处“具足”意为甘美、味道殊胜。正如在《中部》中“那里的树果实具足、果实丰盛”一句,意指果实甘美;同样,这里“具足”也应理解为甘美、味道殊胜。至于“譬如无巢之小蜜”这句譬喻,是为了说明其甘美的程度而说的。“小蜜”指由小蜜蜂所酿之蜜。“无巢”指没有蜂、没有蜂巢块,纯净无杂。据说这种蜜是一切蜜中最上、最胜、最为美味且最富滋养的,因此说:“其味道譬如无巢之小蜜。”显示巴利原文
Heṭṭhimatalaṃ sampannanti pathaviyā kira heṭṭhimatale pathavimaṇḍo pathavojo pathavi-pappaṭako atthi, taṃ sandhāya vadati. Tattha sampannanti madhuraṃ, sādurasanti attho. Yatheva hi ‘‘tatrassa rukkho sampannaphalo ca upapannaphalo cā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.48) ettha madhuraphaloti attho; evamidhāpi sampannanti madhuraṃ sādurasanti veditabbaṃ. Seyyathāpi khuddamadhuṃ anīḷakanti idaṃ panassa madhuratāya opammanidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Khuddamadhunti khuddakamakkhikāhi katamadhu. Anīḷakanti nimmakkhikaṃ nimmakkhikaṇḍakaṃ parisuddhaṃ. Etaṃ kira madhu sabbamadhūhi aggañca seṭṭhañca surasañca ojavantañca. Tenāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi khuddamadhuṃ anīḷakaṃ evamassāda’’nti.
“善哉,尊者!”即“好啊,尊者!”。此处“善哉”是请求语。长老为了请求翻转大地,对世尊如此说道。“翻转”意思是令其仰起,将下层变为上层。为什么?因为这样做之后,比丘们就能安乐地享用由地膜、地髓所成的地壳。当时,世尊虽不欲允许,但为了让长老作狮子吼,便问道:“大目犍连,那些依地而住的众生,你将如何处理?”意思是:那些住在村落、城镇等依地而居的众生,在大地翻转时若无法安住于空中,你将如何处置、将他们安置于何处?于是,长老为了展现与世尊所授“神通第一”地位相应的自身神通威力,说道:“尊者,我将以一手……”其意为:尊者,我将以一手变化出另一片与这大地相同的大地,如同大地一般。然后,我会将那些依地而住的众生,如同把站在一只手掌上的众生移到另一只手掌上一样,迁移到那片大地去。显示巴利原文
Sādhāhaṃ, bhanteti sādhu ahaṃ, bhante. Ettha sādhūti āyācanavacanametaṃ. Pathaviparivattanaṃ āyācanto hi thero bhagavantaṃ evamāha. Parivatteyyanti ukkujjeyyaṃ, heṭṭhimatalaṃ uparimaṃ kareyyaṃ. Kasmā? Evañhi kate sukhena bhikkhū pappaṭakojaṃ pathavimaṇḍaṃ paribhuñjissantīti. Atha bhagavā ananuññātukāmopi theraṃ sīhanādaṃ nadāpetuṃ pucchi – ‘‘ye pana te, moggallāna, pathavinissitā pāṇā te kathaṃ karissasī’’ti. Ye pathavinissitā gāmanigamādīsu pāṇā, te pathaviyā parivattiyamānāya ākāse saṇṭhātuṃ asakkonte kathaṃ karissasi, kattha ṭhapessasīti? Atha thero bhagavatā etadagge ṭhapitabhāvānurūpaṃ attano iddhānubhāvaṃ pakāsento ‘‘ekāhaṃ, bhante’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – ekaṃ ahaṃ bhante hatthaṃ yathā ayaṃ mahāpathavī evaṃ abhinimminissāmi, pathavisadisaṃ karissāmi. Evaṃ katvā ye pathavinissitā pāṇā te ekasmiṃ hatthatale ṭhite pāṇe tato dutiyahatthatale saṅkāmento viya tattha saṅkāmessāmīti.
于是,世尊拒绝了他的请求,说道:“够了,大目犍连!”等等。此处“够了”是拒绝语。“众生甚至会生起颠倒想”意思是众生甚至会执取颠倒的见解。如何生起呢?他们会想:“这到底是大地的真实大地,还是不是?”或者“这究竟是我们的村落,还是别人的?”对城镇、国土、田地、园林等,也是如此。或者并非这种颠倒,因为具足神通者的神通境界是不可思议的。然而,他们会这样生起颠倒想:“所谓饥馑,并非只有现在才有,未来也会出现。到那时,比丘们到哪里去找那样具神通的同梵行者呢?那些即使已证得须陀洹、斯陀含、阿那含,或是干观行者、得定者、得无碍解的漏尽者,由于没有神通力,也不得不前往俗家乞食。那时,人们会这样想:‘佛陀在世时,比丘们于学处圆满修习。他们成就功德后,在饥馑时翻转大地,享用由地膜所成之物。如今,已没有能圆满修习学处的人了。如果有,他们也会那样做。我们不应给这些人任何熟食或生食。’如此,他们就会对那些圣者个人生起‘没有圣者’的颠倒想。由于这种颠倒想,他们会诽谤、指责圣者,从而堕入恶趣。因此,你不要喜欢翻转大地。”显示巴利原文
Athassa bhagavā āyācanaṃ paṭikkhipanto ‘‘alaṃ moggallānā’’tiādimāha. Tattha alanti paṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyunti viparītaggāhampi sattā sampāpuṇeyyuṃ. Kathaṃ? Ayaṃ nu kho pathavī , udāhu na ayanti. Atha vā amhākaṃ nu kho ayaṃ gāmo, udāhu aññesa’’nti. Evaṃ nigamajanapadakhettārāmādīsu. Na vā esa vipallāso, acinteyyo hi iddhimato iddhivisayo. Evaṃ pana vipallāsaṃ paṭilabheyyuṃ – idaṃ dubbhikkhaṃ nāma na idāniyeva hoti, anāgatepi bhavissati. Tadā bhikkhū tādisaṃ iddhimantaṃ sabrahmacāriṃ kuto labhissanti? Te sotāpanna-sakadāgāmi-anāgāmi-sukkhavipassaka-jhānalābhi-paṭisambhidāppattakhīṇāsavāpi samānā iddhibalābhāvā parakulāni piṇḍāya upasaṅkamissanti. Tatra manussānaṃ evaṃ bhavissati – ‘‘buddhakāle bhikkhū sikkhāsu paripūrakārino ahesuṃ. Te guṇe nibbattetvā dubbhikkhakāle pathaviṃ parivattetvā pappaṭakojaṃ paribhuñjiṃsu. Idāni pana sikkhāya paripūrakārino natthi. Yadi siyuṃ, tatheva kareyyuṃ. Na amhākaṃ yaṃ kiñci pakkaṃ vā āmaṃ vā khādituṃ dadeyyu’’nti. Evaṃ tesuyeva ariyapuggalesu ‘‘natthi ariyapuggalā’’ti imaṃ vipallāsaṃ paṭilabheyyuṃ. Vipallāsavasena ca ariye garahantā upavadantā apāyupagā bhaveyyuṃ. Tasmā mā te rucci pathaviṃ parivattetunti.
于是,长老未能获得此请求,便另求一事,说道:“善哉,尊者!”等。世尊同样拒绝他,说道:“够了,大目犍连!”等。此处,虽然未说“众生甚至会生起颠倒想”,但应依前文所述之理来理解;其含义也应知与前文所说相似。若世尊允许,长老将如何行事?他将一步跨越大海,决意令大海仅如一条小水道,然后从那勒鲁普奇曼陀开辟一条通往北俱卢洲的道路,将北俱卢洲变成往来便利之地,令比丘们如同进入行乞村落一般,安乐地入内乞食并返回。显示巴利原文
Atha thero imaṃ yācanaṃ alabhamāno aññaṃ yācanto ‘‘sādhu, bhante’’tiādimāha. Tampissa bhagavā paṭikkhipanto ‘‘alaṃmoggallānā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kiñcāpi na vuttaṃ ‘‘vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyu’’nti, atha kho pubbe vuttanayeneva gahetabbaṃ; atthopi cassa vuttasadisameva veditabbo. Yadi pana bhagavā anujāneyya, thero kiṃ kareyyāti? Mahāsamuddaṃ ekena padavītihārena atikkamitabbaṃ mātikāmattaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā naḷerupucimandato uttarakuruabhimukhaṃ maggaṃ nīharitvā uttarakuruṃ gamanāgamanasampanne ṭhāne katvā dasseyya, yathā bhikkhū gocaragāmaṃ viya yathāsukhaṃ piṇḍāya pavisitvā nikkhameyyunti.
律制请求事之解释显示巴利原文
Vinayapaññattiyācanakathāvaṇṇanā
18 此时,具寿优波离为显示律制从初始以来的因缘,在说明舍利弗长老关于学处之思惟的生起时,说道:“那时,具寿舍利弗……”等。此处,“独处”指身处静处。“宴坐”指静默独坐,安住于独一之状态。“哪些”指在过去毗婆尸等佛中,哪些佛的梵行得以久住。此处其余文句意义明显。显示巴利原文
18. Idāni āyasmā upāli vinayapaññattiyā mūlato pabhuti nidānaṃ dassetuṃ sāriputtattherassa sikkhāpadapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ vitakkuppādaṃ dassento ‘‘atha kho āyasmato sāriputtassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha rahogatassāti rahasi gatassa. Paṭisallīnassāti sallīnassa ekībhāvaṃ gatassa. Katamesānanti atītesu vipassīādīsu buddhesu katamesaṃ. Ciraṃ assa ṭhiti, cirā vā assa ṭhitīti ciraṭṭhitikaṃ. Sesamettha uttānapadatthameva.
问:难道长老不能自己审察自己的这个思惟吗?答:既能,也不能。他能审察到这样的程度:这些佛陀的教法不久住,这些佛陀的教法久住。然而,由于什么原因而不久住,由于什么原因而久住,这他无法审察。然而,大莲华长老说:“即使此事,对于已达十六种智慧之巅的首座弟子而言亦非难事,但因与正自觉者同住一处时,自行审察犹如舍秤而以手称量,所以他便往诣世尊处请问。”于是,世尊为他开示道:“舍利弗,毗婆尸世尊……”等。其义显然。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana thero imaṃ attano parivitakkaṃ sayaṃ vinicchinituṃ na sakkotīti? Vuccate – sakkoti ca na sakkoti ca. Ayañhi imesaṃ nāma buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosi, imesaṃ ciraṭṭhitikanti ettakaṃ sakkoti vinicchinituṃ. Iminā pana kāraṇena na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosi, iminā ciraṭṭhitikanti etaṃ na sakkoti. Mahāpadumatthero panāha – ‘‘etampi soḷasavidhāya paññāya matthakaṃ pattassa aggasāvakassa na bhāriyaṃ, sammāsambuddhena pana saddhiṃ ekaṭṭhāne vasantassa sayaṃ vinicchayakaraṇaṃ tulaṃ chaḍḍetvā hatthena tulanasadisaṃ hotīti bhagavantaṃyeva upasaṅkamitvā pucchī’’ti. Athassa bhagavā taṃ vissajjento ‘‘bhagavato ca sāriputta vipassissā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ uttānatthameva.
19 长老再问原因而说:“尊者,是何因呢?”等语。其中,“尊者,是何因呢?”是询问原因,意思是“尊者,是哪一种呢?”。“因”与“缘”这两个词都是原因的同义语;因为由于它,果得以生起、转起,所以称为“因”;因为依靠它而生起、转起,所以称为“缘”。如此,二者虽然意义同一,但依于惯用语及措辞的顺畅,这两个词在各处都被说到。其余部分,此处含义明显。显示巴利原文
19. Puna thero kāraṇaṃ pucchanto ko nu kho, bhante, hetūtiādimāha. Tattha ko nu kho bhanteti kāraṇapucchā , tassa katamo nu kho bhanteti attho. Hetu paccayoti ubhayametaṃ kāraṇādhivacanaṃ; kāraṇañhi yasmā tena tassa phalaṃ hinoti pavattati, tasmā hetūti vuccati. Yasmā taṃ paṭicca eti pavattati, tasmā paccayoti vuccati. Evaṃ atthato ekampi vohāravasena ca vacanasiliṭṭhatāya ca tatra tatra etaṃ ubhayampi vuccati. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
现在,为显示那因与缘,而说“世尊与舍利弗、毗婆尸”等语。此处所说的“他们是否懈怠了?”并非指懒惰的懈怠,因为诸佛并无懒惰或精进退失之事。诸佛为一人、二人或整个轮围界说法时,都以同等的精进说法,不会因见到听众少而精进退失,也不会因见到听众多而精进增盛。譬如狮子王每过七日外出觅食,对于或小或大的众生,它都以同样的速度奔跃。那是为什么呢?是为了“不让我的速度减退”。同样,诸佛对少众或多众说法,也都以同等的精进。那是为什么呢?是为了“不让我们的法敬减退”。因为诸佛是敬法者,以法为敬。显示巴利原文
Idāni taṃ hetuñca paccayañca dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā ca sāriputta vipassī’’tiādimāha. Tattha kilāsuno ahesunti na ālasiyakilāsuno, na hi buddhānaṃ ālasiyaṃ vā osannavīriyatā vā atthi. Buddhā hi ekassa vā dvinnaṃ vā sakalacakkavāḷassa vā dhammaṃ desentā samakeneva ussāhena dhammaṃ desenti, na parisāya appabhāvaṃ disvā osannavīriyā honti, nāpi mahantabhāvaṃ disvā ussannavīriyā. Yathā hi sīho migarājā sattannaṃ divasānaṃ accayena gocarāya pakkanto khuddake vā mahante vā pāṇe ekasadiseneva vegena dhāvati. Taṃ kissa hetu? ‘‘Mā me javo parihāyī’’ti. Evaṃ buddhā appakāya vā mahatiyā vā parisāya samakeneva ussāhena dhammaṃ desenti. Taṃ kissa hetu? ‘‘Mā no dhammagarutā parihāyī’’ti. Dhammagaruno hi buddhā dhammagāravāti.
然而,不像我们的世尊那样,犹如注满大海般详细说法,他们并未那样说法。为什么呢?因为众生尘垢少。据说在其时代,长寿的众生尘垢少。他们仅听闻一首与四圣谛相关的偈颂便能证悟法,因此不详细说法。正因如此,他们的经……乃至……方广分也少。其中,经等的差别在第一次结集的注释中已有说明。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana amhākaṃ bhagavā mahāsamuddaṃ pūrayamāno viya vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi, evaṃ te na desesuṃ. Kasmā? Sattānaṃ apparajakkhatāya. Tesaṃ kira kāle dīghāyukā sattā apparajakkhā ahesuṃ. Te catusaccapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ ekagāthampi sutvā dhammaṃ abhisamenti, tasmā na vitthārena dhammaṃ desesuṃ. Teneva kāraṇena appakañca nesaṃ ahosi suttaṃ…pe… vedallanti. Tattha suttādīnaṃ nānattaṃ paṭhamasaṅgītivaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva.
“未为弟子制立学处”:因弟子们尚无过失,故未随其所犯过失而制立应制的、摄于犯聚的教诫学处。“未诵巴帝摩卡”:每半月应诵的教诫巴帝摩卡,当时尚未诵出。他们仅诵说教诫巴帝摩卡,且非每半月诵。正如毗婆尸世尊每隔六年方才诵说一次教诫巴帝摩卡,且是亲自诵说;而他的弟子们并未来到各自的住处诵说。在整个赡部洲,唯有一处——般度摩提王城的安稳鹿野苑,即毗婆尸世尊的住处,全体比丘僧团在此举行布萨。而且那仅是僧团布萨,非别众布萨、非个人布萨、非清净布萨、非决意布萨。显示巴利原文
Apaññattaṃsāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadanti sāvakānaṃ niddosatāya dosānurūpato paññapetabbaṃ sattāpattikkhandhavasena āṇāsikkhāpadaṃ apaññattaṃ. Anuddiṭṭhaṃpātimokkhanti anvaddhamāsaṃ āṇāpātimokkhaṃ anuddiṭṭhaṃ ahosi. Ovādapātimokkhameva te uddisiṃsu; tampi ca no anvaddhamāsaṃ. Tathā hi vipassī bhagavā channaṃ channaṃ vassānaṃ sakiṃ sakiṃ ovādapātimokkhaṃ uddisi; tañca kho sāmaṃyeva. Sāvakā panassa attano attano vasanaṭṭhānesu na uddisiṃsu. Sakalajambudīpe ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā kheme migadāye vipassissa bhagavato vasanaṭṭhāne sabbopi bhikkhusaṅgho uposathaṃ akāsi. Tañca kho saṅghuposathameva; na gaṇuposathaṃ, na puggaluposathaṃ, na pārisuddhiuposathaṃ, na adhiṭṭhānuposathaṃ.
据说当时赡部洲内有八万四千座寺院。每一座寺院中,常有一万、两万乃至更多的比丘持续共住。通报布萨的天神四处通告:“诸位贤者,一年已过,两年、三年、四年、五年已过,今已第六年。应在下一个月圆日,前往见佛并举行布萨!你们集会的时刻已至。”于是,有神通的比丘依自身神通前往,其余比丘则依天神的神通前往。如何前往呢?据说那些比丘,无论位于东海边,还是西、南、北海边,在履行了应尽义务后,拿起衣钵,心中生起“我们去吧”之念;此念一生,他们便已到达布萨堂。他们礼拜毗婆尸正自觉者后,依次而坐。世尊亦于大众坐定后,诵说此教诫巴帝摩卡。显示巴利原文
Tadā kira jambudīpe caturāsītivihārasahassāni honti. Ekamekasmiṃ vihāre abbokiṇṇāni dasapi vīsatipi bhikkhusahassāni vasanti, bhiyyopi vasanti. Uposathārocikā devatā tattha tattha gantvā ārocenti – ‘‘mārisā, ekaṃ vassaṃ atikkantaṃ, dve tīṇi cattāri pañca vassāni atikkantāni, idaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ vassaṃ, āgāminiyā puṇṇamāsiyā buddhadassanatthaṃ uposathakaraṇatthañca gantabbaṃ! Sampatto vo sannipātakālo’’ti. Tato sānubhāvā bhikkhū attano attano ānubhāvena gacchanti, itare devatānubhāvena. Kathaṃ? Te kira bhikkhū pācīnasamuddante vā pacchimauttaradakkhiṇasamuddante vā ṭhitā gamiyavattaṃ pūretvā pattacīvaramādāya ‘‘gacchāmā’’ti cittaṃ uppādenti; saha cittuppādā uposathaggaṃ gatāva honti. Te vipassiṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ abhivādetvā nisīdanti. Bhagavāpi sannisinnāya parisāya imaṃ ovādapātimokkhaṃ uddisati.
不诽谤,不伤害,于巴帝摩卡中防护;
饮食知量,坐卧之处幽僻;
精勤于增上心,此即诸佛之教诫。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khantī paramaṃ tapo titikkhā; Nibbānaṃ paramaṃ vadanti buddhā; Na hi pabbajito parūpaghātī; Na samaṇo hoti paraṃ viheṭhayanto. ‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ, kusalassa upasampadā; Sacittapariyodapanaṃ, etaṃ buddhāna sāsanaṃ. ‘‘Anupavādo anupaghāto, pātimokkhe ca saṃvaro; Mattaññutā ca bhattasmiṃ, pantañca sayanāsanaṃ; Adhicitte ca āyogo, etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti. (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183-185);
依此方式,其余诸佛的巴帝摩卡诵说亦应了知。因为一切诸佛都唯有这三首教诫巴帝摩卡偈。对于长寿佛,它们一直被诵说,直至教法灭尽;对于短寿佛,则仅在初成道时。然而,自从学处被制定之时起,便只诵说制令巴帝摩卡。而且那是比丘们诵说,并非诸佛。因此,我们的世尊也仅在初成道后的二十年间诵说此教诫巴帝摩卡。后来,有一天,世尊住于东园鹿母讲堂,对比丘们说:“诸比丘,从今日起,我将不举行布萨,不诵说巴帝摩卡。诸比丘,从今日起,你们应自行举行布萨,诵说巴帝摩卡。诸比丘,如来于不净众中行布萨、诵巴帝摩卡,无有是处,无有因缘。”从此以后,比丘们便诵说教诫巴帝摩卡。这教诫巴帝摩卡是他们过去未曾诵过的,因此说:“未诵巴帝摩卡”。显示巴利原文
Eteneva upāyena itaresampi buddhānaṃ pātimokkhuddeso veditabbo. Sabbabuddhānañhi imā tissova ovādapātimokkhagāthāyo honti. Tā dīghāyukabuddhānaṃ yāva sāsanapariyantā uddesamāgacchanti; appāyukabuddhānaṃ paṭhamabodhiyaṃyeva. Sikkhāpadapaññattikālato pana pabhuti āṇāpātimokkhameva uddisīyati. Tañca kho bhikkhū eva uddisanti, na buddhā. Tasmā amhākampi bhagavā paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsativassamattameva idaṃ ovādapātimokkhaṃ uddisi. Athekadivasaṃ pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde nisinno bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘na dānāhaṃ, bhikkhave, ito paraṃ uposathaṃ karissāmi pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmi, tumheva dāni bhikkhave ito paraṃ uposathaṃ kareyyātha, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyātha. Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso yaṃ tathāgato aparisuddhāya parisāya uposathaṃ kareyya, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyā’’ti (cūḷava. 386). Tato paṭṭhāya bhikkhū āṇāpātimokkhaṃ uddisanti. Idaṃ āṇāpātimokkhaṃ tesaṃ anuddiṭṭhaṃ ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anuddiṭṭhaṃ pātimokkha’’nti.
这里的“诸佛”,是指毗婆尸佛等三位佛陀。“隐没”指蕴的隐没,即般涅槃。“佛弟子”指那些佛陀的亲传弟子,他们也随着蕴的隐没而离世。“后世弟子”指在亲传弟子座下出家、属于后来的弟子。“种种名”指依“佛护、法护”等名称而有种种不同的名。“种种姓”指依“乔达摩、目犍连”等种姓而有种种不同的姓。“种种生”指依“刹帝利、婆罗门”等出身而有种种不同的出身。“从种种家出家”指并非从刹帝利家等高低、贵贱、贫富之家,而是从各种不同的家族出离、出家。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃbuddhānanti tesaṃ vipassīādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ. Antaradhānenāti khandhantaradhānena; parinibbānenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Buddhānubuddhānanti ye tesaṃ buddhānaṃ anubuddhā sammukhasāvakā tesañca khandhantaradhānena. Ye te pacchimā sāvakāti ye tesaṃ sammukhasāvakānaṃ santike pabbajitā pacchimā sāvakā. Nānānāmāti ‘‘buddharakkhito, dhammarakkhito’’tiādi nāmavasena vividhanāmā. Nānāgottāti ‘‘gotamo, moggallāno’’tiādi gottavasena vividhagottā. Nānājaccāti ‘‘khattiyo, brāhmaṇo’’tiādijātivasena nānājaccā. Nānākulā pabbajitāti khattiyakulādivase neva uccanīcauḷāruḷārabhogādikulavasena vā vividhakulā nikkhamma pabbajitā.
这里的“那梵行”,是指那些后世弟子——他们以同一名、同一姓、同一出身、同一家族出家,将“我们的教法是传统、是传承”视为自己的责任而守护梵行,长久护持教理之法。而这些(后来的)人并非如此。因此,他们互相恼害,颠倒执取,心想“某长老会知道,某长老会知道”而松懈放逸,很快便令那梵行隐没,不加整理守护。“譬如”是对此义的譬喻说明。“散开”即分散,“吹散”即离开原位,“摧毁”即从所在之处移除。“如同未被线串起”,即如同因未被线串起、未连接、未绑缚而散开,正如未被线串起之物会散开一样,此处说为“散开”。“正是如此”是譬喻的对应说明。“使隐没”是指不以品集、五十集等方式加以整理,各自取用自己所喜好的,舍弃其余,令其消失不见。显示巴利原文
Tetaṃ brahmacariyanti te pacchimā sāvakā yasmā ekanāmā ekagottā ekajātikā ekakulā pabbajitā ‘‘amhākaṃ sāsanaṃ tanti paveṇī’’ti attano bhāraṃ katvā brahmacariyaṃ rakkhanti, ciraṃ pariyattidhammaṃ pariharanti. Ime ca tādisā na honti. Tasmā aññamaññaṃ viheṭhentā vilomaṃ gaṇhantā ‘‘asuko thero jānissati, asuko thero jānissatī’’ti sithilaṃ karontā taṃ brahmacariyaṃ khippaññeva antaradhāpesuṃ, saṅgahaṃ āropetvā na rakkhiṃsu. Seyyathāpīti tassatthassa opammanidassanaṃ. Vikiratīti vikkhipati. Vidhamatīti ṭhānantaraṃ neti. Viddhaṃsetīti ṭhitaṭṭhānato apaneti. Yathā taṃ suttena asaṅgahitattāti yathā suttena asaṅgahitattā aganthitattā abaddhattā evaṃ vikirati yathā suttena asaṅgahitāni vikiriyanti, evaṃ vikiratīti vuttaṃ hoti. Evameva khoti opammasampaṭipādanaṃ. Antaradhāpesunti vaggasaṅgaha-paṇṇāsasaṅgahādīhi asaṅgaṇhantā yaṃ yaṃ attano ruccati, taṃ tadeva gahetvā sesaṃ vināsesuṃ adassanaṃ nayiṃsu.
那些世尊以他心洞察弟子之心而教导,毫无疲倦。再者,舍利弗,那些佛陀以自己的心洞察、了知弟子们的心之后,于教导无有疲倦;了知他心之后,不以教导为负担,不以之为戏论。“舍利弗,往昔”等语,是为说明他们不疲倦的特质而说。“令人恐惧的”,即恐怖的、能令人心生恐惧的。“应如此思惟”,即应思惟出离思惟等三种思惟。“不应如此思惟”,即不应思惟欲思惟等三种不善思惟。“应如此作意”,即应对无常、苦、无我、不净作意。“不应如此作意”,即不应对常、乐、我、净作意。“应舍弃此”,即应舍弃不善。“应具足此而住”,即应获得、具足善法,令其成就而住。显示巴利原文
Akilāsuno ca te bhagavanto ahesuṃ sāvake cetasā ceto paricca ovaditunti apica sāriputta te buddhā attano cetasā sāvakānaṃ ceto paricca paricchinditvā ovadituṃ akilāsuno ahesuṃ, paracittaṃ ñatvā anusāsaniṃ na bhāriyato na papañcato addasaṃsu. Bhūtapubbaṃ sāriputtātiādi tesaṃ akilāsubhāvappakāsanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Bhiṃsanaketi bhayānake bhayajananake. Evaṃ vitakkethāti nekkhammavitakkādayo tayo vitakke vitakketha. Mā evaṃ vitakkayitthāti kāmavitakkādayo tayo akusalavitakke mā vitakkayittha. Evaṃ manasi karothāti ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā asubha’’nti manasi karotha. Mā evaṃ manasā katthāti ‘‘niccaṃ sukhaṃ attā subha’’nti mā manasi akarittha. Idaṃ pajahathāti akusalaṃ pajahatha. Idaṃ upasampajja viharathāti kusalaṃ upasampajja paṭilabhitvā nipphādetvā viharatha.
“心无执取而解脱诸漏”,即无所执取而解脱。因为他们的心从那些漏解脱时,并非执取那些漏而解脱,而是以无生而灭尽的方式,在灭尽时不执取而解脱。因此说:“心无执取而解脱诸漏”。他们所有人证得阿拉汉后,心识便如触沐阳光的莲花丛般绽放。至于“舍利弗,在那令人恐惧的丛林处,有令人恐惧之事”这一句,“tatra”是承前之词;“sudaṃ”是虚词;“sāriputta”是呼格。此处的文意衔接为:“tatra”指前文所说的“在某令人恐惧的丛林中”,在那里,那个被称为令人恐惧的丛林,有令人恐惧之事,即具有令人恐惧的作用。什么是令人恐惧之事?即:任何未离贪者……(进入该丛林时,)毛发便会竖立。显示巴利原文
Anupādāyaāsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsūti aggahetvā vimucciṃsu. Tesañhi cittāni yehi āsavehi vimucciṃsu, na te tāni gahetvā vimucciṃsu. Anuppādanirodhena pana nirujjhamānā aggahetvā vimucciṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsū’’ti. Sabbepi te arahattaṃ patvā sūriyarasmisamphuṭṭhamiva padumavanaṃ vikasitacittā ahesuṃ. Tatra sudaṃ sāriputta bhiṃsanakassa vanasaṇḍassa bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ hotīti tatrāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ; sudanti padapūraṇamatte nipāto; sāriputtāti ālapanaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha atthayojanā – tatrāti yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘aññatarasmiṃ bhiṃsanake vanasaṇḍe’’ti, tatra yo so bhiṃsanakoti vanasaṇḍo vutto, tassa bhiṃsanakassa vanasaṇḍassa bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ hoti, bhiṃsanakiriyāya hotīti attho. Kiṃ hoti? Idaṃ hoti – yo koci avītarāgo…pe… lomāni haṃsantīti.
或者,“tatra”是表示所属意义的处格。“su”是虚词,如同“那些沙门婆罗门尊者们究竟名为何”等句中的用法。“idaṃ”是如同现量般指示所欲表达之义的词。“su idaṃ”即“sudaṃ”,应知因连音而省略了i音,如同“眼根、女根、未知当知根”、“究竟在此处有财富”等例。此处的文意关联为:舍利弗,在那令人恐惧的丛林中,有令人恐惧之事,即指“这些”的存在。“bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ”意为“在令人恐惧的状态中”,应见其中省略了一个t音;或者其原形即是“bhiṃsanakattasmiṃ”;又或者本应是“bhiṃsanakatāya”,而出现了性别的转换。此处的处格表原因,因此应如此理解关联:以令人恐惧的状态为因、为缘,而有“这些存在”。任何未离贪者进入那丛林时,大部分毛发竖立——即多数毛发竖立,向上直竖,如针、如荆棘般耸立,少数则不竖。或者,多数众生的毛发竖立,少数极勇猛者则毛发不竖。显示巴利原文
Atha vā tatrāti sāmiatthe bhummaṃ. Suiti nipāto; ‘‘kiṃ su nāma te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.469) viya. Idanti adhippetamatthaṃ paccakkhaṃ viya katvā dassanavacanaṃ. Suidanti sudaṃ, sandhivasena ikāralopo veditabbo. ‘‘Cakkhundriyaṃ, itthindriyaṃ, anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ (vibha. 219), ‘‘kiṃ sūdha vitta’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.73, 246; su. ni. 183) viya. Ayaṃ panettha atthayojanā – tassa sāriputta bhiṃsanakassa vanasaṇḍassa bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ idaṃsu hoti. Bhiṃsanakatasminti bhiṃsanakabhāveti attho. Ekassa takārassa lopo daṭṭhabbo. Bhiṃsanakattasmintiyeva vā pāṭho. ‘‘Bhiṃsanakatāya’’ iti vā vattabbe liṅgavipallāso kato. Nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, tasmā evaṃ sambandho veditabbo – bhiṃsanakabhāve idaṃsu hoti, bhiṃsanakabhāvanimittaṃ bhiṃsanakabhāvahetu bhiṃsanakabhāvapaccayā idaṃsu hoti. Yo koci avītarāgo taṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ pavisati, yebhuyyena lomāni haṃsantīti bahutarāni lomāni haṃsanti uddhaṃ mukhāni sūcisadisāni kaṇṭakasadisāni ca hutvā tiṭṭhanti, appāni na haṃsanti. Bahutarānaṃ vā sattānaṃ haṃsanti. Appakānaṃ atisūrapurisānaṃ na haṃsanti.
此后,“舍利弗,此即是因”等语是结语。其中未在中间加以说明的部分,其义易解,故应随文次第而了知。然而,所谓“非长久住世”者,应知是依人代而言。若按年岁计算,毗婆尸世尊的寿命为八万岁,其亲传弟子亦同此数;如此,其最后一位弟子,连同其寿命合计,梵行住世达十万六千年。但若依人代,则代代相续,仅住世两代人,故说“非长久住世”。尸弃世尊的寿命为七万岁,其亲传弟子亦同此数;毗舍浮世尊的寿命为六万岁,其亲传弟子亦同此数。如此,他们的最后一位弟子,连同其寿命合计,梵行住世各超过十万年,分别为十四万余年和十二万余年。但若依人代,则代代相续,亦仅各住世两代人,故说“非长久住世”。显示巴利原文
Idāni ayaṃ kho, sāriputta, hetūtiādi nigamanaṃ. Yañcettha antarantarā na vuttaṃ, taṃ uttānatthameva. Tasmā pāḷikkameneva veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosīti, taṃ purisayugavasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Vassagaṇanāya hi vipassissa bhagavato asītivassasahassāni āyu, sammukhasāvakānampissa tattakameva. Evamassa yvāyaṃ sabbapacchimako sāvako, tena saha ghaṭetvā satasahassaṃ saṭṭhimattāni ca vassasahassāni brahmacariyaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Purisayugavasena pana yugaparamparāya āgantvā dveyeva purisayugāni aṭṭhāsi. Tasmā na ciraṭṭhitikanti vuttaṃ. Sikhissa pana bhagavato sattativassasahassāni āyu. Sammukhasāvakānampissa tattakameva. Vessabhussa bhagavato saṭṭhivassasahassāni āyu. Sammukhasāvakānampissa tattakameva. Evaṃ tesampi ye sabbapacchimakā sāvakā tehi saha ghaṭetvā satasahassato uddhaṃ cattālīsamattāni vīsatimattāni ca vassasahassāni brahmacariyaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Purisayugavasena pana yugaparamparāya āgantvā dve dveyeva purisayugāni aṭṭhāsi. Tasmā na ciraṭṭhitikanti vuttaṃ.
20 如此,尊者舍利弗听闻了三尊佛的梵行不能长久住世的原因后,又想听闻其余三尊佛的梵行得以长久住世的原因,便再次以“尊者,那么,是什么因缘?”等语向世尊请问。世尊便为他解说。这一切应依之前所说不长久住世之因的反面来理解。至于“长久住世”之义,也当了知:那些佛陀的梵行得以长久住世,既是依于寿量,也是依于弟子相续,两者兼备。因为拘留孙世尊的寿命为四万岁,拘那含佛世尊的寿命为三万岁,迦叶世尊的寿命为二万岁;他们的亲传弟子寿命亦同此数。而且,他们的众多弟子代代相承,令梵行延续。如此,他们的梵行既依寿量,也依弟子相续,两者皆得长久住世。显示巴利原文
20. Evaṃ āyasmā sāriputto tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ brahmacariyassa na ciraṭṭhitikāraṇaṃ sutvā itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ brahmacariyassa ciraṭṭhitikāraṇaṃ sotukāmo puna bhagavantaṃ ‘‘ko pana bhante hetū’’ti ādinā nayena pucchi. Bhagavāpissa byākāsi. Taṃ sabbaṃ vuttapaṭipakkhavasena veditabbaṃ. Ciraṭṭhitikabhāvepi cettha tesaṃ buddhānaṃ āyuparimāṇatopi purisayugatopi ubhayathā ciraṭṭhitikatā veditabbā. Kakusandhassa hi bhagavato cattālīsavassasahassāni āyu, koṇāgamanassa bhagavato tiṃsavassasahassāni, kassapassa bhagavato vīsativassasahassāni; sammukhasāvakānampi nesaṃ tattakameva. Bahūni ca nesaṃ sāvakayugāni paramparāya brahmacariyaṃ pavattesuṃ. Evaṃ tesaṃ āyuparimāṇatopi sāvakayugatopi ubhayathā brahmacariyaṃ ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosi.
然而,我们的世尊,本应于迦叶世尊寿量之半、人寿一万岁时出现于世。若不能于此世,则本应于人寿五千岁时、人寿一千岁时,乃至人寿五百岁时出现于世。然而,当他为了寻求、遍求成就佛果的诸法,令智成熟而入胎时,其智在人寿百岁之时方圆满成熟,因而便在寿命极其短促的时代出现于世。因此,他的梵行虽然依弟子相续而得以长久住世,但若依寿量按年数计算,则只能说并非长久住世。显示巴利原文
Amhākaṃ pana bhagavato kassapassa bhagavato upaḍḍhāyukappamāṇe dasavassasahassāyukakāle uppajjitabbaṃ siyā. Taṃ asambhuṇantena pañcavassasahassāyukakāle, ekavassasahassāyukakāle, pañcavassasatāyukakālepi vā uppajjitabbaṃ siyā. Yasmā panassa buddhattakārake dhamme esantassa pariyesantassa ñāṇaṃ paripācentassa gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentassa vassasatāyukakāle ñāṇaṃ paripākamagamāsi. Tasmā atiparittāyukakāle uppanno. Tenassa sāvakaparamparāvasena ciraṭṭhitikampi brahmacariyaṃ āyuparimāṇavasena vassagaṇanāya naciraṭṭhitikamevāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
21 那么,“那时,尊者舍利弗”等句,其间的衔接为何?如此,听闻了三尊佛的梵行长久住世之因后,尊者舍利弗便得出结论:“唯有制立学处,才是令梵行长久住世之因。”他期望世尊的梵行也能长久住世,于是便向世尊请求制立学处。为了彰显他请求的方式,经文才说:“那时,尊者舍利弗从座而起……长久住世。”其中,“addhaniyaṃ”意为堪忍久远,也就是所谓的长久住世。其余文义自明。显示巴利原文
21.Atha kho āyasmā sāriputtoti ko anusandhi? Evaṃ tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ brahmacariyassa ciraṭṭhitikāraṇaṃ sutvā sikkhāpadapaññattiyeva ciraṭṭhitikabhāvahetūti niṭṭhaṃ gantvā bhagavatopi brahmacariyassa ciraṭṭhitikabhāvaṃ icchanto āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṃ sikkhāpadapaññattiṃ yāci. Tassā yācanavidhidassanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ – atha kho āyasmā sāriputto uṭṭhāyāsanā …pe… ciraṭṭhitikanti. Tattha addhaniyanti addhānakkhamaṃ; dīghakālikanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
于是,世尊为表明“现在尚非制立学处之时”,而说:“舍利弗,你且等待”等语。其中,“āgamehi tvaṃ”意为“你暂且止步”,即“你暂且安忍”之意。此处是出于尊重而重说此语。由此,世尊否定了弟子在制立学处上的权限,表明“制立学处唯是如来之领域”,而说:“如来……”等。在此,“tattha”(于彼处)是依凭请求制立学处而说的处格。其释义为:对于所说“应制立学处”一事,于彼制立学处之事中,唯有如来知其时节。如此说后,为首先显示非其时,而说:“舍利弗,还不是时候”等。显示巴利原文
Athassa bhagavā ‘‘na tāvāyaṃ sikkhāpadapaññattikālo’’ti pakāsento ‘‘āgamehi tvaṃ sāriputtā’’tiādimāha. Tattha āgamehi tvanti tiṭṭha tāva tvaṃ; adhivāsehi tāva tvanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ādaratthavasenevettha dvikkhattuṃ vuttaṃ. Etena bhagavā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā sāvakānaṃ visayabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘buddhavisayova sikkhāpadapaññattī’’ti āvikaronto ‘‘tathāgato vā’’tiādimāha. Ettha ca tatthāti sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanāpekkhaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyyā’’ti, tattha tassā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā tathāgatoyeva kālaṃ jānissatīti. Evaṃ vatvā akālaṃ tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘na tāva sāriputtā’’tiādimāha.
其中,因“诸漏住于这些之中”而称为“漏住处”。其义为:那些现世与来世的苦漏、烦恼漏,以及诽谤、追悔、杀害、缚等,复有成为恶趣苦之殊胜的诸漏,皆安住于这些(漏住处)之中,因为这些(漏住处)正是他们(诸漏)的因。那些漏住处,即违犯之法,只要尚未在僧团中出现,导师便不为弟子制立学处——这是此处的释义。因为若未出现便制立,则无法免于诽谤、非难、呵责之过。显示巴利原文
Tattha āsavā tiṭṭhanti etesūti āsavaṭṭhānīyā. Yesu diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikā dukkhāsavā kilesāsavā ca parūpavādavippaṭisāravadhabandhanādayo ceva apāyadukkhavisesabhūtā ca āsavā tiṭṭhantiyeva, yasmā nesaṃ te kāraṇaṃ hontīti attho. Te āsavaṭṭhānīyā vītikkamadhammā yāva na saṅghe pātubhavanti, na tāva satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetīti ayamettha yojanā. Yadi hi paññapeyya, parūpavādā parūpārambhā garahadosā na parimucceyya.
何以故?因为若要制立,便须将“若比丘行淫法”等全部制立出来。有人若在未见犯戒之过前便知此制,便会生起如此诽谤、非难与呵责:“沙门乔达摩竟说‘我的比丘僧团是追随者、听从我的话’,却又以学处来束缚他们,乃至制定波罗夷,这怎么可以?难道这些善男子不是舍弃了巨大财富、庞大眷属乃至手中的王位而出家,以衣、食为足,于学处深怀恭敬,于身体与生命无所贪着而住吗?在他们之中,有谁会去行属于世间利养的淫法,或偷盗他人财物,或断除他人可爱、可意、极甘美之生命,或以不实功德之语谋生呢?纵然波罗夷尚未制定,仅凭出家这一事实,这些也已然昭然若揭了。”而且,众生将不知如来的力与威德。纵使制定了学处,也会被违犯,不能安住于正位。譬如一位不善的医生,叫来某个尚未生疮的人说:“来,朋友,你身体的这个部位将会生出大疮,带来不幸与灾难,你应预先治疗它。”那人说:“好的,老师,就请您治疗它吧。”于是医生切开那人健康的身体部位,放出血液,再以涂药、包扎、清洗等方法使该处愈合,然后对那人说:“你的大病已被我治愈,给我酬劳吧。”显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Paññapentena hi ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyyā’’tiādi sabbaṃ paññapetabbaṃ bhaveyya. Adisvāva vītikkamadosaṃ imaṃ paññattiṃ ñatvā pare evaṃ upavādañca upārambhañca garahañca pavatteyyuṃ – ‘‘kathañhi nāma samaṇo gotamo bhikkhusaṅgho me anvāyiko vacanakaroti ettāvatā sikkhāpadehi paliveṭhessati, pārājikaṃ paññapessati? Nanu ime kulaputtā mahantaṃ bhogakkhandhaṃ mahantañca ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ hatthagatāni ca rajjānipi pahāya pabbajitā, ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭhā, sikkhāya tibbagāravā, kāye ca jīvite ca nirapekkhā viharanti. Tesu nāma ko lokāmisabhūtaṃ methunaṃ vā paṭisevissati, parabhaṇḍaṃ vā harissati, parassa vā iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ atimadhuraṃ jīvitaṃ upacchindissati, abhūtaguṇakathāya vā jīvitaṃ kappessati! Nanu pārājike apaññattepi pabbajjāsaṅkhepenevetaṃ pākaṭaṃ kata’’nti. Tathāgatassa ca thāmañca balañca sattā na jāneyyuṃ. Paññattampi sikkhāpadaṃ kuppeyya, na yathāṭhāne tiṭṭheyya. Seyyathāpi nāma akusalo vejjo kañci anuppannagaṇḍaṃ purisaṃ pakkosāpetvā ‘‘ehi bho purisa, imasmiṃ te sarīrappadese mahāgaṇḍo uppajjitvā anayabyasanaṃ pāpessati, paṭikacceva naṃ tikicchāpehī’’ti vatvā ‘‘sādhācariya, tvaṃyeva naṃ tikicchassū’’ti vutto tassa arogaṃ sarīrappadesaṃ phāletvā lohitaṃ nīharitvā ālepanabandhanadhovanādīhi taṃ padesaṃ sañchaviṃ katvā taṃ purisaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘mahārogo te mayā tikicchito, dehi me deyyadhamma’’nti. So taṃ ‘‘kimayaṃ bālavejjo vadati? Kataro kira me iminā rogo tikicchito? Nanu me ayaṃ dukkhañca janeti, lohitakkhayañca maṃ pāpetī’’ti evaṃ upavadeyya ceva upārambheyya ca garaheyya ca, na cassa guṇaṃ jāneyya. Evameva yadi anuppanne vītikkamadose satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyya, parūpavādādīhi ca na parimucceyya, na cassa thāmaṃ vā balaṃ vā sattā jāneyyuṃ, paññattampi sikkhāpadaṃ kuppeyya, na yathāṭhāne tiṭṭheyya. Tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘na tāva sāriputta satthā sāvakānaṃ…pe… pātubhavantī’’ti.
在说明了非时之后,为显示适时而说:“然,舍利弗,当……”等语。其中,“当”(yato)即“于何时”(yadā),意思是“于彼时”。其余可依前述之义了知。此处略义如下:当那些被称为“漏处之法”的犯戒过失于僧团中出现时,大师即为弟子制定学处,诵说巴帝摩卡。何以故?为对治他们称为“漏处之法”的犯戒过失。如此制定时,正如同一位善巧的医生,以切开、涂药、包扎、清洗等法治疗已生之疮,平息疾病,令皮肤愈合,不仅不成为诽谤等的对象,反而因医术威力被知晓而获得尊敬;同样地,不仅不成为诽谤等的对象,反因一切知智领域的威力被知晓而获得尊敬。更进一步,其所制之学处不被违犯,安住于正位。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ akālaṃ dassetvā puna kālaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yato ca kho sāriputtā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yatoti yadā; yasmiṃ kāleti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ vuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vā hettha saṅkhepattho – yasmiṃ samaye ‘‘āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gatā vītikkamadosā saṅghe pātubhavanti, tadā satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeti, uddisati pātimokkhaṃ. Kasmā? Tesaṃyeva ‘‘āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gatānaṃ vītikkamadosānaṃ paṭighātāya. Evaṃ paññapento yathā nāma kusalo vejjo uppannaṃ gaṇḍaṃ phālanalepanabandhanadhovanādīhi tikicchanto rogaṃ vūpasametvā sañchaviṃ katvā na tveva upavādādiraho hoti, sake ca ācariyake viditānubhāvo hutvā sakkāraṃ pāpuṇāti; evaṃ na ca upavādādiraho hoti, sake ca sabbaññuvisaye viditānubhāvo hutvā sakkāraṃ pāpuṇāti. Tañcassa sikkhāpadaṃ akuppaṃ hoti, yathāṭhāne tiṭṭhatīti.
在说明“漏处之法”未出现是制戒的非时、出现是适时之后,如今为显示他们法未现之时与出现之时,而说:“舍利弗,于此尚无此类……”等语。其中,义理明显的词句,可依经文即得了知。以下是对不明显词句的注释:“知夜者”(rattaññū)即了知夜晚之人,意指从自己出家之日起,了达众多夜晚,即久出家者。因久出家而具有的伟大,称为“久出家之伟大”(rattaññumahatta),意即依久出家之状态而有的伟大。应知,当僧团达到久出家之伟大时,因优波先那·梵干陀子而制定了学处。当时那位尊者见到不足十夏的比丘为人授具足戒,便以仅有一夏的身份为共住弟子授具足戒。于是世尊制定了学处:“诸比丘,不足十夏者不得授人具足戒。若授者,犯恶作。”(《大品》75)如此制戒之后,比丘们又以“我们已满十夏、我们已满十夏”为由,以愚痴、不聪明之状态授人具足戒。于是世尊又制定了另一条学处:“诸比丘,愚痴、不聪明者不得授人具足戒。若授者,犯恶作。诸比丘,我开许聪明、有能力的比丘,满十夏或超过十夏者,授人具足戒。”(《大品》76)显示巴利原文
Evaṃ āsavaṭṭhānīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppattiṃ sikkhāpadapaññattiyā akālaṃ uppattiñca kālanti vatvā idāni tesaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppattikālañca uppattikālañca dassetuṃ ‘‘na tāva sāriputta idhekacce’’tiādimāha. Tattha uttānatthāni padāni pāḷivaseneva veditabbāni. Ayaṃ pana anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – rattiyo jānantīti rattaññū, attano pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya bahukā rattiyo jānanti, cirapabbajitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Rattaññūhi mahattaṃ rattaññumahattaṃ; cirapabbajitehi mahantabhāvanti attho. Tatra rattaññumahattaṃ patte saṅghe upasenaṃ vaṅgantaputtaṃ ārabbha sikkhāpadaṃ paññattanti veditabbaṃ. So hāyasmā ūnadasavasse bhikkhū upasampādente disvā ekavasso saddhivihārikaṃ upasampādesi. Atha bhagavā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesi – ‘‘na, bhikkhave , ūnadasavassena upasampādetabbo. Yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 75). Evaṃ paññatte sikkhāpade puna bhikkhū ‘‘dasavassāmha dasavassāmhā’’ti bālā abyattā upasampādenti. Atha bhagavā aparampi sikkhāpadaṃ paññāpesi – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, bālena abyattena upasampādetabbo. Yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena dasavassena vā atirekadasavassena vā upasampādetu’’nti (mahāva. 76) rattaññumahattaṃ pattakāle dve sikkhāpadāni paññattāni.
“广大之伟大”(vepullamahatta)指以广大的状态而有的伟大。因为僧团只要尚未因长老、中座、新学比丘而达到广大之伟大时,卧具与坐处便尚充足,教法中某些漏处之法不会生起。然而,当达到广大之伟大时,它们便会生起。那时,大师即为弟子制定学处。其中,于僧团达到广大之伟大时所制之学处,应依此方式了知:如“若比丘与未受具戒者同宿超过二夜、三夜,犯波逸提”(《波逸提》51);“若比丘尼每年度人出家,犯波逸提”(《波逸提》1171);“若比丘尼一年中度两人出家,犯波逸提”(《波逸提》1175)。显示巴利原文
Vepullamahattanti vipulabhāvena mahattaṃ. Saṅgho hi yāva na theranavamajjhimānaṃ vasena vepullamahattaṃ patto hoti, tāva senāsanāni pahonti. Sāsane ekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā na uppajjanti. Vepullamahattaṃ pana patte te uppajjanti. Atha satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeti. Tattha vepullamahattaṃ patte saṅghe paññattasikkhāpadāni ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu anupasampannena uttari dirattatirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ’’ (pāci. 51); ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī anuvassaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ’’ (pāci. 1171); ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī ekaṃ vassaṃ dve vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1175) iminā nayena veditabbāni.
“利养之最胜”:是指利养的最上、最胜状态,即达到利养的最高、最上、广大之相。又或者,是指通过利养而达到最胜、最上与广大状态的意思。因为僧团只要尚未达到利养之最胜,便不会因利养而生起漏处之法;一旦达到,便会生起。这时,导师便为弟子们制定学处:“若比丘亲手给予裸形外道、游行者或女游行者嚼食或啖食,波逸提。”(波逸提第270条)。此学处正是在僧团达到利养之最胜时所制。显示巴利原文
Lābhaggamahattanti lābhassa aggamahattaṃ; yo lābhassa aggo uttamo mahantabhāvo, taṃ patto hotīti attho. Lābhena vā aggamahattampi, lābhena seṭṭhattañca mahantattañca pattoti attho. Saṅgho hi yāva na lābhaggamahattaṃ patto hoti, tāva na lābhaṃ paṭicca āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā uppajjanti. Patte pana uppajjanti, atha satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeti – ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu acelakassa vā paribbājakassa vā paribbājikāya vā sahatthā khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā dadeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 270). Idañhi lābhaggamahattaṃ patte saṅghe sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ.
“多闻之广大”:是指多闻的广大状态。僧团只要尚未达到多闻之广大,漏处之法便不会生起;然而,一旦达到多闻之广大,有些人学了一部、两部乃至五部尼柯耶后,因不如理作意而浮出,他们以味合味,相互混杂,宣扬非法、非律、背离导师的教法。于是导师便以“若比丘作如是言——我如是了知世尊所说法……乃至沙弥尼若也如此说”等方式(波逸提第418条)制定学处。显示巴利原文
Bāhusaccamahattanti bāhusaccassa mahantabhāvaṃ. Saṅgho hi yāva na bāhusaccamahattaṃ patto hoti, tāva na āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā uppajjanti. Bāhusaccamahattaṃ patte pana yasmā ekampi nikāyaṃ, dvepi…pe… pañcapi nikāye uggahetvā ayoniso ummujjamānā puggalā rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvā uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthusāsanaṃ dīpenti. Atha satthā ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu evaṃ vadeyya – tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi…pe… samaṇuddesopi ce evaṃ vadeyyā’’tiādinā (pāci. 418) nayena sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetīti.
世尊如此开示了漏处之法的未生时与已生时后,为显明当时它们全然不存在,而说:“舍利弗,确实无疮疱……”等。其中,“无疮疱”:远离疮疱;所谓疮疱是指盗贼,即无有盗贼之意。在此义中,“盗贼”正是指恶戒者。因为他们虽非沙门而自称沙门,盗取他人的资具。因此,“无疮疱”即无贼、无恶戒之意。“无过患”:指无灾祸、无恼害;即远离恶戒的过患。“离黑”:黑正是指恶戒者;他们虽显现金色,但因与黑法相应,当知即为黑。由于他们不存在,故为“离黑”。也有版本作“已除黑”。“清净”:正因为离黑,所以清净、洁白、光辉。“住立于核心”:核心指戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见等功德;因安住于此核心,故说“住立于核心”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā āsavaṭṭhānīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppattikālañca uppattikālañca dassetvā tasmiṃ samaye sabbasopi tesaṃ abhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘nirabbudo hi sāriputtā’’tiādimāha. Tattha nirabbudoti abbudavirahito; abbudā vuccanti corā, niccoroti attho. Corāti ca imasmiṃ atthe dussīlāva adhippetā. Te hi assamaṇāva hutvā samaṇapaṭiññatāya paresaṃ paccaye corenti. Tasmā nirabbudoti niccoro, niddussīloti vuttaṃ hoti. Nirādīnavoti nirupaddavo nirupasaggo; dussīlādīnavarahitoyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Apagatakāḷakoti kāḷakā vuccanti dussīlāyeva; te hi suvaṇṇavaṇṇāpi samānā kāḷakadhammayogā kāḷakātveva veditabbā. Tesaṃ abhāvā apagatakāḷako . Apahatakāḷakotipi pāṭho. Suddhoti apagatakāḷakattāyeva suddho pariyodāto pabhassaro. Sāre patiṭṭhitoti sāro vuccanti sīla-samādhi-paññāvimutti-vimuttiñāṇadassanaguṇā, tasmiṃ sāre patiṭṭhitattā sāre patiṭṭhito.
如此说明了安住于核心的状态后,为了显示他安住于核心的状态应如此了知,而说‘舍利弗,因为这些’等。此处略释如下——在来到毗兰若入雨安居的这五百比丘中,以功德而言最末、功德最少的那位比丘,是须陀洹。所谓‘须陀洹’,即已入流;‘流’是道的异名。‘须陀洹’是指具足此道者。如所说——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sāre patiṭṭhitabhāvaṃ vatvā puna so cassa sāre patiṭṭhitabhāvo evaṃ veditabboti dassento imesañhi sāriputtāti ādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepavaṇṇanā – yānimāni verañjāyaṃ vassāvāsaṃ upagatāni pañca bhikkhusatāni, imesaṃ yo guṇavasena pacchimako sabbaparittaguṇo bhikkhu, so sotāpanno. Sotāpannoti sotaṃ āpanno; sototi ca maggassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sotāpannoti tena samannāgatassa puggalassa. Yathāha –
‘舍利弗,常言“流、流”,何为流?’‘尊者,此八支圣道即是流,即正见……乃至正定。’‘舍利弗,常言“须陀洹、须陀洹”,何为须陀洹?’‘尊者,凡具足此八支圣道者,即称为须陀洹。此尊者有如此名、如此姓。’(《相应部》5.1001)但这里是以道名而称果位。因此,安住于果者当知为‘须陀洹’。显示巴利原文
‘‘Soto sototi hidaṃ, sāriputta, vuccati; katamo nu kho, sāriputta, sototi? Ayameva hi, bhante, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhī’’ti. ‘‘Sotāpanno sotāpannoti hidaṃ, sāriputta, vuccati; katamo nu kho, sāriputta, sotāpanno’’ti? ‘‘Yo hi, bhante, iminā ariyena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena samannāgato, ayaṃ vuccati – sotāpanno. Soyamāyasmā evaṃnāmo evaṃgotto’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1001). Idha pana maggena phalassa nāmaṃ dinnaṃ. Tasmā phalaṭṭho ‘‘sotāpanno’’ti veditabbo.
‘无堕法’:‘堕’是能令人堕落者;他没有堕法,故为无堕法,意即没有令自己堕于恶趣的自性。何以故?因为导致往恶趣的那些法已灭尽。或者,‘堕’为堕落;他没有堕法,故为无堕法,意即没有在恶趣中堕落的自性。因由正性决定之道而决定,故为‘决定’。以正觉为最终归趣、最终去处,故为‘以正觉为归趣’。意即必定通达上三道。何以故?因为已证得初道。显示巴利原文
Avinipātadhammoti vinipātetīti vinipāto; nāssa vinipāto dhammoti avinipātadhammo, na attānaṃ apāyesu vinipātanasabhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Ye dhammā apāyagamanīyā, tesaṃ parikkhayā. Vinipatanaṃ vā vinipāto, nāssa vinipāto dhammoti avinipātadhammo, apāyesu vinipātanasabhāvo assa natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sammattaniyāmena maggena niyatattā niyato. Sambodhi paraṃ ayanaṃ parā gati assāti sambodhiparāyaṇo. Upari maggattayaṃ avassaṃ sampāpakoti attho. Kasmā? Paṭiladdhapaṭhamamaggattāti.
佛陀行仪故事显示巴利原文
Buddhāciṇṇakathā
22 如此令法将领会之后,世尊在毗兰若度过雨安居,安居结束后,于大自恣时行了自恣。那时,世尊对具寿阿难说。这里的“说”意为称呼、言说、令了知。如何说呢?即“这实为诸佛所行……”云云。“所行”指已经行持、已经造作、随顺法性的行为。此所行有两种:佛所行与弟子所行。其中,佛所行是指:若受某人邀请而住雨安居,若未向彼辞别、告知,便不前往人间游行。弟子们则或辞别,或不辞别,随其所好而去。显示巴利原文
22. Evaṃ dhammasenāpatiṃ saññāpetvā verañjāyaṃ taṃ vassāvāsaṃ vītināmetvā vutthavasso mahāpavāraṇāya pavāretvā atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āmantesi. Āmantesīti ālapi abhāsi sambodhesi. Kinti? Āciṇṇaṃ kho panetanti evamādi. Āciṇṇanti caritaṃ vattaṃ anudhammatā. Taṃ kho panetaṃ āciṇṇaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti – buddhāciṇṇaṃ, sāvakāciṇṇanti. Katamaṃ buddhāciṇṇaṃ? Idaṃ tāva ekaṃ – yehi nimantitā vassaṃ vasanti, na te anapaloketvā anāpucchitvā janapadacārikaṃ pakkamanti. Sāvakā pana apaloketvā vā anapaloketvā vā yathāsukhaṃ pakkamanti.
还有,诸佛的常行是:雨安居结束后举行自恣,为摄受大众,便出发游行人间。游行人间时,他们在大区域、中区域、末区域这三种区域中的某一区域游行。其中,大区域方圆九百由旬,中区域方圆六百由旬,末区域方圆三百由旬。若诸佛想在大区域游行,便于“大自恣”中自恣后,于新月首日由大比丘僧众随从,离开住处,在村落、城镇等处,以接受饮食供养摄受大众,并以法施增长他们导向出离的善法,历时九个月完成人间游行。然而,若在雨安居期间,比丘们的止观尚未成熟,则不举行大自恣,而举行“摄自恣”,于迦提月满月日自恣,于末伽始罗月首日由大比丘僧众随从,离开住处,依前述方式在中区域游行八个月。再者,若那些雨安居结束的比丘中,有可化导的众生根器未熟,为了等待他们根器成熟,便于末伽始罗月也住于该处,于颇沙月首日由大比丘僧众随从,离开住处,依前述方式在末区域游行七个月。在这些区域中,无论游行何处,他们都使那些众生脱离烦恼,证得须陀洹果等,唯随顺可化导者而行,犹如采摘各色花朵一般。显示巴利原文
Aparampi buddhāciṇṇaṃ – vutthavassā pavāretvā janasaṅgahatthāya janapadacārikaṃ pakkamantiyeva. Janapadacārikaṃ carantā ca mahāmaṇḍalaṃ majjhimamaṇḍalaṃ antimamaṇḍalanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maṇḍalānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ maṇḍale caranti. Tattha mahāmaṇḍalaṃ navayojanasatikaṃ, majjhimamaṇḍalaṃ chayojanasatikaṃ, antimamaṇḍalaṃ tiyojanasatikaṃ. Yadā mahāmaṇḍale cārikaṃ caritukāmā honti, tadā mahāpavāraṇāya pavāretvā pāṭipadadivase mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivārā nikkhamitvā gāmanigamādīsu mahājanaṃ āmisapaṭiggahena anuggaṇhantā dhammadānena cassa vivaṭṭupanissitaṃ kusalaṃ vaḍḍhentā navahi māsehi janapadacārikaṃ pariyosāpenti. Sace pana antovasse bhikkhūnaṃ samathavipassanā taruṇā honti, mahāpavāraṇāya appavāretvā pavāraṇāsaṅgahaṃ datvā kattikapuṇṇamāyaṃ pavāretvā māgasirassa paṭhamadivase mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivārā nikkhamitvā vuttanayeneva majjhimamaṇḍale aṭṭhahi māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpenti. Sace pana nesaṃ vutthavassānaṃ aparipākindriyā veneyyasattā honti, tesaṃ indriyaparipākaṃ āgamentā māgasiramāsampi tattheva vasitvā phussamāsassa paṭhamadivase mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivārā nikkhamitvā vuttanayeneva antimamaṇḍale sattahi māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpenti. Tesu ca maṇḍalesu yattha katthaci vicarantāpi te te satte kilesehi viyojentā sotāpattiphalādīhi payojentā veneyyavaseneva nānāvaṇṇāni pupphāni ocinantā viya caranti.
还有,诸佛的常行是:每日黎明时分,以寂静之乐——涅槃为所缘,入果等至;从果等至出定后,每日入大悲等至;出此定后,观察一万个轮围世界中可化导的众生。显示巴利原文
Aparampi buddhānaṃ āciṇṇaṃ – devasikaṃ paccūsasamaye santaṃ sukhaṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ katvā phalasamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ, phalasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā devasikaṃ mahākaruṇāsamāpattiyā samāpajjanaṃ, tato vuṭṭhahitvā dasasahassacakkavāḷe bodhaneyyasattasamavalokanaṃ.
诸佛的常行还有:与来客先作亲切问候,随所发生的事缘而说法,于过失出现时制定学处。这是诸佛的常行。显示巴利原文
Aparampi buddhānaṃ āciṇṇaṃ – āgantukehi saddhiṃ paṭhamataraṃ paṭisanthārakaraṇaṃ, aṭṭhuppattivasena dhammadesanā, otiṇṇe dose sikkhāpadapaññāpananti idaṃ buddhāciṇṇaṃ.
什么是声闻的常行?在世尊佛陀的时代,有两次集会:一次在入雨安居前,为领受业处;一次在雨安居结束后,为宣说所证得的功德,并进一步领受业处。这是声闻的常行。而在此处,为显示诸佛的常行,他说:“阿难,这确实是诸如来的常行。”显示巴利原文
Katamaṃ sāvakāciṇṇaṃ? Buddhassa bhagavato kāle dvikkhattuṃ sannipāto pure vassūpanāyikāya ca kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇatthaṃ, vutthavassānañca adhigataguṇārocanatthaṃ upari kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇatthañca . Idaṃ sāvakāciṇṇaṃ. Idha pana buddhāciṇṇaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘āciṇṇaṃ kho panetaṃ, ānanda, tathāgatāna’’nti.
“Āyāma”意为“来,我们走”。“Apalokessāma”意为“为游行故,我们将去告辞”。“Evaṃ”是表示同意的虚词。“Bhante”是表示尊敬的称呼,也可作为对导师的回答。“Bhagavato paccassosi”意为“他回应世尊的话,即面向世尊而听受、认可”。以“Evaṃ”一词,表示他已接受。显示巴利原文
Āyāmāti āgaccha yāma. Apalokessāmāti cārikaṃ caraṇatthāya āpucchissāma. Evanti sampaṭicchanatthe nipāto. Bhanteti gāravādhivacanametaṃ; satthuno paṭivacanadānantipi vaṭṭati. Bhagavato paccassosīti bhagavato vacanaṃ paṭiassosi, abhimukho hutvā suṇi sampaṭicchi. Evanti iminā vacanena paṭiggahesīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“那时,世尊穿好衣服”——这里并未说明是上午还是傍晚。虽然如此,世尊用过饭食、度过正午后,便让尊者阿难作随行沙门,从城门开始,以纯金般璀璨的光芒照亮城中街道,前往维兰若婆罗门的住处。世尊刚在门口站立,仆人看见便去通报。婆罗门恢复正念,生起悚惧,急忙起身,铺设了尊贵的座位,出来迎接世尊,说:“世尊,请从这里过来。”世尊走过去,坐在铺设的座位上。那时,维兰若婆罗门想靠近世尊而坐,便从自己站立之处走向世尊。此后文义浅显。显示巴利原文
Atha kho bhagavā nivāsetvāti idha pubbaṇhasamayanti vā sāyanhasamayanti vā na vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi bhagavā katabhattakicco majjhanhikaṃ vītināmetvā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ pacchāsamaṇaṃ katvā nagaradvārato paṭṭhāya nagaravīthiyo suvaṇṇarasapiñjarāhi raṃsīhi samujjotayamāno yena verañjassa brāhmaṇassa nivesanaṃ tenupasaṅkami. Gharadvāre ṭhitamattameva cassa bhagavantaṃ disvā parijano ārocesi. Brāhmaṇo satiṃ paṭilabhitvā saṃvegajāto sahasā vuṭṭhāya mahārahaṃ āsanaṃ paññapetvā bhagavantaṃ paccuggamma ‘‘ito, bhagavā, upasaṅkamatū’’ti āha. Bhagavā upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṃ upanisīditukāmo attanā ṭhitapadesato yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami. Ito paraṃ uttānatthameva.
而婆罗门所说“凡是应施之物,我都没有施与”,其含义是这样的:对于受我邀请、在此安住雨安居的你们,在三个月中,每天早晨的粥和硬食,正午的嚼食与啖食,傍晚的种种饮料,以及以香、花等所作的供养与恭敬——像这样的应施之物,本应施与,却没有施与。至于“那确实是我们没有的”这句话,应知有词序颠倒。它的意思是:“那个应施之物是我们所没有的。”或者,应知此处的意思是:“我们本应施与你们的布施物品,那确实是我们没有的。”显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana brāhmaṇo āha – ‘‘apica yo deyyadhammo, so na dinno’’ti. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – mayā nimantitānaṃ vassaṃvutthānaṃ tumhākaṃ temāsaṃ divase divase pāto yāgukhajjakaṃ, majjhanhike khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ, sāyanhe anekavidha pānavikati gandhapupphādīhi pūjāsakkāroti evamādiko yo deyyadhammo dātabbo assa, so na dinnoti. Tañca kho no asantanti ettha pana liṅgavipallāso veditabbo. So ca kho deyyadhammo amhākaṃ no asantoti ayañhettha attho. Atha vā yaṃ dānavatthuṃ mayaṃ tumhākaṃ dadeyyāma, tañca kho no asantanti evamettha attho veditabbo.
“并非不愿施与”意为:并非没有施与的意愿,不同于那些财物资具丰足却悭吝之人。“那么,这如何能得到?在家生活事务繁多。”此处的解释是:由于在家生活事务繁多,即使有应施之物和施与的意愿,又如何能得到呢?如何能做到我们施与你们应施之物呢?他这样说,是在责备在家生活。据说,他并不知道自己被魔罗所覆蔽,而认为“由于在家生活的障碍,我失去了正念”,所以才这么说。再者,“那在此处如何可得?”意思是:在这三个月中,我本应施与你们的,如何能得到呢?因为在家生活确实事务繁多。应知此处作如是解。显示巴利原文
Nopiadātukamyatāti adātukāmatāpi no natthi, yathā pahūtavittūpakaraṇānaṃ maccharīnaṃ. Taṃ kutettha labbhā bahukiccā gharāvāsāti tatrāyaṃ yojanā – yasmā bahukiccā gharāvāsā, tasmā ettha santepi deyyadhamme dātukamyatāya ca taṃ kuto labbhā kuto taṃ sakkā laddhuṃ, yaṃ mayaṃ tumhākaṃ deyyadhammaṃ dadeyyāmāti gharāvāsaṃ garahanto āha. So kira mārena āvaṭṭitabhāvaṃ na jānāti, ‘‘gharāvāsapalibodhena me satisammoso jāto’’ti maññi, tasmā evamāha. Apica – taṃ kutettha labbhāti imasmiṃ temāsabbhantare yamahaṃ tumhākaṃ dadeyyaṃ, taṃ kuto labbhā? Bahukiccā hi gharāvāsāti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
于是,那位婆罗门心想:“我不如将原本要在三个月内供养的一切,全在一天之内供养出去。”便说了“请乔达摩尊者接受我”等话语。其中,“为明日”的意思是:为了我恭敬供养诸位时,明天将会产生的福德,以及喜悦与欢愉。接着,如来心想:“如果我不接受,这婆罗门便会认为:‘此人三个月来一无所获,大概是生气了,因此即使我请求,他连一餐也不接受。此人没有接受的忍耐心,并非一切知者。’如此,婆罗门与韦兰阇的居民们将会责备于我,造下众多非福。愿他们莫要如此。”出于对他们的悲悯,世尊以默然的方式接受了。显示巴利原文
Atha brāhmaṇo ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ yaṃ me tīhi māsehi dātabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ ekadivaseneva dadeyya’’nti cintetvā adhivāsetu me bhavaṃ gotamotiādimāha. Tattha svātanāyāti yaṃ me tumhesu sakkāraṃ karoto sve bhavissati puññañceva pītipāmojjañca, tadatthāya. Atha tathāgato ‘‘sace ahaṃ nādhivāseyyaṃ, ‘ayaṃ temāsaṃ kiñci aladdhā kupito maññe, tena me yāciyamāno ekabhattampi na paṭiggaṇhāti, natthi imasmiṃ adhivāsanakhanti, asabbaññū aya’nti evaṃ brāhmaṇo ca verañjāvāsino ca garahitvā bahuṃ apuññaṃ pasaveyyuṃ, taṃ tesaṃ mā ahosī’’ti tesaṃ anukampāya adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
世尊接受之后,先令韦兰阇婆罗门了悟:“莫再为在家生活的障碍而忧虑。”接着,以适合当时的法谈开示现世与来世的利益,劝请他接纳善法,并在那里激励他、令他充满热忱,又以这份热忱及余诸功德令他欢喜。如此降下法味之雨后,世尊从座起身离去。世尊离去后,韦兰阇婆罗门对妻儿说:“唉,我们邀请了世尊三个月,却连一天一餐也不曾供养。来吧,现在就准备这样的布施,使三个月的供品能在明日一天之内供养出去。”于是,他让人准备了殊胜的布施。邀请世尊的次日,他让人装饰坐处,铺设极为尊贵的座位,准备了香、熏香、花鬘等缤纷的大供养,然后派人告知世尊时间已到。因此说:“那时,韦兰阇婆罗门在那夜晚过后……(中略)……饭食已备。”显示巴利原文
Adhivāsetvā ca atha kho bhagavā verañjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ ‘‘alaṃ gharāvāsapalibodhacintāyā’’ti saññāpetvā taṅkhaṇānurūpāya dhammiyā kathāya diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ atthaṃ sandassetvā kusale dhamme samādapetvā gaṇhāpetvā tattha ca naṃ samuttejetvā saussāhaṃ katvā tāya saussāhatāya aññehi ca vijjamānaguṇehi sampahaṃsetvā dhammaratanavassaṃ vassetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi. Pakkante ca pana bhagavati verañjo brāhmaṇo puttadāraṃ āmantesi – ‘‘mayaṃ, bhaṇe, bhagavantaṃ temāsaṃ nimantetvā ekadivasaṃ ekabhattampi nādamha. Handa, dāni tathā dānaṃ paṭiyādetha yathā temāsikopi deyyadhammo sve ekadivaseneva dātuṃ sakkā hotī’’ti. Tato paṇītaṃ dānaṃ paṭiyādāpetvā yaṃ divasaṃ bhagavā nimantito, tassā rattiyā accayena āsanaṭṭhānaṃ alaṅkārāpetvā mahārahāni āsanāni paññapetvā gandhadhūmavāsakusumavicitraṃ mahāpūjaṃ sajjetvā bhagavato kālaṃ ārocāpesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo tassā rattiyā accayena…pe… niṭṭhitaṃ bhatta’’nti.
23 世尊由比丘僧团围绕,到了那里。因此说:“那时,世尊……(中略)……与比丘僧团一同坐下。”其中,“以佛为首的比丘僧团”意为以佛为导首、以佛为僧中上座而坐。“殊胜的”即最上的。“亲手”即用自己的手。“令饱足”即充分令饱足,使其圆满饱食、满足所需。“令谢拒”即善令谢拒,通过手示、面示和言语表示“够了”而令其停止。“已食”即已进食者。“钵已离手”即手已离钵,意为手已移开。他以三衣覆赠,即把三衣供养世尊。这“以三衣覆赠”只是惯用语,那三衣中每一件布价值一千。如此,婆罗门供养了世尊价值三千的三衣,如同最上的迦尸布。又以一对布一一供养每一位比丘,其中一件布价值五百。如此,他为五百比丘供养了价值五十万的布。婆罗门给了这么多仍不满足,又把价值七八千的许多红毯和绢布等撕开,分给比丘们作系带、腰带、滤水囊等用。又将百煎、千煎的药油灌满葫芦,给每一位比丘价值千金的涂身油。何必多说,在四种资具中,没有任何沙门所用物品是他未曾供养的。然而,经文中只提到了衣。显示巴利原文
23. Bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto tattha agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho bhagavā…pe… nisīdi saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghenā’’ti. Atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghanti buddhappamukhanti buddhapariṇāyakaṃ; buddhaṃ saṅghattheraṃ katvā nisinnanti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṇītenāti uttamena. Sahatthāti sahatthena. Santappetvāti suṭṭhu tappetvā, paripuṇṇaṃ suhitaṃ yāvadatthaṃ katvā. Sampavāretvāti suṭṭhu pavāretvā ‘ala’nti hatthasaññāya mukhasaññāya vacībhedena ca paṭikkhipāpetvā. Bhuttāvinti bhuttavantaṃ. Onītapattapāṇinti pattato onītapāṇiṃ; apanītahatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ticīvarena acchādesīti ticīvaraṃ bhagavato adāsi. Idaṃ pana vohāravacanamattaṃ hoti ‘‘ticīvarena acchādesī’’ti, tasmiñca ticīvare ekameko sāṭako sahassaṃ agghati. Iti brāhmaṇo bhagavato tisahassagghanakaṃ ticīvaramadāsi uttamaṃ kāsikavatthasadisaṃ. Ekamekañca bhikkhuṃ ekamekena dussayugenāti ekamekena dussayugaḷena. Tatra ekasāṭako pañcasatāni agghati. Evaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ pañcasatasahassagghanakāni dussāni adāsi. Brāhmaṇo ettakampi datvā atuṭṭho puna sattaṭṭhasahassagghanake anekarattakambale ca paṭṭuṇṇapattapaṭe ca phāletvā phāletvā āyogaaṃsabaddhakakāyabandhanaparissāvanādīnaṃ atthāya adāsi. Satapākasahassapākānañca bhesajjatelānaṃ tumbāni pūretvā ekamekassa bhikkhuno abbhañjanatthāya sahassagghanakaṃ telamadāsi. Kiṃ bahunā, catūsu paccayesu na koci parikkhāro samaṇaparibhogo adinno nāma ahosi. Pāḷiyaṃ pana cīvaramattameva vuttaṃ.
如此举行盛大供养后,婆罗门与妻儿一同礼敬,然后坐下。那时,世尊对韦兰阇婆罗门——他三个月来因魔障而未能听闻正法、品尝法味——便于一日之内为他降下法甘露之雨,以法语开示,令他心愿圆满……(中略)……从座起身离去。婆罗门也与妻儿一同礼敬世尊和比丘僧团,口中说着“尊者,请今后也垂护念我们”等语,流着泪跟随其后,然后返回。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ mahāyāgaṃ yajitvā saputtadāraṃ vanditvā nisinnaṃ atha kho bhagavā verañjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ temāsaṃ mārāvaṭṭanena dhammasavanāmatarasaparibhogaparihīnaṃ ekadivaseneva dhammāmatavassaṃ vassetvā puripuṇṇasaṅkappaṃ kurumāno dhammiyākathāya sandassetvā…pe… uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi. Brāhmaṇopi saputtadāro bhagavantañca bhikkhusaṅghañca vanditvā ‘‘punapi, bhante, amhākaṃ anuggahaṃ kareyyāthā’’ti evamādīni vadanto anubandhitvā assūni pavattayamāno nivatti.
“那时,世尊在韦兰阇随心所欲地住了一段时间”,意为:随自己的意愿、喜好而住之后,便离开韦兰阇。在大区域游行时,由于饥馑灾,比丘僧团疲惫不堪,世尊欲带领他们走直路,便避开了佛陀常行的大道,未前往索雷亚等地,直往钵罗耶伽住处,在那里渡过恒河,向波罗奈方向而去。因此说“向彼而去”。在那里也随心住了一段时间后,前往毗舍离。因此说:“未到索雷亚……(中略)……在毗舍离大林重阁讲堂住。”显示巴利原文
Atha kho bhagavā verañjāyaṃ yathābhirantaṃ viharitvāti yathājjhāsayaṃ yathārucitaṃ vāsaṃ vasitvā verañjāya nikkhamitvā mahāmaṇḍale cārikāya caraṇakāle gantabbaṃ buddhavīthi pahāya dubbhikkhadosena kilantaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ujunāva maggena gahetvā gantukāmo soreyyādīni anupagamma payāgapatiṭṭhānaṃ gantvā tattha gaṅgaṃ nadiṃ uttaritvā yena bārāṇasī tadavasari. Tena avasari tadavasari. Tatrāpi yathājjhāsayaṃ viharitvā vesāliṃ agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anupagamma soreyyaṃ…pe… vesāliyaṃ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāya’’nti.
由师师相承而来,依因缘事由之分别而阐明;
由远离他宗之说,与自宗之清净;
由文句之净化,由词义之辨析,及巴利语之连接次第;
由学处之决断,由显示分别之诸理趣差别。
显示巴利原文 Ācariyaparamparato, nidānavatthuppabhedadīpanato; Parasamayavivajjanato, sakasamayavisuddhito ceva. Byañjanaparisodhanato, padatthato pāḷiyojanakkamato; Sikkhāpadanicchayato, vibhaṅganayabhedadassanato. Sampassataṃ na dissati, kiñci apāsādikaṃ yato ettha; Viññūnamayaṃ tasmā, samantapāsādikātveva. Saṃvaṇṇanā pavattā, vinayassa vineyyadamanakusalena; Vuttassa lokanāthena, lokamanukampamānenāti.